LOGFAS ADAMS Tutorial

NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable PfP
LOGISTICS FUNCTIONAL AREA SERVICES
(LOGFAS)
VERSION 6.1
VERSION 6.0
EFFECTIVE VISIBLE EXECUTION
(EVE)
USER GUIDE AND TUTORIAL
Document Version 1
November 2011
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable PfP
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable PfP
This Page Intentionally Blank
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable PfP
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
CAVEATS
Page i
LOGISTICS FUNCTIONAL AREA SERVICES
(LOGFAS)
VERSION 6.1
EFFECTIVE VISIBLE EXECUTION
(EVE)
USER GUIDE AND TUTORIAL
Document Version 1
CAVEATS
This document has been produced as a part of the support to NATO’s Logistical
Functional Area Services (LOGFAS). It is in draft format suitable for amendment
as a stand-alone document. However, the overall format and conventions have
made it compatible with the other LOGFAS User Tutorials.
The draft incorporates known changes to the software for Version 6.1 and it has
been written in the knowledge that the associated LOGFAS software is still under
development. Therefore, the software depicted may not be accurately reflected in
future builds.
The data used in the production of the draft is available from the relevant ACO,
NC3A or NCSA Project Leaders. It may also be downloaded from the LOGNET
Websites.
The classification of this document is NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP.
As well as the designated nations that this classification applies to, the document
is also authorized for release to all nations taking part in NATO Operations and
Exercises. This document is also releasable to EUFOR and MD Countries.
November 2011
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
CAVEATS
Page ii
This Page Intentionally Blank
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page iii
TABLE
TABLEOF
OFCONTENTS
CONTENTS
SUBJECT
Page:
CAVEATS
i to ii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
iii to x
INTRODUCTION
Scope and Organisation of this Tutorial
Audience
Scope
Help
Software Status
System Requirements
Tutorial Scenario
Forces
Scenario Concept
The “P” Words
Preferences
Plans
Profiles
Projects
Parameters
Packages
Paths (Networks and Trails)
Using the Tutorials
Document Conventions
Finding Your Way Around
LOGFAS versus MS Windows-type Conventional Icons
I to VII
CHAPTER 1 - UTILITY TOOLS
Introduction
LOGFAS Connection Manager (LCM)
Importing a Database
Setting the Active Database
Coping a Database
Editing a Database
Creating a New Database
Deleting a Database
Exporting a Database
Disconnect from a Local Database
Connecting to Local Database
Connecting to Remote Database
Reportable Item Codes (RICs) - Upgrading RIC Versions
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
I
I
I
I
II
II
II
III
IV
IV
IV
IV
IV
V
V
V
V
V
VI
VI
VI
1 - 1 to 1 - 22
1-1
1-1
1-3
1-4
1-5
1-6
1-7
1-8
1-8
1-9
1 - 10
1 - 11
1 - 12
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page iv
SUBJECT
Checking the RIC Version of Database
Updating RIC Version
SQL Update
Data Migration Tool (DMT)
Accessing the Program
Opening the DMT
Importing Data
User Management Module (UMM)
Page:
1 - 12
1 - 12
1 - 15
1 - 16
1 - 16
1 - 16
1 - 17
1 - 21
CHAPTER 2 - GEOGRAPHICAL AND INFRASTRUCTURE DATA
Starting With Geoman
Introduction
Opening the GeoMan
Map Controls
Map Projects
Selecting a Project
Creating a New Map Project
Deleting a Map Project
Installing Map Data
Installing Local Source Map Data
Locating Map Data
Viewing Maps
Accessing Maps
Default Map
Zoom In, Zoom Out and Pan Maps
Zoom In Function
Zoom Out Function
Pan Map Function
Create, Delete, Import Maps
Creating Maps in Local Maps Mode
Creating Maps in Server Mode
Deleting Maps
Importing Maps from Other Sources
Example Import
Toolbar Functions
Copy Maps in Clipboard
Distance Tool
Map Objects
GeoLocs
Creating a New GeoLoc
Step1: Create a Map or Select an Existing Project Map
Step 2: Set and/or Verify the GeoLoc Code Prefix
Step 3: Select Type of GeoLoc
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
2 - 1 to 2 - 92
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-3
2-5
2-5
2-6
2-7
2-8
2-9
2-9
2 - 11
2 - 11
2 - 11
2 - 13
2 - 13
2 - 13
2 - 13
2 - 14
2 - 14
2 - 17
2 - 18
2 - 18
2 - 20
2 - 24
2 - 24
2 - 25
2 - 27
2 - 28
2 - 29
2 - 29
2 - 29
2 - 30
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page v
SUBJECT
Step 4: Drag and Drop GeoLoc Type Icon to Display Map
Step 5: Complete the ADD GeoLoc Information
Step 6: Review the GeoLoc
Step 7: Inserting and Update the Map Object Properties
Map Object Properties
Location Tab
Throughput Tab
Associated Areas Tab
Copying an Existing Location
GeoLoc Query Function
Find GeoLoc
Infrastructure Data Conventions
Deleting a Location
Multimedia
Drawn Objects
Creating a Line
Creating an Area or Region
Networks
Loading Existing Networks
Create New Networks
New Network from Map Data
Creating a Network Manually
Show Connected Edges
Connecting Networks
Copy/Merge Networks
Deleting Networks
Exporting And Importing Data From Geoman
Exporting GeoLocs
Importing GeoLocs
Importing Networks
Exporting Networks
Analyse Networks
Reports In Geoman
Select Profile from Database.
Selection of Units
Select Units By Region
Select Units by Holdings
Display Units at
Set Unit Symbols
Item Inventories Chart
Item Inventories Report
Exercises
Exercise 2 - 1: Map Projects, Maps, GeoLocs, Drawn Object
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Page:
2 - 31
2 - 31
2 - 33
2 - 35
2 - 35
2 - 36
2 - 38
2 - 38
2 - 39
2 - 39
2 - 44
2 - 47
2 - 47
2 - 48
2 - 50
2 - 51
2 - 53
2 - 55
2 - 56
2 - 58
2 - 58
2 - 60
2 - 67
2 - 68
2 - 69
2 - 71
2 - 72
2 - 73
2 - 74
2 - 76
2 - 78
2 - 79
2 - 80
2 - 80
2 - 83
2 - 83
2 - 84
2 - 85
2 - 86
2 - 87
2 - 88
2 - 90
2 - 90
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page vi
SUBJECT
Exercise 2 - 2 Networks
Exercise 2 - 3 Map Projects, Maps, GeoLocs
Page:
2 - 91
2 - 91
CHAPTER 3 – INTRODUCING EVE
General
Introduction to EVE
Related Documents
The Movements Process
The Movements Planning Process
The Movement Execution Process
Flow Execution Plans (FEPs)
EVE in the MCC Environment
Standing Operating Procedures (SOPs)
Introduction to Templates
Chapter 3 Conclusion
3 - 1 to 3 - 10
3-1
3-1
3-1
3-2
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-6
3-7
3-8
3 - 10
CHAPTER 4 – EVE PREFERENCES
General
Setting Preferences
Introduction
Accessing EVE
How to Login
Preparing EVE for Tutorial
Preferences Introduction
Preferences Windows
View Tab
Column Preferences
Pick Columns
Column Order
Save and Import
Insert a column layout name
Implement Another Layout
Contact Preference
Location Preferences
Miscellaneous Preferences
Print Preferences
Cargo Preferences
Template Preferences
ATO Feeder (for Air Task Order)
Cargo
EVE Update
Flow Table (Output)
GANTT Export
Generic Request Form (GRF)
4 -1 to 4 - 48
4-1
4-2
4-2
4-2
4-3
4-4
4-4
4-5
4-5
4-7
4-9
4 - 10
4 - 12
4 - 13
4 - 15
4 - 16
4 - 17
4 - 21
4 - 23
4 - 23
4 - 25
4 - 28
4 - 30
4 - 32
4 - 32
4 - 34
4 - 35
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page vii
SUBJECT
HTML Template
Import Flowtable
Movement Request Form (MRF)
PAX
PPR Request
Time Table or Terminal Flow Plan
XML
Exporting and Importing Template Settings
Export
Import
Setting a Preferred Template
Exercises - 4
Part 1
Part 2
Part 3
Page:
4 - 36
4 - 38
4 - 38
4 - 41
4 - 43
4 - 44
4 - 45
4 - 45
4 - 46
4 - 46
4 - 47
4 - 48
4 - 48
4 - 48
4 - 48
CHAPTER 5 – CREATING BASIC DATA
General
Introduction
Basic Data Table
GeoLoc Data
Forces and Items Data
Plans Data
Plans
Creating a Plan
Updating a Plan
Deleting a Plan
Statement of Requirements
Allied Disposition List Data
Assets
Asset Types Data
Asset Fleet Data
Creating Assets
Creating Multiples Assets
Updating Asset
Deleting Asset
Basic Data of EVE
Slot Definitions
Editing Slot Definitions
Updating Slot Definition
Deleting Slot Definitions
Location Time Table Definitions Data
Editing Location Time Table Definitions
Updating Location Time Table Definition
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
5 - 1 to 5 - 38
5-1
5-1
5-1
5-2
5-3
5-4
5-4
5-4
5-6
5-6
5-6
5-7
5 - 10
5 - 10
5 - 12
5 - 13
5 - 16
5 - 18
5 - 18
5 - 18
5 - 18
5 - 19
5 - 20
5 - 20
5 - 21
5 - 22
5 – 23
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page viii
SUBJECT
Deleting Location Time Table Definitions
Default Routes Data
Editing Default Routes
Notices Data
Editing Notices
Updating Notices
Inserting a New Notice at Location
Deleting Notices Data.
Mission Types Data
ATO Days Data
User-Defined Columns Data
Exporting and Importing Basic Data
Exporting from EVE
Importing into EVE
Exchange of data not exported / imported
Printing Basic Data from EVE
Exercises
5.1 Import Definitions
5.2 Update Notice
Publish all Notices
Insert a received notice.
Page:
5 - 24
5 - 24
5 - 24
5 - 26
5 - 26
5 - 27
5 - 27
5 - 27
5 – 28
5 - 29
5 - 31
5 - 32
5 - 33
5 - 34
5 - 35
5 - 35
5 - 36
5 - 36
5 - 36
5 - 38
5 - 38
CHAPTER 6 – USING EVE
General
Importing DDPs
Accessing the LDM
Importing a DDP
Setting a Reference Date
Exercise 6 - 1
Part 1 – Importing DDPs
Part 2 – Updating and modifying Plans
Starting EVE
Menus
Shortcut Toolbar
Creating Flow Execution Plans (FEPs)
Creating an FEP Using a DDP
Exercise 6 - 2
Creating an FEP Directly in EVE
Exercise 6 - 3
Creating a Multinational FEP
Customising Your EVE View
Displaying the Asset Movements
Changing the Display Options
Changing the Time Zone Display
Changing Colour Displays
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
6 - 1 to 6 - 80
6-1
6-2
6-3
6-3
6-6
6-8
6-8
6-8
6-8
6-9
6-9
6-9
6-9
6 - 13
6 - 14
6 - 15
6 - 15
6 - 17
6 - 19
6 - 20
6 - 20
6 - 21
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page ix
SUBJECT
Manual Changes
Automatic Colours Mode
Displaying an Individual Selection of Columns
Changing the Order of Displayed Columns
Making your columns change an automatic selection
Locking the Columns
Sorting Columns
Changing the Date and/or Day Displayed
Changing the Show Location Identified Displayed
Updating Movements and Editing Fields
Updating Cells by Inserting the Required Detail
Updating Cells Using Combo Box Selection
Exercise 6 - 4
Updating Cells Using the Change Function
Change Location
Change Status of Asset Movements
To-day (Go to) and Actual Position Update View (ACT) buttons
The To-Day (Go to) button
Actual Position Update View (ACT)
Exercise 6 - 5
Asset Movements History
Working with Mission View
Importing a Mission from Template
Edit Mission in Mission Editor
Insert a new mission.
The Mission Editor Windows
Creating Recurring Missions
Exercise 6 - 5 Prepare Recurring Mission
Shift Time for Mission
Delete Movement
Exercise 6 - 6
GANTT Tools
GANTT Views
Changing Timings in the GANTT View
Exercise 6 - 7 GANTT Views
The Request & Manifest Views
Request View
Manifest View
Exporting and Importing EVE Data
Exporting to MS Excel
FEP Data Exchange
Exporting FEPs
Importing FEPs
Importing with Previewing FEPs
Importing FEPs
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Page:
6 - 21
6 - 23
6 - 24
6 - 26
6 - 27
6 - 27
6 - 28
6 - 29
6 - 29
6 - 31
6 - 31
6 - 32
6 - 34
6 - 34
6 - 34
6 - 36
6 - 36
6 - 37
6 - 37
6 - 38
6 - 39
6 - 39
6 - 40
6 - 41
6 - 42
6 - 46
6 - 51
6 - 51
6 - 53
6 - 55
6 - 55
6 - 55
6 - 57
6 - 60
6 - 61
6 - 62
6 - 62
6 - 65
6 - 67
6 - 68
6 - 70
6 - 70
6 - 72
6 - 72
6 - 73
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page x
SUBJECT
Exercise 6 - 8
Comparing Missions and FEPs
Show history of a full plan
Compare FEPs
Page:
6 - 75
6 - 76
6 - 76
6 - 78
CHAPTER 7 – OTHER EVE VIEWS AND REPORTS
General
Introduction
Embedded View
Buttons
Exercise 7 - 1
Exercise 7 - 2
Slot Allocation
Exercise 7 - 3
Route Centric View (RV)
Mission Centric View (MV)
Tracking View (TV)
Mission Editor View
Manifest Management View (MAN)
Request View (REQ)
Reports, Charts and Statistics
Predefined Sets of Statistics
Customised Reports
Exercise 6 - 4
Archiving Data
GLOSSARY
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
7 - 1 to 7 - 16
7-1
7-2
7-3
7-5
7-6
7-7
7-7
7-9
7-9
7 - 11
7 - 16
7 - 18
7 - 19
7 - 19
7 - 20
7 - 21
7 - 23
7 - 27
7 - 28
G - 1 to G - 8
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
INTRODUCTION
Page I
Introduction
Scope and Organisation of this Tutorial
Audience
This book is designed both for users new to the LOGFAS programs and for those who
are upgrading from an earlier version. It is designed to teach the basic skills only.
Information on some of the more advanced functionality will be contained in the
complementary user manuals as they are produced.
Throughout the Tutorial, in the interest of brevity, the masculine gender applies to both
men and women.
Scope
This Tutorial is designed to assist LOGFAS users with familiarisation with LOGFAS
Version 6.1 software, and contains significant changes to earlier versions including
Version 5.2 and Version 6.0.
Because the software is still subject to technical development, there may be some
minor differences between tutorial descriptions and the software currently in use. The
Versions (Build numbers) of the various modules supported by this draft of the Tutorial
are given in the Software Status below.
Help
General
LOGFAS Version 6.1 continues to be development software. To this end, the software
is currently supported and maintained by the NC3A development team and the NATO
CIS Services Agency (NCSA).
Technical Support
Any technical questions about installing or updating the LOGFAS programs can be
referred to:
Location:
NCSA
LOGFAS
Helpdesk
Email address:
NCHQSupportLOGFASMT@ncsa.nato.int
NS: NCHQSupport.LOGFASMT@ncsa.nato.int
Telephone No:
+32 (0) 65 44 9443
NCN: SHAPE 254
9443
Policy and other support can be obtained from the individuals shown in Table 1.
Position:
LOGFAS M&T
Project Officer
LOGFAS M&T
System
Manager
LOGFAS M&T
Project Officer
Organisation: Telephone:
AMCC, ACO
+32 (0) 65 44
3934
NCN: SHAPE 254
3934
NCSA
+32 (0) 65 44
9443
NCN: SHAPE 254
9443
NC3A
+31 (0) 70 374
The Hague
3648
NCN: NC3A 257
3648
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
E-Mail:
amcc@shape.nato.int
NS WAN: SHAPE SPT LOG AMC
Mariano.VALLE@ncsa.nato.int
NS WAN:
NCSA SMD MDS VALLE, Mariano
merve.dirim@nc3a.nato.int
NS WAN:
Merve.Dirim@nc3a.nato.int
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
INTRODUCTION
Page II
Table 1
Software Status
LOGFAS is a Bi-Strategic Command (Bi-SC) product. The current version is Version
6.1, which incorporates a relational database which is used by all of the LOGFAS
components. At the time of writing, the following Versions/Build Numbers for the
LOGFAS modules used in this tutorial are:

LOGFAS Connection Manager (LCM) – Vs 6.1.0.0

Data Migration Tool (DMT) – Vs 2.0.6.0

LOGFAS Data Management Module (LDM) – Vs 6.1.0.71

Geographic Data Manager (GeoMan) – Vs 2.0.2.0

Allied Deployment and Movements System Module (ADAMS) – Vs 2.0.2.0

Effective Visible Execution Module (EVE) – Vs 6.1.64.0
System Requirements
The Minimum Hardware Specifications for a LOGFAS 6 work station are laid down in
the NCSA reference document 5050.52/NCCXX/3505/09 dated 02 October 2009.
Tutorial Scenario
The purpose of this Tutorial is to demonstrate and instruct the procedures used by the
appropriate LOGFAS modules that support Movements Analysis, Planning and
Execution. During this Tutorial, we recognise that EVE is a fully integrated part of
LOGFAS and therefore will utilise the common Tutorial approach for all LOGFAS users,
which has the added benefit of enabling all LOGFAS users to integrate their use of the
programs.
For the most part we will be undertaking the roles of M&T EVE operators for a nation
and in a Multi-National environment. The nations referred to are artificial countries used
by NATO to facilitate realistic training in an UNCLASSIFIED virtual environment.
Therefore, the Tutorial is set against a generic scenario, which uses the framework
designed to support a series of exercises.
For some areas the data requirements are explained in detail so that the EVE User can
understand the impact and relationships that exist. However, since most of this data is
created to support the movements planning that is carried out using ADAMS it is
assumed that much of the basic requirements of data creation will have been
completed.
The Tutorial data set has been constructed to depict an Alliance similar to NATO. The
Alliance consists of an unspecified generic nation, which is used to represent
multinational forces and a number regional generic nations.
In addition, the Alliance plans for operations in an imaginary continent known as
ATLANTIS. The geography and national borders within ATLANTIS change, depending
on the exercise, but for the sake of the Tutorial, ATLANTIS consists of the following
nations:

BLUELAND (Nation Code 096) – A friendly nation and a member of the
Alliance.

ORANGELAND (Nation Code 098) – A nation not friendly to BLUELAND.

REDLAND (Nation Code 097) – An ally of ORANGELAND.

BROWNLAND (Nation Code 099) – A Partner for Peace Nation.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
INTRODUCTION
Page III

WHITELAND (Nation Code 090) – A neutral nation.

GREYLAND & SHETLAND (Nation Code 090) – Nations that have offered
basing rights to the Alliance.
The maps of ATLANTIS are contained in the ATLANTIS Map Project folder, which you
will learn to access during the tutorial. Figure 1 is an illustration of the area.
Figure 1
Note: To make room for ATLANTIS, THE UNITED KINGDOM, REPUBLIC OF
IRELAND and ICELAND have been removed as shown in Figure 1.
Geography
In order to avoid confusion with real North American and European locations, the
Alliance’s home bases, ports and airports have been given generic names. This is
designed to make it easier for the user to identify the nearest port or airport to his home
base. For example, a unit based in AMERIBASE CENTRAL would normally use
AMERIAPOD CENTRAL and AMERISPOD CENTRAL.
All locations will have the appropriate national code (see Forces below). The locations
in and around ATLANTIS have been given exercise names made up by the scenario
writers. However, due to the developmental nature of the software, not all ATLANTIS
locations have yet been given complete infrastructure data.
Forces
During the M&T Tutorials we will analyse and plan the movement of a number of forces
as they are made ready to and deploy into BLUELAND. This will allow us to show the
full range of processes, from planning, to execution, to Reception, Staging and Onward
Movement (RSOM), used by NATO for such work.
In this the EVE Users Tutorial, we will concentrate on the movements analysis and
planning of a national force that is then integrated into a multi-national plan.
We will also use the more demanding Alliance database and will use force packages
from the Generic Alliance nations. These Nations, their 3-letter codes and the nations
they represent are shown in Table 2 and a map showing the regional areas is shown at
Figure 2:
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
INTRODUCTION
Page IV
Generic Nation:
ZZ NW Europe Gen Nat
3 Letter Code: Representing NATO Nations:
XNW
Belgium, Denmark, France, Germany,
Iceland, Luxembourg, Netherlands, Norway
and United Kingdom.
ZZ NE Europe Gen Nat
XNE
Czech Republic, Estonia, Hungary, Latvia,
Lithuania, Poland, Slovenia and Slovakia.
ZZ SW Europe Gen Nat
XSW
Italy, Portugal and Spain.
ZZ SE Europe Gen Nat
XSE
ZZ N American Gen Nat
XNA
Albania, Bulgaria, Croatia, Greece,
Romania and Turkey.
Canada and United States of America.
ZZ Multinational Gen Nat
XMU
Multi-National.
Table 2
Figure 2
All of these forces are contained in the Alliance Force Profile, that is included with the
tutorial support data package, and are similar to some existing NATO forces; however,
homebases and force equipment holdings have been changed to maintain the
unclassified nature of the data. Because of this, it is unwise to use the Generic Force
Profile and Holdings data for real-world planning.
Scenario Concept
During the Tutorial, we will use these details to support the Movements Analysis and
Planning requirements to follow the fortunes of a small BROWNLAND formation, which
becomes part of an intervention force headed up by the Alliance that is deploying to
assist in the defence of BLUELAND.
This Tutorial shows how the various functions of EVE are used to conduct the
processes necessary to complete the execution of the movements plan because the
module can be used for the coordinated management of the movements, from:
 Mission Planning,
 Mission Loading, including movement (Pax / Cargo) request management,
 Location Activity Management,
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
INTRODUCTION
Page V
 Terminal Operations Management,
 Terminal Operations (Checking In and Manifesting),
 Mission Reporting.
Each of these activities is supported within the functionality of EVE and the
requirements to manage the areas will be explained, as will the relationship of the
various data sets. Since this is the EVE User Tutorial the concentration is on how the
system functions can be used.
For example, how a mission request can be imported into the program will be explained
in detail. However, the management issues concerning the design of the Movement
Request Form (MRF) and how the program is set-up to read the format will be
illustrated only.
How the functions are to be applied is a policy / management decision. For detail on
how to set-up the data areas, depending on the work of the individual operator, the
EVE Mangers Tutorial should be consulted.
The “P” Words
During the development of LOGFAS modules, a number of concepts have evolved.
Purely by accident these concepts revolve around some important words beginning
with the letter “P”.
Preferences
Preferences are those filters that the user can apply to his use of the various modules.
They are in effect default settings, which can speed up the processes being used.
Preferences are absolutely crucial to the correct running of the modules as they provide
the basis for many of the calculations. If a module is not running as predicted, it is
always a good idea to check the current preference settings.
Plans
Plans are important to both the force selection and deployment planning and logistic
processes. Plans provide the data linkage necessary to conduct most LOGFAS
activities.
Profiles
Profiles are unit and formation organisational structures and holdings, which have been
put together to meet a specific purpose. The profile system allows the user to create
different configurations of the same units or formations tailored to a specific scenario or
requirement. Force contributions to a particular plan can be drawn from a number of
different profiles to meet the planning and/or analytical requirements for national and
international users.
Projects
Projects can be best described as map and route network sets, which can be used for
a plan or a series of plans. Projects are created within the Geographic Manager
(GeoMan) and can be selected for use within, or in conjunction with other specialist
modules by the individual subject matter user.
Parameters
Parameters are agreed predetermined values and factors, which are applied to and
may affect the behaviour of individual modules. For example, within the ADAMS
modules, parameters determine such things as speeds and asset spacing. The user
may accept the relevant default settings provided or, within some parameter sets, input
their alternative national values.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
INTRODUCTION
Page VI
Packages
Packages are the supply packages that are created in the LDM as items and used by
the SPM to create supply packages for movements planning using ADAMS. These
supply packages, which can range from an individual box through pallets, containers to
ocean tanker/pipeline parcels, are uniquely identified in LOGFAS in a similar manner
as forces.
Paths (Networks and Trails)
Paths are mainly used for movements planning, although other subject-matter users
may find them useful for information or analytical purposes, particularly as the Supply
Distribution Model (SDM) is progressively introduced for analysing your sustainment
plans. It is very important to understand the relationship between the two different
types of path information now available within the relevant modules.
Networks
Networks are the more important of the two path mechanisms. Networks are
crucial to movements planning as they provide the standard distances around
which the majority of the time and distance calculations are made. They also
provide the ability to represent throughput constraints.
Trails
Trails are additions made to basic networks to enhance map displays and add
more detail. Trail distances are included in calculations, thus trails must be
used with care as they can affect deployment times and other calculations.
Using the Tutorials
These notes are intended to assist those who have been unable to attend a
Tutorial Course. If used carefully, the Tutorials should allow readers to
themselves most of the basic functional requirements of their specialised
However, the more advanced techniques will require advice and training from a
user or attendance at a formal training course.
formal
teach
areas.
skilled
To make full use of the Tutorial, the following procedures are recommended:
-
Start from the beginning.
-
Read the relevant part of the Tutorial.
-
Cross-refer with the appropriate User Manual, if available.
-
Familiarise yourself with the software, exploring all options.
-
Continue working through until you get to an exercise.
-
Load the data associated with the exercise.
-
Complete the exercise, which will confirm a number of skills.
Document Conventions
This Tutorial uses the typographic conventions and these are shown in Table 3:
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
INTRODUCTION
Page VII
Example
ADAMSDDP.xml
CALTROP
Do not forget!
Ctrl+Enter
CLICK
Change Order of
Columns
Description
Uppercase letters indicate file names with lowercase to show file
type (extension)
Uppercase Italic letters indicate geographical locations
Bold underlined letters indicate important notes
Normal MS Windows conventions are used to indicate the names
of keys on the keyboard. When you see a plus sign (+) between
two key names, you should hold down the first key while pressing
the second
Bold uppercase letters are used to identify user computer
commands or actions
Italicised words are used for names of ADAMS or MS Windows
functional elements such as windows, dialogs, views, menus,
combo-box values and boxes.
Table 3
The page numbering system is done by chapters, which allow ease of amendment in
what is essentially a living document. For example, all pages in Chapter 1 will have the
chapter and page number in the header. Page numbers show the chapter and start
from Chapter 1 – 1.
This Introduction is the only exception to the rule. You will note the page numbers are
in Roman numerals. Finally, to help decipher most of the acronyms, a Glossary is
included at the end of the book.
Finding Your Way Around
Throughout the Tutorial, you will come across navigation maps that will tell you where
you are both in the current chapter and in the overall document. We know the
LOGFAS modules provide a powerful and sometimes complex tool. The navigation
maps shown in Figure 3 are designed to help you find your way.
Introduction
Scope and Organisation of this Tutorial
Tutorial Scenario
The “P” Words
Using the Tutorials
Document Conventions
You are here
LOGFAS versus MS Windows-type Conventional Icons
Versions Supported
Chapter 1
Figure 3
LOGFAS versus MS Windows-type Conventional Icons
LOGFAS has toolbars in all its constituent modules. Where the use of a toolbar has a
direct effect on the program functionality, the function will be explained.
On the other hand, when the toolbar provides a commonly understood and used MS
Windows-type utility, such as a Zoom or Print function; no explanation will be given.
Finally, if you do not get the right result first time, check you have followed the steps in
the Tutorial and exercises correctly. If you are uncertain of a procedure, check the
HELP File and finally and if all else fails, contact the relevant LOGFAS M&T Project
Managers shown in Table 1.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
INTRODUCTION
Page VIII
This Page Intentionally Blank
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
CHAPTER 1 - UTILITY TOOLS
Page 1 - 1
Chapter 1 - Utility Tools
You are here
Introduction
LOGFAS Connection Manager
Data Migration Tool
User Management Module
Introduction
Before we start with the details of the this LOGFAS program, we first need to look at the
LOGFAS Utility Tools which enable you to create and connect to various databases, as
well as migrating existing LOGFAS Version 5.2 and Version 6.0 data into LOGFAS Version
6.1.
Before we start, you are reminded that there are two folders added to the “C” Drive of the
computer. These are to allow you to carry out the required Mail In and Mail Out processes
in this Chapter and for the remainder of the Tutorial. They are under the C:\Program
Files\NATO\LOGFAS6\DATA directory and are prefixed with the name of the area you are
dealing with (ADAMS, EVE, CORSOM, LOGREP etc) and then called Mail In and Mail Out.
Note: For this Tutorial the folders will be named EVE Mail In and EVE Mail Out.
LOGFAS Connection Manager (LCM)
The LOGFAS Connection Manager (LCM) is automatically loaded to your computer during
the installation process. The application allows you to access an individual database from
a number of databases held on the hard drive or on a network drive.
This simple module also allows you to import, backup, create, duplicate databases and
update the Reportable Item Codes (RIC’s).
Note: You will need Read/Write permissions for the LCM and to use the LOGFAS
Version 6.1 Modules. Therefore, you may need assistance from your System
Administrator.
Normally to activate this module, you have to use standard MS Windows Program Start
procedures.
Alternately, it is recommended that you create a LOGFAS shortcut folder from the All
Users/Programs/Start directory. In this case, the short cut for the LCM, as well as all the
other program short cuts (including other specialist area programs installed), will
automatically be created.
Note: You may need the appropriate computer permissions to carry out the short cut
folder creation procedure or assistance from the System Administrator.
For the Tutorial, the shortcut folder option will be applied. To access the module, locate
the LCM icon shown in Figure 1.1; this is within the LOGFAS desktop folder.
Figure 1.1
USE normal MS Windows functions to ACTIVATE the LCM. This can be by using the
normal MS Windows Program Start functions for your system or by DOUBLE CLICKING
on the short cut LCM icon if you have it added to the desktop folder.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
CHAPTER 1 - UTILITY TOOLS
Page 1 - 2
When the module is assessed for the first time, you will see the LCM window that will look
similar to Figure 1.2.
Figure 1.2
This LDM window identifies the databases with the name LOGFAS_logbase program
and LOGF_TEMPLATE that was installed by the LOGFAS. The new LOGFAS Version
6.1 displays the properties of the database as follows:
Active
The tick indicates the database which is active
for all of the LOGFAS modules.
Name
The name of the database.
The prefix
LOGFAS_ is automatically entered for each
database.
Description
Free text that allows a meaningful description to
be added for the database.
Type
The Type Template indicates that the database
was loaded automatically during the installation
process. The Type Local indicates that the
database is installed on the local computer. A
database located on a server would be identified
as the Type name Remote.
Security Level
Indicates the highest security level that is set
against the data contained in the database.
LOGFAS Version
The version of LOGFAS.
AA Asset Type
The version of the AA Assets Types loaded to
the selected database.
AA GeoLocs
The version of the AA GeoLocs loaded to the
selected database.
RIC
The Update of the Reportable Item Codes
loaded to the selected database.
SQL Patch
The version of the database format used and will
indicate which patch has been applied to the
database.
Date Created
The date the database was created or installed
in the LCM.
System DSN
System DSN is to be used to establish a
connection with the server database.
We will refer to the use of the various versions during the course of the tutorial.
The LCM allows you to import, create, duplicate, export, delete databases and update
Reportable Item Codes (RIC’s).
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
CHAPTER 1 - UTILITY TOOLS
Page 1 - 3
Importing a Database
Importing a database allows you to restore a backup of a previous database, or to use a
database that was exported from another computer or user.
To import a database, first CLICK on the Import button on the toolbar as shown in Figure
1.3.
CLICK on the
Import button.
Figure 1.3
The Import Database window, as shown in Figure 1.4 will appear.
Figure 1.4
Enter an ODBC Name and description for the new database. The ODBC Name should
begin with LOGFAS_ but the application will add the prefix if it is not entered.
For the Tutorial INSERT the ODBC Name TutStart_Database and the Description For
LOGFAS 6.1 Tutorials.
The use of special characters are not allowed to be used the ODBC Name. LOGFAS 6.1
judges characters such as %,*,(,) etc. to be special characters.
In the Import File section of the window CLICK on the Browse button.
A standard Windows view will appear allowing you to choose the backup file to import.
The file must be a valid PostgreSQL backup file, with the extension *.backup.
For the Tutorial SELECT the File name LOGFAS_TutStart_Database.backup in the Mail
In folder. CLICK on the Open button as shown in Figure 1.5.
Remember that the
Mail In folder will
be prefixed with
the name of the
specialist area you
are working with.
Figure 1.5
The Import Database window should now be similar to Figure 1.6.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
CHAPTER 1 - UTILITY TOOLS
Page 1 - 4
Figure 1.6
CLICK the OK button to begin the import. The import process can take some time. A
progress bar will appear while the application is working. When the import is complete,
the new database will appear in the list on the main page as shown in Figure 1.7.
The TutStart
Database
Figure 1.7
If the Name column does not reveal the full name DOUBLE-CLICK on the column edge
to auto resize the column width, this can be applied to any of the columns in the LCM.
Setting the Active Database
LOGFAS applications use the ODBC connection that is currently set as the Active
database in the LCM.
To set the Active database, select the database that you want to use and then click on
the Select Active button on the toolbar. The GREEN check mark appears next to the
Active database.
For the Tutorial, SELECT database Name TutStart_Database and then CLICK on the
Select Active button as shown in Figure 1.8.
Alternatively, you can DOUBLE-CLICK on the selected database or RIGHT CLICK on
the selected database and SELECT Activate in the sub menu dialog.
2. CLICK the
Activate button
1. SELECT
the
database
Figure 1.8
The GREEN tick will now appear against the database with the Name
TutStart_Database, indicating that this is now the active database. All of the LOGFAS
Modules will now access this active database.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
CHAPTER 1 - UTILITY TOOLS
Page 1 - 5
Coping a Database
A database can be copied, to enable you, for example, to have a database for national
training with another maintained for operational use.
Note: You can only copy Databases with the Type shown as Local or Template.
To copy a database, highlight the Local or Template database that you wish to copy and
click on the Copy button as shown in Figure 1.9.
For the Tutorial, SELECT the imported database with the Name TutStart_Database and
CLICK on the Copy button.
CLICK the
Copy
button.
Figure 1.9
The Copy Database window as shown in Figure 1.10 will appear.
Figure 1.10
Enter an ODBC Name and description for the new database. Remember that the ODBC
Name should begin with LOGFAS_ but the application will add the prefix if it is not
entered.
For the Tutorial ENTER the ODBC Name TutStart_Database_Copy and the Description
Copy of TutStart and SELECT NATO UNCLASSIFIED as the Security level from the
drop down list, as shown in Figure 1.11.
Figure 1.11
The database will now be duplicated and when complete the copied database will appear
in the LCM main screen as illustrated in Figure 1.12.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
CHAPTER 1 - UTILITY TOOLS
Page 1 - 6
The Copied
Database
Figure 1.12
You would now select which database to wish to activate.
Editing a Database
The ODBC Name and Description of a database can be edited to enable you to
incorporate more up to date or meaningful information. Editing a connection will not
modify the database in any way, only the name for the ODBC connection.
To edit a connection, highlight the local database that you wish to edit and click the Edit
button shown in Figure 1.13.
Figure 1.13
Note: Only Local databases can be modified.
For the Tutorial, SELECT the database with the Name TutStart_Database and CLICK on
the Edit button.
The Edit Database window will appear as shown in Figure 1.14.
Figure 1.14
For the Tutorial; in the Description ADD the Year as 2011 to the current description as
shown in Figure 1.15.
ADD the year
as 2011 to the
description.
Figure 1.15
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
CHAPTER 1 - UTILITY TOOLS
Page 1 - 7
After making the changes, CLICK the OK button to activate the changes.
Creating a New Database
As well as duplicating an existing database, you are also able to create a new database
containing only the basic reference data. When creating a new database, the system will
perform two steps.
First, it will create a new physical database on the local PostgreSQL server. Second, it
will create an ODBC connection to the new database so that it can be accessed from the
LOGFAS application.
To create a new database, CLICK on the New button in the toolbar as shown in Figure
1.16.
CLICK the
New
button.
Figure 1.16
For the Tutorial CLICK on the New button. The New Database window will appear, as
shown in Figure 1.17.
Figure 1.17
Enter the ODBC name for the new database as well as a description. Remember that
the ODBC Name should begin with LOGFAS_ but the system will add it automatically if it
is left off.
For the Tutorial ENTER an ODBC Name of NEW_DB with a Description of New
Database and SELECT NATO UNCLASSIFIED as the Security Level from the drop
down list as shown in Figure 1.18.
Figure 1.18
CLICK on the OK button to create the database.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
CHAPTER 1 - UTILITY TOOLS
Page 1 - 8
The database creation can take some time. A progress bar will appear at the bottom of
the screen while the application is working. When the process is complete, the new
database will be listed in the LCM window as shown in Figure 1.19.
New
Database.
Figure 1.19
Deleting a Database
A database can be deleted. When deleting a database, the system will first permanently
delete the database from the local machine, and then delete the ODBC connection
associated with it.
Note: Once a database has been deleted, it cannot be recovered.
To delete a database, highlight the database that you wish to delete and CLICK the
Delete button.
Note: Only Local databases can be deleted.
For the Tutorial, SELECT database with the Name NEW_DB and CLICK on the Delete
button on the toolbar as shown in Figure 1.20.
CLICK the
Delete
button.
Figure 1.20
A confirmation dialog will appear to confirm that you want to delete the selected item, as
shown in Figure 1.21.
Figure 1.21
If you are certain that you have selected the correct database, CLICK on the Yes button
to begin the deletion. This process will take a few seconds. A status bar will appear at
the bottom of the screen until the deletion is complete. Once the database is deleted, the
ODBC connection will be removed from the list.
For the Tutorial CLICK on the Yes button.
Note: You can not delete an active database or the LOGF_TEPMLATE database
from the LCM.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
CHAPTER 1 - UTILITY TOOLS
Page 1 - 9
Exporting a Database
Exporting a database allows you backup a database to a single file so that it can be
easily restored or transferred to another computer or user.
To export a database, highlight the database entry that you wish to export and click the
Export button.
Note that only local connections can be exported.
For the Tutorial SELECT the database with the Name TUTStart_Database_Copy and
CLICK the Export button on the toolbar as shown in Figure 1.22.
CLICK the
Export
button.
Figure 1.22
The Save As window will appear, prompting you to choose a path for the export file. By
default, the file name is the ODBC connection name with the extension shown as
*.backup and the location is on the Desktop or the last place selected.
Note: You can change the Save In destination for the file.
For the Tutorial SELECT your Mail Out folder as the Save in destination and ACCEPT
the default File Name as shown in Figure 1.23.
Figure 1.23
The database will now be exported and can be imported on another computer using the
LCM and the Import Database process.
Disconnect from a Local Database
LOGFAS Version 6.1 enables the LCM to be disconnected from a local database. This
will not delete the database; it will only break the connection. When this done the
database will not be able to be used until the connection is restored using the LCM.
To disconnect a local database, highlight the database that you wish to disconnect and
click the Disconnect button as shown in Figure 1.24.
Figure 1.24
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
CHAPTER 1 - UTILITY TOOLS
Page 1 - 10
For the Tutorial SELECT the database with the Name TUTStart_Database_Copy and
CLICK the Disconnect button on the toolbar as shown in Figure 1.25.
CLICK the
Disconnect
button
SELECT
TUTStart_Database
_Copy.
Figure 1.25
The selected database will be removed from the Database List in the LCM because the
connection has been removed.
Note that active and remote databases can not be disconnected.
Connecting to Local Database
LOGFAS Version 6.1 can search for a local database that has either been disconnected
or lost its connection with the LCM. CLICK on Action in the main menu and SELECT the
Add connection to Local DB option or CLICK on the Add connection to Local DB button
as shown in Figure 1.26.
CLICK on Add
connection to
Local DB.
CLICK on Add
connection to Local
DB button.
or
Figure 1.26
For the Tutorial, CLICK on the Add connection to Local DB button shown in Figure 1.26.
The add Connection window will open as shown in Figure 1.27. The software will now
find any disconnected local databases on the computer. To reconnect to any of the
databases, ACTIVATE the check box.
Activate the check
box to connect to a
local database.
Figure 1.27
For the Tutorial ACTIVATE the check box for the Local DB named
logfas_tutstart_database_copy and CLICK on the OK button. The database will be
reconnected and be available in the LCM window as shown in Figure 1.28
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
CHAPTER 1 - UTILITY TOOLS
Page 1 - 11
Figure 1.28
Connecting to Remote Database
LOGFAS Version 6.1 enables the use of a shared database located on a server.
Note: Currently only the EVE and CORSOM Modules are configured to be shared
by the use of a Server Based Database.
When LOGFAS Version 6.1 is being installed, the installation program will recognise
when the software is being installed on a server and will make the necessary
configurations. Where a server-based database is being used, LOGFAS Version 6.1 is
installed on each client computer with its own local database(s) to permit offline work /
training.
To connect to server database, CLICK on Action in the main menu and SELECT New
Remote Connection or CLICK on the short-cut button as shown Figure 1.29.
SELECT
New
Remote
Connection.
SELECT New
Remote
Connection
button.
or
Figure 1.29
The New Remote Connection window as shown in Figure 1.30 will appear on the screen.
Figure 1.30
You insert the details of the Server (as an IP Address), the allocated name for the
Database; these are provided by your LOGFAS System Manager.
Then you INSERT the name to be used by the ODBC and a Description, if you wish.
Then CLICK on the OK button to make the connection.
The new database will then be displayed in LCM list as a Remote database in a similar
way as shown in Figure 1.7. You would then activate the database as you were shown
in Figure 1.8.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
CHAPTER 1 - UTILITY TOOLS
Page 1 - 12
Reportable Item Codes (RICs) - Upgrading RIC Versions
Introduction
The RIC codes are centrally controlled to prevent data corruption, in a similar way to AA
GeoLoc codes, and are issued periodically to introduce new RIC codes, Update existing
codes or to delete unwanted codes.
However, when the LDM updates a database after the installation of a new version of
LOGFAS it does not automatically upgrade the RIC Version of a previous database. It is
therefore necessary to upgrade the RIC Version separately in the same way as when a
new RIC Version is released.
Before the release of LOGFAS Version 5.2, it was also possible to import files which had
been created with previous RIC Version; this corrupted the databases when data was
exchanged on a multinational basis. From LOGFAS Version 6.1 onwards, it is no longer
possible to import a file that has been compiled with an earlier RIC Version.
Checking the RIC Version of Database
You can check the RIC Version of the connected database(s) in the LCM window.
If your database does not contain the current or correct RIC Version, you will need to
update the RICs.
Updating RIC Version
To access the RIC Updater, SELECT the Update RIC option from the Action menu, as
shown in Figure 1.31.
SELECT the Update
RIC option from the
Action menu.
Figure 1.31
For the Tutorial IMPORT the database named RIC_11_Database from your Mail In
folder. ENTER the ODBC Name RIC_11_Database and the Description RIC Update as
shown in Figure 1.32.
Figure 1.32
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
CHAPTER 1 - UTILITY TOOLS
Page 1 - 13
CLICK the OK button to begin the import.
Once the Import process is complete make this the Active Database.
Use the Refresh the list of databases button as shown in Figure 1.33 to refresh the LCM
window and update any changes.
CLICK on the Refresh
the list of databases
button.
Figure 1.33
We will use the RIC Updater to update the database named RIC_11_Database to RIC
Update 12. For the Tutorial SELECT the RIC Updater option from the Action menu.
The RIC Updater window will open. You will now need to select the correct version of
RIC Update file to bring your database up to date. To access the file required; CLICK on
the Browse button as shown in Figure 1.34.
CLICK on the
Browse button.
Figure 1.34
The update files are contained in the C:\Program Files \NATO\LOGFAS6\COMMON\
GEOLOC_RIC_ASSETTYPE directory; here you will see a variety of RIC update files,
e.g. Update_RIC_V11_V12_NATO_UNCLASSIFIED_16JAN11. SELECT the relevant
File to bring your RIC Version up to date as shown in Figure 1.35.
SELECT the file named
Update_RIC_V11_V12_
NATO_UNCLASSIFIED
_16JAN.11.
Figure 1.35
For
the
Tutorial
SELECT
the
file
named
Update_RIC_V11_
V12_NATO_UNCLASSIFIED_16JAN11 from the files available to you. Then CLICK on
the Open button.
To start the update process CLICK on the UPDATE RICS button shown in Figure 1.36.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
CHAPTER 1 - UTILITY TOOLS
Page 1 - 14
CLICK on the
Update RICS button.
Figure 1.36
The RIC Update Progress window as shown in Figure 1.37 will appear.
CLICK on the Apply
Modifications button.
Figure 1.37
Now CLICK on the Apply Modifications button to update the RICs. When the RIC Update
has been completed the RIC Updater dialog box will open as shown in Figure 1.38,
CLICK OK to proceed with the update.
CLICK on the OK
button.
Figure 1.38
After the modifications have updated the RIC tables all the check boxes should be
activated and the Error Log should be empty as shown in Figure 1.39. If the Error Log
does have a problem reported you should CLICK on the ROLLBACK button to restore
the database to its original set of RIC’s. To accept all the updates CLICK on the OK
button.
CLICK on the
ROLLBACK
button to reject
the update.
CLICK on the OK button
to accept the update.
Figure 1.39
For the Tutorial CLICK the OK button and the RIC Update Progress window will close
and you will return to the RIC Updater window.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
CHAPTER 1 - UTILITY TOOLS
Page 1 - 15
Now CLOSE the RIC Updater window.
The RIC_11_Database has now been updated from RIC 11 to RIC 12. This process
would have to be applied to all non RIC 12 databases. GeoLoc updates are done in
GEOMAN and Asset updates are done using the Logistic Data Management Module
(LDM). This will be discussed later in the Tutorial.
SQL Update
For LOGFAS 6.1 the SQL patch required to run a database is 14000. Any databases
created in LOGFAS 6.0 will have created using SQL patch 13. To run these databases in
LOGFAS 6.1 an Update SQL will be required, you can run this from the Action menu and
the select the Update SQL option from the sub menu.
SELECT the database that requires updating to SQL 14000.
For the Tutorial SELECT LOGFAS_RIC_11_Database as shown if Figure 1.40.
Figure 1.40
CLICK on ACTION in the menu bar and then SELECT Update SQL as shown in Figure
1.41.
SELECT the Update
SQL option from the
Action menu.
Figure 1.41
A Dialog box will open as shown in Figure 1.42. To confirm the update, you CLICK on
the Yes button or to leave the database in its original version CLICK on the No button.
Figure 1.42
Note: If you select No then the database cannot be opened using LOGFAS 6.1.
For the Tutorial CLICK the Yes button.
The database will be updated to SQL 14000 as shown in Figure 1.43.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
CHAPTER 1 - UTILITY TOOLS
Page 1 - 16
Figure 1.43
Anytime a patch is issued for the upgrade of LOGFAS 6.1 this Update SQL function will
have to be carried out to each database.
CLOSE the LCM.
You are here
Introduction
LOGFAS Connection Manager
Data Migration Tool
User Management Module
Data Migration Tool (DMT)
The DMT will be automatically loaded to your computer during the installation process.
The application provide a means of importing databases, Force Profiles and Detailed
Deployment Plans (DDPs) that were prepared with LOGFAS Version 5.2 and may be
held in your archives.
Unlike previous new versions of LOGFAS, the new Data Migration Tool (DMT) also
provides a facility to upgrade Detailed Deployment Plans (DDP) and Force Profiles and
Holding (FPH) files that are held outside of the database in use.
The DMT will either import a LOGFAS Version 5.2 database directly into a new empty
Version 6.1 database, or import either a LOGFAS Version 5.2 DDP or FPH file into the
current database in use.
Accessing the Program
To access the DMT, CLICK on Start in the bottom left corner of your screen and then
follow the normal procedure for opening a program. SELECT All Programs, then
LOGFAS6 and then the DMT option. It is possible to place individual or groups of module
shortcut buttons on your desktop, (you may need to get your System Administrator to do
this for you). You can then use these shortcut buttons to access the modules.
Regardless of the method used, each of the modules in LOGFAS has its own icon. To
access a module, CLICK the relevant Icon to select it and then DOUBLE CLICK to
activate it.
Opening the DMT
On the LOGFAS 6.1 shortcut window, DOUBLE CLICK on the DMT Icon shown at
Figure 1.44.
Figure 1.44
When the module is assessed for the first time, you will see the Import LOGFAS DATA
From Version 5.2 to Version 6 window which will look similar to Figure 1.45.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
CHAPTER 1 - UTILITY TOOLS
Page 1 - 17
Figure 1.45
Before progressing further, in the LCM ENSURE that you have activated Database with
the Name LOGFAS_RIC_11_Database.
Importing Data
To import data you CLICK on File on the Main Menu.
For the Tutorial, we will import a Force Profile (the creation process for which we will
cover in detail in Chapter 3) to demonstrate the import process. The processes are
identical for both DDPs and a database, but take longer as the files are larger.
Note: Before importing either a DDP or FPH file ensure it has first been updated to
the same RIC, AA GeoLoc and AA Assets standard as your LOGFAS Version 6.1
database.
SELECT the Import 5.2 Export file option as shown in Figure 1.46.
SELECT the
Import 5.2 Export
file option.
Figure 1.46
A standard MS Windows view will appear allowing you to select the file to import. The file
must be a valid LOGFAS Text file, with the file extension *.txt.
For the Tutorial SELECT the File name FHZZ008BROWN_52.txt in the Mail In folder.
CLICK on the Open button as shown in Figure 1.47.
Figure 1.47
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
CHAPTER 1 - UTILITY TOOLS
Page 1 - 18
If the file import has a different version of RICs, GeoLocs or Assets than that in the LCM,
a dialog box will open informing you of the conflict as shown in Figure 1.48. The only
course of action is to CLICK on the OK button and update by importing the database and
applying the updates to it using LCM, GeoMan and LDM.
Figure 1.48
If the file is compatible, the import will now proceed and you will see the progress in the
Import LOGFAS DATA From Version 5.2 to Version 6 window.
Once the import is complete an Import Complete dialog box will open as shown in Figure
1.49.
Figure 1.49
CLICK OK to complete the import process.
When complete, you will see that the last line will read Import Complete and the Import
LOGFAS Database From Version 5.2 to Version 6 window should look similar to Figure
1.50.
Remember this is
only an illustration of
the process.
Import
Complete.
Figure 1.50
If there are any errors the Total number will also be displayed and you should see the
detail of the relevant error in the body of the report.
Note: It is not possible to verify the data or rollback the import if the results on the
screen reveal errors which might corrupt your database. Therefore, you are
recommended to create a separate database using LCM as described above when
you are importing your LOGFAS Version 5.2 Force Profile or DDP and import the
file into the new database. You can then review the imported Profile or DDP before
using it by exporting it from the temporary database using the LDM export
functions explained in Chapter 2.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
CHAPTER 1 - UTILITY TOOLS
Page 1 - 19
The Import Version 5.2 Export file function can also be used to import other *.txt and
*.ddp files exported from LOGFAS Version 5.2.
A complete the process the LOGFAS 5.2 database will be imported using the DMT and a
new database will be created in the LCM using the file versions from the import file.
To import a database, CLICK on File on the Main Menu.
SELECT the Import Full 5.2 Database Export to New Empty 6.1 Database option as
shown in Figure 1.51.
SELECT the Import
Full 5.2 Database
Export to New Empty
6.1 Database option.
Figure 1.51
For the Tutorial SELECT the File name LOGFAS_5.2_Database.txt in the Mail In folder.
CLICK on the Open button as shown in Figure 1.52.
Figure 1.52
A dialog box will open confirming that the file being imported is a LOGFAS 5.2 Export
File as shown in Figure 1.53. To continue the process, CLICK on the OK button.
Figure 1.53
For the Tutorial CLICK on the OK button.
A New Database window will open. The new database will require an ODBC Name and a
Description. The Security Level has been set from the import file as shown in Figure
1.54.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
CHAPTER 1 - UTILITY TOOLS
Page 1 - 20
Figure 1.54
For the Tutorial ENTER an ODBC Name of 52_Database with a Description of Old
LOGFAS 5.2 Database as shown in Figure 1.55.
Figure 1.55
CLICK on the OK button to create the database.
When the import process is complete a dialog box will open. If errors have occurred
during the import process, a statement will be included in the dialog box as shown in
Figure 1.56.
Figure 1.56
CLICK on the OK button. Check the Import Log to see if there are any errors and what
data have been imported into the new database as shown in Figure 1.57. You can now
use or edit the database if you wish after investigating any errors.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
CHAPTER 1 - UTILITY TOOLS
Page 1 - 21
Figure 1.57
CLICK the Close button to close the Import LOGFAS DATA From Version 5.2 to Version
6 window.
CHECK the LCM to see if the database was imported into LOGFAS 6.1 as shown in
Figure 1.58. If the LCM is already open, the LCM window will need to be refreshed.
Figure 1.58
You will now see the database has been added to the list in the LCM.
CLOSE the LCM.
User Management Module (UMM)
LOGFAS Version 6.1 introduced the LOGFAS User Management Module (UMM) for use
with the server version.
The use of this module is outside the scope of this Tutorial and will be documented
separately for use by the System Administrator.
This completes Chapter 1.
After this Chapter about the Utility Tools of LOGFAS you will find Chapter 2, which deals
in detail with geographic data.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
CHAPTER 1 - UTILITY TOOLS
Page 1 - 22
This Page Intentionally Blank
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 2 – GEO DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
Page 2 - 1
Chapter 2 - Geographical and Infrastructure Data
You are here
Starting with GeoMan
Introduction
Opening the GeoMan
Map Controls
Map Objects and Object Properties
Exporting and Importing Data from GeoMan
Report: Forces and Items
Exercises
STARTING WITH GEOMAN
Introduction
The aim of this chapter is to instruct on Geographical Data Management. How this data
can be used to support the various LOGFAS functions will be explained in later chapters.
Basic database population for LOGFAS is achieved through three modules within
LOGFAS Version 6.1:

The Geographical Data Management Module (GeoMan),

The LOGFAS Data Management Module (LDM) and

The Sustainment Planning Module (SPM).
Map Projects, Maps, Locations and Networks are created and held within the GeoMan,
while the LDM allows you to update other tables within the database including forces and
holdings; the equipment and supplies. The specific data required for stockpile and
sustainment planning and analysis are entered using the SPM.
Data used in other specific modules of LOGFAS are populated using the dedicated
functionalities of modules and explained the relevant Chapters.
This Chapter will only deal with the functions required to support the GeoMan functions
being taught.
LOGFAS Version 6.1 has introduced new features of GeoMan which looks different to
previous versions. Some of the functions are conducted with processes that are
consistent with the new ADAMS and CORSOM, but are different to those used in
previous versions of LOGFAS.
Note: Although all of the modules are similar, there are some minor variations
between them. Illustrations in this Chapter are from the GeoMan. Additional
functions are described in the relevant Chapter of the ADAMS and CORSOM
Tutorials.
Opening the GeoMan
To access the program, CLICK on the Start button at the bottom left corner of your
screen and then follow the normal procedure for opening a program. SELECT either:

All Programs > LOGFAS6 > M&T > Geo Manager, or

All Programs > LOGFAS6 > LOGREP > Geo Manager, or

All Programs > LOGFAS6 > ACROSS > Geo Manager.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 2 – GEO DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
Page 2 - 2
If you have created a specific folder on your desktop with the icons for the LOGFAS
modules, you just DOUBLE CLICK on the GeoMan icon shown at Figure 2.1.
Figure 2.1
The GeoMan will now be accessed and a mapping screen similar to Figure 2.2 will
appear on the screen with the name of the active Map Project shown in the lower left
corner.
Map
Objects
Panel Tab.
Map
Controls
Panel Tab.
Map Display View.
Name of active Map
Project.
Map Object
Properties Panel
Tab.
Figure 2.1
When the module is accessed, you will see that the GeoMan comprises of a Menu row, a
Short-cut Toolbar and Map Display View surrounded by a number of Control Panel Tabs
as illustrated at Figure 2.2 and Figure 2.3.
Mapping Short-cut
buttons.
Map Objects
Short-cut
buttons.
Forces & Items Reports
Short-cut buttons.
Figure 2.3
The central Map Display View displays the selected map and the properties of selected
objects and forces; the RED rectangles are predefined maps and by moving the cursor to
the upper left corner of a RED rectangle, you will see name of the map with the file
extension (the format of the image) as shown at Figure 2.4.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 2 – GEO DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
Page 2 - 3
Figure 2.4
We will now look at the various features of GeoMan, starting with Map Controls.
You are here
Starting with GeoMan
Map Controls
Map Projects
Installing Map Data
Viewing Maps
Zoom In, Zoom Out and Pan Maps
Create, Delete and Import Maps
Toolbar Functions
Map Objects and Object Properties
Exporting and Importing Data from GeoMan
Report: Forces and Items
Exercises
Map Controls
The Map and Mapping functions are contained in the Map Controls Panel. To view the
detail in the Panel CLICK your cursor on the Map Controls Tab shown in Figure 2.5.
Figure 2.5
You will now see the Map Controls Panel as illustrated in Figure 2.6.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 2 – GEO DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
Page 2 - 4
Map Projects
Management
Project Maps
Management
Map Layer
Features
Figure 2.6
The Map Controls Panel will auto-hide when you click away from the panel. However, if
you wish to keep it visible, CLICK on the Auto Hide (Pin) icon, as shown in Figure 2.7,
and the panel will remain on the screen and the remainder of the window will rearrange
to allow you to work easier. This can be useful if you want to do a lot of mapping work
and do not want to keep opening the Map Controls panel.
CLICK on the Auto
Hide (Pin) icon.
Figure 2.7
The Auto Hide (Pin) icon will now change direction as shown in Figure 2.8; this indicates
that the Map Controls panel is locked in the open position.
Figure 2.8
If the Map Control panel is in the locked position it can be closed by CLICKING on the
Auto Hide (Pin) icon to reactivate the auto-hide function.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 2 – GEO DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
Page 2 - 5
You are here
Starting with GeoMan
Map Controls
Map Projects
Selecting a Map Project
Creating a New Map Project
Deleting a Map Project
Installing Map Data
Viewing Maps
Zoom In, Zoom Out and Pan Maps
Create, Delete and Import Maps
Toolbar Functions
Map Objects and Object Properties
Exporting and Importing Data from GeoMan
Report: Forces and Items
Exercises
Map Projects
The first area of the Map Controls panel is Map Projects.
Map Projects can be best described as a set of maps that have been grouped together
for a specific purpose, such as an exercise or operation. The Map Project folder usually
contains a set of maps that have been created by the user and, if appropriate, the
associated transport networks to be used for the task in hand.
For any Map Project there are two elements:

First, there is the Map Project folder which contains the maps and images created
or imported.

Second, there is a Project (*.pro) File; this holds information that links the project
folder to the GeoMan program.
The Map Project Folder and associated Project (*.pro) file are located in the C:\Program
Files\ NATO\ LOGFAS6\DATA\PROJECTS folder of your installation. An illustration of a
typical Map Project Folder and Project (*.pro) file arrangement is shown in Figure 2.9.
The Map
Project folder
The
associated
Project (*.pro)
file.
Figure 2.9
Selecting a Project
You should note there might be a number of projects for you to choose from. There
could be one for each operation or exercise you have access to and you can select the
one you want to work with.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 2 – GEO DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
Page 2 - 6
Figure 2.10 shows the area in the Map Controls panel used for selecting or creating a
new map project. To select the Map Project you want to work with, SELECT the name of
the required Map Project in the list view and then DOUBLE CLICK on the name. The
mapping associated with the project will now be available and the default map will be
displayed in the Map Display View.
DOUBLE CLICK on
the name of the
required Map Project.
Figure 2.10
For the Tutorial, we will begin by using the ATLANTIS Map Project for most of the work.
SELECT the Map Project named ATLANTIS and DOUBLE CLICK.
The selected and activated map project will now be displayed on the screen.
Creating a New Map Project
To create a new Map Project, ACCESS the Map Controls panel and CLICK on New…
button to the right of the Map Projects list. This will open the Select Name for Project
window as shown in Figure 2.11.
You can overwrite
the preset name
for a new Project.
Create maps for best
resolution on your
screen.
Existing data for
Artificial Geography
loaded to your
computer.
Select if the Maps
will be built from
Real World or
Artificial Geography.
Figure 2.11
For the Tutorial REPLACE the Map Project name m001 that is automatically proposed
by the software; INSERT the name EXAMPLE and SET to the resolution required.
Note: The software will automatically take the resolution (Display) settings of your
computer as its default.
For our new Map Project, we will use real world data, therefore ACTIVATE the Real
Geography radio button and then CLICK on the OK button.
The process to create the new map project may take a few minutes to complete. When it
is complete you will see that the new Map Project has been added to the list of Map
Projects and the world map is displayed as illustrated by Figure 2.12.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 2 – GEO DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
Page 2 - 7
The new Map
Project is
added to the
list.
A Map of
world is
added by
default.
Figure 2.12
The GeoMan program requires that each Map Project folder contains at least one map;
therefore by default, a map of the world is placed into every new Map Project folder.
If you want the Map Project to create maps using Artificial Geography, ACTIVATE the
appropriate radio button and SELECT the required Dataset from the list provided. The
selections shown in the list will depend on what data you have installed. An example of
this process is shown in Figure 2.13.
ACTIVATE
the radio
button.
SELECT the
required
Dataset.
Figure 2.13
For either Real Geography or Artificial Geography the Map Project folder must contain at
least one map. Therefore, like the previous option, if Artificial Geography is selected, the
program will create a map of the Default Artificial World based on the data set selected
and place it into the new Map Project folder.
For Tutorial CLICK on the Cancel button.
Note: Because of the programming requirements, it is not always possible for the
GeoMan to create the Artificial World with all of the contours showing.
Deleting a Map Project
There are a number of reasons why you may want to delete a map project from your
system. It could be when an exercise or operation has been completed and the project
is no longer useful to you, or you may want to manage your computer folders and files.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 2 – GEO DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
Page 2 - 8
To delete a map project, OPEN the Map Controls panel, SELECT the Map Project to be
deleted so it is highlighted and CLICK on the Delete button, as illustrated in Figure 2.14.
SELECT the
Project to be
deleted.
CLICK the
Delete button.
Figure 2.14
The program will display a Caution dialog as shown in Figure 2.15, asking you confirm
the deletion. For the Tutorial CLICK the Yes button to confirm the deletion.
Figure 2.15
The program will now delete the Map Project folder and the associated Project (*.pro) file
from your computer. Remember that any maps and other data held in the Map Project
folder will also be deleted automatically.
SELECT and ACTIVATE the Map Project named ATLANTIS from the selection
available; this is the one we will use for the Tutorial.
Remember, we are demonstrating a process in this Tutorial and the same methods of
selecting, creating and deleting can be used for any project you are working with.
You are here
Starting with GeoMan
Map Controls
Map Projects
Installing Map Data
Installing Local Source Map Data
Locating Map Data
Viewing Maps
Zoom In, Zoom Out and Pan Maps
Create, Delete and Import Maps
Toolbar Functions
Map Objects and Object Properties
Exporting and Importing Data from GeoMan
Report: Forces and Items
Exercises
Installing Map Data
The GeoMan can create Maps using data from one of two sources:
From a dataset maintained on your computer and installed in your C:\Program
Files\NATO\LOGFAS6\Common\DCW folder; however, it is also possible to install or
provide the URL to the dataset on another folder/drive or on a server and to connect the
GeoMan to this set.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 2 – GEO DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
Page 2 - 9
From a request sent by the GeoMan acting as a client to a Web Map Server (WMS)
service that will build the requested map with layers on the Server and then the map will
be sent back to the GeoMan application for display and use.
The use of WMS is important in NATO or for HQs who have adopted the Open
Geospatial Consortium’s (OGC) Geographic Server recommendations. This allows, for
example, access to and enables the building of maps from the different geographical
servers in theatre as currently used in NATO HQs, ISAF and KFOR.
The process for connection to servers is out of the scope of this documentation and has
to be carried out by System Administrators; details are in the GeoMan and CORSOM
Technical Guide or can be obtained direct from NCSA.
Installing Local Source Map Data
The Installation DVD automatically loads the basic data for the world, a set of artificial
world and the high resolution data for the NATO Central Region into the C:\Program
Files\NATO\LOGFAS6\ Common\DCW folder. The high resolution data for the other
parts of the world can be installed from the LOGFAS Install DVD during the initial
installation if selected; it can also be added later.
The folders and files can be copied into the C:\Program Files \ LOGFAS6 \ Common \
DCW folder or another part of your computer’s hard drive; they could also be loaded onto
a shared drive if you are working on a network.
For the GeoMan to work correctly, the program must know where the data is located.
The reason for this is that additional data could be available on a network or on your
computer along with very high definition map data and detailed terrain elevation data
(VMAP 2); so, it will be possible to build maps from different sets of data and in a format
that the GeoMan can use.
Locating Map Data
CLICK on the Options menu and then SELECT the Locate Map Data option as shown in
Figure 2.16.
Figure 2.16
The Assign Paths to Terrain Data window will appear on your screen. An illustration of
this window is shown in Figure 2.17.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 2 – GEO DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
Page 2 - 10
Illustration Only
Figure 2.17
Note: Your view may be different depending on how the data was loaded to your
computer or network.
On new installation, it could be that Artificial folder (data concerning Atlantis,
Constellatia and Mad) does not exist. In this case: install it from the DVD or Copy
and Paste from existing Artificial folder (LOGFAS Version 5.2 or Version 6.0) into
the NATO/LOGFAS6/DCW folder.
However, for specific exercises a set of Artificial Terrain data can be provided
and should be copied in an Artificial folder in the DCW, this folder can be created
if it does not already exist.
Now, CLICK on the Browse button on the window to locate the relevant data. When
you have completed the locating process, CLICK the OK button to close the window.
The program will now use this information when using the data to create new maps.
You are here
Starting with GeoMan
Map Controls
Map Projects
Installing Map Data
Viewing Maps
Accessing Maps
Default Map
Zoom In, Zoom Out and Pan Maps
Create, Delete and Import Maps
Toolbar Functions
Map Objects and Object Properties
Exporting and Importing Data from GeoMan
Report: Forces and Items
Exercises
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 2 – GEO DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
Page 2 - 11
Viewing Maps
The GeoMan can be used to create maps to support your work. Once created, the maps
are available within a Map Project and are shown on the Map Display View outlined by
RED rectangles on the selected map, as illustrated in Figure 2.18.
Individual maps
selection
To SELECT a Map for
display CLICK at the
Top Left Corner.
Figure 2.18
Accessing Maps
To access the individual maps created in the Map Project you can:

Move your cursor to the top left corner of the rectangle of interest, a label will be
displayed showing the name allocated to the map; you can then CLICK and the
selected map will be displayed full-screen.

ACCESS the Map Controls panel and SELECT the Map Name from the Project
Maps list and then DOUBLE CLICK as shown at Figure 2.19.
Figure 2.19
Default Map
The Default Map or main map is the map that will be displayed first when opening a Map
Project; generally this map encompasses all of the other maps created and held in a Map
Project. If not otherwise specified, the Default Map is the map created by the system
when creating the Map Project and the name always allocated to this map is
WORLD.bmp. This map and its name are critical to the functions of the GeoMan and
should not be changed.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 2 – GEO DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
Page 2 - 12
The user can change the Default Map by selecting the name of the map that you want to
be opened first when accessing the Map Project and then clicking the Make Selected
Map Default button in the Maps Controls panel.
For the Tutorial we will SELECT the map name GENERAL ATLANTIS.bmp in the Project
Maps list; this is to be our Default Map. Now CLICK on Make Selected Map Default
button as shown at Figure 2.20.
CLICK on the
Set Map as
Default button.
SELECT on the
name of the Map
to be the default.
Figure 2.20
After having accepted the warning dialog when selecting a Default Map, you can return
to the map selected as the Default by RIGHT CLICKING anywhere on the Map Display
View and SELECT the Default Map option as shown in Figure 2.21.
Select Default
Map option.
Figure 2.21
Alternatively, this selection function is available from the Mapping Short-cut options as
shown at Figure 2.22.
Default Map
Icon option
Figure 2.22
You are here
Starting with GeoMan
Map Controls
Map Projects
Installing Map Data
Viewing Maps
Zoom In, Zoom Out and Pan Maps
Zoom In Function
Zoom Out Function
Pan Map Function
Create, Delete and Import Maps
Toolbar Functions
Map Objects and Object Properties
Exporting and Importing Data from GeoMan
Report: Forces and Items
Exercises
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 2 – GEO DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
Page 2 - 13
Zoom In, Zoom Out and Pan Maps
Before we start the next section we have to make sure that the GeoMan uses the correct
Map Data. In the Map Control panel SELECT the Local Maps option.
To allow you to navigate in the Map Display View the GeoMan has Zoom In, Zoom Out
and Pan Map functions. These are activated by clicking the relevant short cut button.
The buttons are shown in Figure 2.23.
Pan Map
Zoom In
Zoom Out
Figure 2.23
Zoom In Function
When the Zoom In button is activated the cursor changes to a magnifying glass icon and
this can be used in two ways.
Define Zoom In Area Mode: When the Zoom In button is activated you can CLICK on
the left button of your mouse in the Map Display View and draw an area of interest; the
GeoMan will create a map of the area automatically. The map created will include
contours, city and town names if selected.
Zoom In by Level Mode: When the Zoom In button is activated CLICK the Cursor on the
displayed map; the GeoMan will create a map of the area zoomed in by one level. The
place where the cursor was clicked is automatically used as the centre of the map image
created.
The map created by using the Zoom In function can be saved as a Project Map using the
Save in Project button in the Map Controls panel as we will see at the Create Map
section.
Zoom Out Function
The Zoom Out function works in a similar way to the Zoom In by Level Mode. When the
Zoom Out button is activated CLICK the Cursor on the displayed map; the GeoMan will
create a map of the area zoomed out by one level. The place where the cursor was
clicked is automatically used as the centre of the map image created.
The map created by using the Zoom Out function can be saved as a Project Map using
the Save in Project button in the Map Controls panel as we will see at Create Map
section.
Pan Map Function
It is possible to move the centre of your displayed map. CLICK on the Pan Map button
shown in Figure 2.23. You can now use the cursor to move the centre of your map in
any direction. Again, the map created by using the Pan Map function can be saved as a
Project Map using the Save in Project function on the Map Controls panel as we will see
at Create Map section.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
CHAPTER 2 – GEO DATA
Page 2 - 14
You are here
Starting with GeoMan
Map Controls
Map Projects
Installing Map Data
Viewing Maps
Zoom In, Zoom Out and Pan Maps
Create, Delete and Import Maps
Creating Maps
Deleting Maps
Importing Maps
Example Import
Toolbar Functions
Map Objects and Object Properties
Report: Forces and Items
Exporting and Importing Data from GeoMan
Exercises
Create, Delete, Import Maps
In addition to the maps that are provided with the LOGFAS installation or are made
available to you from other sources, you can create your own maps based on either Real
World or Artificial Geography using the map data linked to your GeoMan.
The process for creating a map for your active map project is a series of steps:

Step 1: SELECT and ACTIVATE the Map Project in which you wish to create a
map.

Step 2: SELECT the Local Maps or Server Map option in the Map Controls panel
to indicate source of the data to be used.

Step 3: DEFINE the area of interest that the map image is to cover. To do these
use the Zoom In, Zoom Out and Pan Map functions.

Step 4: ACCESS the Map Controls panel and SELECT the Map Features or
Layers you want to be displayed on the map image.

Step 5: REFRESH the Map Image so that your selection of Map Features are
applied.
Note: Steps 4 and 5 can be repeated many times and until you have the Map
Image the way you want it.

Step 6: SAVE the Map Image in the Project Maps with a meaningful name.
Creating Maps in Local Maps Mode
For the Tutorial we will follow the steps to create a map of the South East area of
BROWNLAND, using the Local Maps data loaded to your computer. The first steps are
shown on Figure 2.24.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 2 – GEO DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
Page 2 - 15
Step 1: SELECT the
Map Project required.
Step 3: SELECT the
Map to be displayed.
Step 2: SELECT the
Local Maps option.
Figure 2.24
So for the Tutorial follow the steps:

Step 1: SELECT the Map Project named ATLANTIS.

Step 2: SELECT the Local Maps option as the data source.

Step 3: SELECT the Map named South Atlantis so that it is displayed full screen.
Now we will use the Zoom In, Zoom Out and Pan Map functions to define an area of
interest. As a reminder these are shown at Figure 2.25.
Figure 2.25
For the Tutorial we selected the map named South Atlantis.bmp and now we Zoom In to
define the area of interest, in this case the East of the map as shown at Figure 2.26.
Figure 2.26
We can now proceed with the steps:
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 2 – GEO DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
Page 2 - 16

Step 4: SELECT the Map Features to be included on the Map. The features you
are to apply are shown in Figure 2.27.
Step 5: CLICK on
the Refresh option.
Step 6: CLICK on
the Save in Project
option.
Step 4: SELECT
the required Map
Features
Figure 2.27
Note: Practice will show you which feature can and should be selected depending on the
use of the Map Image being created.
Note: For maps being created using artificial geography you must SELECT the
High Resolution HR Contours option.
You should experiment with the different combinations and options of features to
understand the extent of the possibilities that can be included on individual maps.
When the Map Image contains the features you required to be displayed and is the way
you want it.

Step 5: CLICK on the Refresh button so that the GeoMan produces a new map
image and displays it in the Map Display View.

Step 6: CLICK on the Save in Project button. The Enter Map Name window as
shown in Figure 2.28 will open.
ACCEPT the
automatic Name or
GIVE the map a
Meaningful Name
(recommended).
SELECT the
required image
Format.
CLICK the
OK button
Figure 2.28
At this point, the program gives the map a name automatically. You can accept this, but
it is strongly recommended that you give the created map a meaningful name. This will
help when you want to select a particular map in the future.
For the Tutorial INSERT the Map Name as SE_Brownland.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 2 – GEO DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
Page 2 - 17
The map can be saved in Bitmap (*.bmp), Joint Photographic Group (*.jpg) or Graphics
Interchange Format gif (*.gif) format.
Note: The *.gif and *.jpeg formats use less hard disc space and are better for
sending by the internet.
For the Tutorial SELECT the jpg option.
You can also set the created map as the Default Map or main map by activating the
Make Selected Map Default button. Remember that within a map project, there can be
only one map activated as the default.
For the Tutorial DO NOT ACTIVATE the Make Selected Map Default option. We will
continue with the steps:

Step 7: CLICK the OK button and the new map will be saved in the active Map
Project folder.
Note: There is no limit to the number of maps that can be created and held
within an individual map project.

Step 8: ACCESS the Project Maps list in the Maps Control panel and then
CHECK that the new Name for the map image has been added to the Map
Project list as shown in Figure 2.29.
Map Image is displayed
in the Map View
Map name is added to
the Project Maps list.
Figure 2.29
Creating Maps in Server Mode
The user actions and process for creating a map image using the Server Maps option is
similar, but there are some differences that need to be fully understood.
You should first select in local mode the area from which you want to get a map from the
map server. Then SELECT Map Server button and you will get a list of available Map
Servers. SELECT the server you would like to work with and REFRESH Map. The Map
issued is built on a server map from a standardised OGC request issued by GeoMan.
The Map Features of the local mode will be replaced by the Map Features available on
the server. You can SELECT those wished and then REFRESH.
For the majority of Map Servers, the Zoom & Pan functions of GeoMan work as well.
These in-depth differences and the specific settings are outside the scope of this Tutorial
and the details can be found in the GeoMan Guide. However, your CJ6 CIS personnel
know the method to connect your computer as a client to a map server.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 2 – GEO DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
Page 2 - 18
Deleting Maps
The reasons for wanting to delete maps from a Map Project are numerous and obvious.
The user can delete the maps that are not wanted from the Map Project folder by using
the Delete Selected Map button in the Project Maps in the Map Controls panel.
For the Tutorial in the Map Projects list, SELECT the Map named SE_Brownland.jpg and
then CLICK on the Delete Selected Map button as shown in Figure 2.30.
CLICK on the
Delete Selected
Map button.
SELECT the
required Map
name.
Figure 2.30
A Caution dialog as shown at Figure 2.31 will open asking you Are you sure you want to
delete the selected Map?
Figure 2.31
After checking that you are deleting the correct map, CLICK on the Yes button to confirm
the deletion.
The name of the deleted map will be removed from the list of Project Maps. The map will
still remain on display in the Map Display View until the screen is refreshed with a
selected map or the default map.
For the Tutorial RIGHT CLICK in the Map Display View and SELECT the Default Map
option.
Importing Maps from Other Sources
The LOGFAS community has been exchanging maps created on the system for some
time now. It has been a common practice to create a separate project with its own map
set for a specific exercise or operation.
There comes a time, however, when the detail available from the geographical data DVD
is not sufficient for a particular task. The requirement, therefore, is to be able to import
maps from an external source, which can then be used to display information in other
parts of the program. The GeoMan has a Map Import function and can be used to import
most types of maps or photos that can be displayed as a *.bmp, *.jpeg or *.gif image.
The one rule is that the imported map must have been produced by a projection that
provides a square or virtually square grid pattern or that the photo has been
Orthorectified or Geocorrected. Maps which have been produced from projections that
have uneven “northing” and “easting” distances will produce inaccurate location
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1 Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 2 – GEO DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
Page 2 - 19
indicators in the LOGFAS applications. However, the following map/image types will
normally perform satisfactorily after necessary rectification has been carried out:

Standard military or national maps,

Navigational map (Air and Maritime),

Satellite images with associated WGS 83/84 coordinates
To import a Non-LOGFAS map/image, you must have an image in a *.bmp, *.jpeg or *.gif
or similar format of the area to be imported and be able to identify two points with
coordinates in WGS 82/84 Geodesic Datum.
Geodetic datum defines the size and shape of the earth and the origin and orientation of
the coordinate systems used to map the earth. Hundreds of different data have been
used to frame position descriptions since the first estimates of the earth's size were
made by Aristotle. Datum has evolved from those describing a spherical earth to
ellipsoidal models derived from years of satellite measurements.
Referencing geodetic coordinates to the wrong datum can result in position errors of
hundreds of meters. Different nations and agencies use different datum as the basis for
coordinate systems used to identify positions in geographic information systems, precise
positioning systems, and navigation systems. The diversity of datum in use today and the
technological advancements that have made possible global positioning measurements
with sub-meter accuracies requires careful datum selection and careful conversion
between coordinates in different datum.
An examination of a typical project folder demonstrates that each map in a project has a
matching data text (*.dat) File. An example is shown in Figure 2.32. The *.dat (Data) file
is used by the program to place the map image in the correct place and at the correct
scale on the world map. The data defines the locations (using the NATO Geodesic
system) of the top-left and bottom-right corners of the map image.
The image file
and associated
*.dat (Data)
File.
Figure 2.32
The import process uses two known points on the imported map to calculate where the
corners of the map image should be placed. The import process also allows the
software to write the appropriate *.dat File to import the corresponding image and then
both files are saved in the Project Folder.
In order to import successfully, you must, of course, know the exact Latitude and
Longitude of two points on the map that you wish to import. The import routine requires
this data to be in the form of: Degrees of latitude or longitude, Minutes of latitude or
longitude, Decimals of Minutes of latitude or longitude.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 2 – GEO DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
Page 2 - 20
Note: The import routine does not use Seconds of Latitude or Longitude and, if
necessary, these must be converted into decimals. For example: 45 seconds
would equal 0.75 minutes. If you only know the Universal Transverse Mercator
(UTM) or Grid Reference of the two points you want to use, you will need to get the
data converted into WGS83/84 standard. Your HQ/National geographic specialists
will be able to assist with this.
Example Import
If the map in question is highly detailed or of a small area, it is advisable to create a
LOGFAS GeoMan map of the area around where the detailed map is to be inserted.
This will help with other program operations.
By way of example, we will create a map based on a scanned Geocorrected satellite
image of South of Shetland Islands. This Image is in your Mail In Folder.
To assist you, an eight-step process has been developed to ensure that all requirements
of the program are met; these can be adapted for any image as a scanned map.
For the Tutorial, follow the following steps:
Step One: Ensure you have identified the map/image to be imported and that you know
its location on your system. For the Tutorial it is located in the Mail In folder and is named
Shetlands_Details.jpg.
Step Two (Optional but Recommended): In this case the LOGFAS map should be of
the Shetland Islands; this can be selected as shown in Figure 2.33. Confirmation of
whether your input has been placed in the right region will be verified when you have
completed the process.
Figure 2.33
CREATE a new map in the project covering the area of interest that will include the area
of the map being imported; your screen should be as illustrated at Figure 2.34.
Figure 2.34
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 2 – GEO DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
Page 2 - 21
Remember that you could enlarge the area between Easter Quarff and Sandwick, which
will be the area to import our map.
Step Three: From the Main Menu, CLICK on the File menu and SELECT the Import Map
option as shown in Figure 2.35.
Figure 2.35
The Import Map dialog will appear on your screen as shown in Figure 2.36, which tells
you to First select the Bitmap to be imported.
Figure 2.36
CLICK the OK button; this will take you to the Import Map window.
Use normal Windows conventions to LOCATE and SELECT the File named Map
Import.jpg in the Mail In Folder, then CLICK the Open button. The selected map will
appear on your screen as shown in Figure 2.37.
Point One
Point
Two
Figure 2.37
The map extents dialog will appear on the screen, CLICK the OK button after reading the
information.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 2 – GEO DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
Page 2 - 22
Step Four: Now you must input your first point of reference. Remember the rules that
apply to the Lat/Long. For the Tutorial PLACE the Cursor on the Point One (Radar Red
Circle Marker) in the left of picture, this will be our first point to enter. Now, CLICK with
the Mouse button. The Enter Coordinates of Clicked Point Window as shown in Figure
2.38 will appear on the screen.
Figure 2.38
Step Five: ENTER the appropriate Longitude and Latitude data in the boxes provided.
For Point One these are:

01 Degrees West and 14.54 Minutes West,

60 Degrees North, and 03.31 Minutes North.
After inputting the data CLICK the OK button. The program will confirm the coordinates
and image data, as shown in Figure 2.39.
Figure 2.39
Step Six: Now you have to ensure that the second point of reference can be seen on
your screen display. For the Tutorial, IDENTIFY the Point Two (Greemow Indicator) to
the south west of the displayed map. This is our Point Two shown and is shown in Figure
2.40.
Point Two
Figure 2.40
Now MOVE the Cursor at this point and CLICK the Mouse button.
Step Seven: INSERT the Latitude and Longitude for the second point of reference.
Remember the rules and follow the procedure as it has already been described.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1 Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 2 – GEO DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
Page 2 - 23
For the Tutorial, INSERT the Values:

01 Degrees, 12.11 Minutes West, and

60 Degrees, 02.22 Minutes North.
After inputting the data CLICK the OK button. The program will confirm the coordinates
and image data (for both Points One and Two) as shown in Figure 2.41.
Figure 2.41
Since you cannot change these, CLICK the OK button. Now, the program imports the
picture from your Mail In Folder into the Atlantis folder and creates the *.dat file related to
it. If all has gone well, the dialog shown at Figure 2.42 will appear to confirm that import
is done.
Figure 2.42
CLICK the OK button; a right click should bring up your default map, then SELECT Main
Shetland map and you should see a small Red Rectangle indicating the new map as
shown at Figure 2.43.
Imported map
is now available
for selection.
The Imported Map
(Red Rectangle).
Figure 2.43
You can now SELECT the Shetlands_Details_.JPG Map; CLICK at the Top Left-hand
Corner of the rectangle to display the map on the screen. You can now use the map in
any of the LOGFAS applications.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 2 – GEO DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
Page 2 - 24
You are here
Starting with GeoMan
Map Controls
Map Projects
Installing Map Data
Viewing Maps
Zoom In, Zoom Out and Pan Maps
Create, Delete and Import Maps
Toolbar Functions
Copy Map
Distance Tool
Map Objects and Object Properties
Exporting and Importing Data from GeoMan
Report: Forces and Items
Exercises
Toolbar Functions
The GeoMan has a number of functions that you may find useful to support your normal
work. In this section we will look at these functions; Copy Maps in Clipboard and the
Distance Tool.
Copy Maps in Clipboard
The displayed map, whether included in the Map Project list or created using the Zoom
In, Zoom Out, Pan Map or Import functions, can also be copied as an image to your
computer clipboard and it can then be applied to other programs or to assist when writing
reports or creating PowerPoint slides.
To copy the image to the clipboard, CLICK on the Icon Save Specified Region in
Clipboard button as shown at Figure 2.44.
The Save Specified Region
in Clipboard button.
Figure 2.44
This will open Draw Region or All dialog as shown at Figure 2.45.
Figure 2.45
You can select either:

Specify Region By Rectangle option: Define the area of interest using the
Zoom In, Zoom Out and Pan Map functions to create the display map to be
copied.

Entire Shown Area option: This option places the currently displayed map onto
the clipboard.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 2 – GEO DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
Page 2 - 25
After selecting the required area; a confirmation dialog, as shown at Figure 2.46 will be
displayed.
Figure 2.46
CLICK the OK button to close the dialog. You can now paste the map image from the
clipboard to other applications using normal MS Windows functions.
Distance Tool
The GeoMan has a tool that allows you to measure and calculate the distance between
two or more points on the displayed map. To activate this function, CLICK on the
Distances Measuring Tool Icon; this is shown in Figure 2.47.
Figure 2.47
When activated, the Distance Measure dialog as shown in Figure 2.48 will appear on the
screen.
Figure 2.48
Normally you would activate a network (route) for the tool to use for its calculations. At
this stage of the Tutorial we have not discussed networks in detail so we will use the
Distance Measure tool to measure the distance along the Arc, this is the straight line
distance between two or more points.
To measure the distance between two places on the displayed map, PLACE your cursor
on the Start Point that you want to measure from and CLICK.
Then CLICK on the point on the map that you want to use as the End or Finish Point.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 2 – GEO DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
Page 2 - 26
The Distance Measure window will now show the distance between the selected points
on the map and this will be displayed in both Nautical Miles and Kilometres.
The Distance Measure tool will also allow you to follow a route on the displayed map.
You can click a series of points on the displayed map. The Distance Measure window
will now display the:

Total Distance: This shows the total distances following the arc (route) that was
clicked and the legs between the clicked points will be displayed as a PINK line.

Last Leg Distance: The distance between the last two points selected on the
displayed map with the leg being shown as a RED line.
The illustration at Figure 2.49 shows an example of the displayed distances and coloured
lines on the displayed map.
Total Distances
displayed.
Start Point
Last Leg
Distance
displayed.
The Along Arc
Distance being
measured.
Last Leg
displayed.
Finish or
End Point.
Figure 2.49
If a Network had been activated, the Total and Last Leg Distances will be calculated
following the network and the detail provided will reflect this.
The other information and fields on the Distance Display dialog are used by the ADAMS,
CORSOM and EVE community; the detail on the use of these fields is documented in the
respective tutorial documentation and is shown at Networks Section of this Chapter.
After you have finished a measurement you can CLICK on the Reset button and to
calculate a new distance. This will clear the display and you can repeat the process.
To remove the Distance Measure window from the display and for the Tutorial, we will
CLICK on the OK button to close the dialog.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 2 – GEO DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
Page 2 - 27
You are here
Starting with GeoMan
Map Controls
Map Objects and Object Properties
GeoLocs
Creating a GeoLoc
Object Properties
GeoLoc Query Function
Infrastructure Data Conventions
Deleting a GeoLoc
Multimedia
Drawn Objects
Networks
Exporting and Importing Data from GeoMan
Report: Forces and Items
Exercises
MAP OBJECTS
We have seen that mapping could be considered as a background describing the
physical, permanent environment of a geographical area.
Map Objects are held in the database and contain the detailed information about
Geographical Locations (GeoLocs), Networks (Routes) and Movements/Logistic Sites
and Areas. In addition any associated multimedia files and forces can also be created,
managed, displayed and controlled.
All of the Map Object data options are created, edited, deleted, exported and imported by
the user and are associated with a specific situation. The GeoMan can then be used in a
dynamic way as the situation changes.
Access to objects is provided through the Map Objects and Map Object Properties panels
in the GeoMan. An example of the Map Objects tab and the related panel is shown at
Figure 2.50.
Map Objects
Properties
Tab.
Map Objects
Panel.
Map
Objects
Tab.
Figure 2.50
As we will be working continuously with the Map Objects panel for this part of the
Tutorial, we will pin the Map Objects panel open. To do this, CLICK on the Map Objects
panel, and then CLICK on the Pin icon as shown at Figure 2.51.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 2 – GEO DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
Page 2 - 28
Pin icon.
Figure 2.51
Remember that to allow panel to Auto Hide when the cursor is moved away, you would
click again on Pin icon or on the X button, then the panel to auto close.
Maps Objects shown in the panel can include:
GeoLocs: Specific location types relating to movements and logistic planning. The detail
for the GeoLocs can be created and managed in the Objects Properties panel and this
will be discussed later.
Networks: These are the routes that connect the locations and represent the roads,
railways, airways, pipelines and Inland Waterways (IWW) that the programs have to use
for calculations. The different networks can be built from the mapping data or created by
the user, to link the locations.
Multimedia: Specific files associated with a GeoLoc or other point on the map. These
can be video, image or sound files.
Drawn Objects: These are used to depict areas and lines with associated properties
that are added to the Objects Properties panel.
Forces by Profile: These allow you to display the relevant Forces and their Holdings on
the Map. It is also possible to move these Forces on the displayed map.
For of the Tutorial, DEACTIVATE the tick boxes related to the Multimedia, Drawn
Objects and Forces By Profile options. These areas will be discussed in detail later so at
the moment we need to avoid any unwanted actions.
GeoLocs
A Geographical Location (GeoLoc) is a specific location of interest with attached
properties related to logistics and movements matters, all data is stored in database.
GeoLocs are used to support the planning and analysis work of the LOGFAS Users.
You can add a GeoLoc to the database, insert and change the detailed infrastructure
information, or you can delete GeoLocs that are no longer required.
The database used to support LOGFAS contains a large number of GeoLocs. These
GeoLocs support all of the LOGFAS modules: ADAMS, EVE, CORSOM, ACROSS,
SDM, SPM, and LDM. Some of these modules use more geographical features to
support specific functions than other modules. However, it is essential that all LOGFAS
users fully understand the basic processes relating to GeoLocs.
Once created or added to the database, the GeoLocs are available for displaying and
other use by the individual Map Projects and by the other LOGFAS modules. Careful
management is required to ensure that the GeoLoc data created by one user does not
impact on another; this is because many of the allocations in the creation process are
automatic, and it is easy during the importing process to allow a situation where one
user’s data overwrite another’s data.
You should always check to see if the GeoLoc required is already in existence, only if
there is no existing GeoLoc should one be created. When appropriate, it is
recommended that the Host Nation or relevant HQ should create the GeoLoc and
distribute the data to those interested and to the rest of the LOGFAS community.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 2 – GEO DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
Page 2 - 29
To assist with the management of GeoLoc data, the LOGFAS community introduced a
system that locks the data in a particular GeoLoc so individual users cannot change it.
All such GeoLocs have the prefix code AA and the nation or organisation responsible
has agreed to the data.
Any requests for additional GeoLocs to be included in the AA GeoLoc codes, or changes
to the existing data, should be sent to the relevant LOGFAS Project Officer shown in the
Introduction to this Tutorial using the format outlined in the Bi-SC GeoLoc SOP.
At the time of writing, the latest edition of AA Coded GeoLocs is AA UPDATE NUMBER
12.
For the Tutorial we will create first a new GeoLoc to provide you with an understanding of
GeoLocs and the options available.
Creating a New GeoLoc
Creating a new GeoLoc is undertaken in a number of steps as follows:

Step 1: Select or create a map to show where GeoLoc should be added.

Step 2: Set or verify the code prefix to be used.

Step 3: From the Map Object panel select the type of GeoLoc to be added.

Step 4: Drag and Drop the GeoLoc Type icon on the map at the required location.

Step 5: Complete the Add GeoLoc information window.

Step 6: Review the basic detail about the GeoLoc,

Step 7: Update the Map Object Properties.
We will illustrate this process by creating a new GeoLoc for the nation of 099: ZZ
BROWNLAND. The location will be a Military Installation named LIMETOWN and is
located at the coordinates of 461512N0255851W.
Step1: Create a Map or Select an Existing Project Map
Before inserting a new GeoLoc, ensure that you have selected the relevant Map Project
and Project Map of the area where the GeoLoc is to be placed. You may need to create
a specific map for your own work.
For the Tutorial SELECT the Map Project named ATLANTIS and then SELECT the
Project Map named South Atlantis.
Step 2: Set and/or Verify the GeoLoc Code Prefix
GeoLocs have a unique key identifier within the database in the form of a GeoLoc Code
of two letters (prefix) and four numbers. As an example, GATDULA RH is coded ZZ0044
meaning it is the 44th GeoLoc created with the prefix ZZ (ZZ is the code used for the
NATO exercise data).
GeoLocs created by nations have a prefix beginning by their two-letter NATO Nation
Code. The GeoLocs maintained by NATO have the prefix AA. Codes are also allocated
the NATO Operational Theatres, ISAF has the prefix IF and KFOR uses the prefix KF.
Other codes exist or can be created to support exercises scenarios.
For training, the prefix XX is allocated and applied. The user has to set and/or verify that
the correct prefix is applied. To do this the Map Preferences options are used.
For the Tutorial CLICK on the Options menu and SELECT the Map Preferences option
as shown in Figure 2.52.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 2 – GEO DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
Page 2 - 30
Map Preferences
option.
Figure 2.52
This will activate the Map Preferences window as illustrated in Figure 2.53.
Figure 2.53
In the lower left of the window you will see the When Creating New Locations view, this
is where you VERIFY or SET information relating to the Default Nation and the Prefix for
the GeoLoc Code as illustrated and filled in Figure 2.54.
Figure 2.54
For the Tutorial SELECT/INSERT the following:
Select nation as default for new locations: SELECT the nation 099: ZZ Brownland.
Enter two letters to begin GeoLoc Code: INSERT the letters XX.
CLICK on the OK button to close the Map Preferences window.
Step 3: Select Type of GeoLoc
ACCESS the Map Objects panel and then CLICK on the type of GeoLocs as illustrated
in Figure 2.55. Now you can select the type of location you want to create, the choices
are obvious.
For the Tutorial SELECT the Other Facilities option.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 2 – GEO DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
Page 2 - 31
Figure 2.55
Step 4: Drag and Drop GeoLoc Type Icon to Display Map
We will now drag and drop the GeoLoc Type icon to the position on the map where it
should be placed. As you do this, your cursor will be joined with the + symbol as shown
at Figure 2.56.
Figure 2.56
The user can place the GeoLoc icon at the correct position by using the Map
Coordinates displayed at the bottom right of the GeoMan window. Alternatively, the
GeoLoc icon can be placed anywhere on the Map Display and the correct position
established using the Map Object Properties panel as we will explain later.
For the Tutorial DRAG and DROP the Other Facilities GeoLoc Type icon to somewhere
on the south west peninsular of BROWNLAND, the exact location is unimportant as we
will insert the correct coordinates later.
Step 5: Complete the ADD GeoLoc Information
After dropping the GeoLoc Type icon onto the map, the Create New Location window will
appear on the screen and we can insert the required detail from Figure 2.57.
List of available
Location Types.
We selected 099:
ZZ Atlantis
Brownland in the
preferences.
Figure 2.57
For the Tutorial, ENTER the Location Name, Location Type and Location Nation to be
selected as follows:
GeoLoc Name:
INSERT - LIMETOWN.
GeoLoc Type:
SELECT - MILS (Other military
Post/HQ) from the combo box.
site/Camp/
Normally, you would select the appropriate GeoLoc
type for your purposes.
Nation:
SELECT – 099: ZZ BROWNLAND from the combo
box.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 2 – GEO DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
Page 2 - 32
Note: The Selected Nation is automatically filled by the program to the Default
Nation that you selected in the Map Preferences. However, the Nation selected
must be the country in which the GeoLoc is located.
When completing the information the Create New Location window should be as shown
in Figure 2.58.
Figure 2.58
Now CLICK on the OK button, the Create New Location window will close and the new
GeoLoc is will be added to the database and is displayed on the map, as shown in
Figure 2.59, where it is depicted as the GeoLoc icon for Other Facilities.
Figure 2.59
If you move your cursor over the icon, the GeoLoc name label will be displayed as shown
in Figure 2.60.
Figure 2.60
You can also control how the GeoLocs are displayed on the Map Display View; these
can be the Icon Symbols or Coloured Markers. It could be useful to have the GeoLocs in
use saved so that they will be displayed when re-opening the GeoMan.
For the Tutorial ACTIVATE the Coloured Markers and On startup, display GeoLocs that
were visible when you exited option as shown in Figure 2.61.
Figure 2.61
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 2 – GEO DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
Page 2 - 33
CLICK the OK button to close the Map Preferences window.
You will now see that the GeoLoc named LIMETOWN is now indicated by a GREEN
marker.
The colour of the GeoLoc Marker relates to the GeoLoc Type. In Figure 2.62 you can
see examples of the GeoLoc Markers for airports, seaports, railheads and other
locations.
BLACK =
Rail Location
Types.
GREEN = Other
Location Types
YELLOW =
Air Location
types.
MAGENTA =
Sea Location
Types.
Figure 2.62
To assist you, the GeoLoc Markers are colour coded depending on the GeoLoc type.
The colour coding of the Marker are shown in the following table:
YELLOW
= Airports/Airfields/Helicopter sites.
MAGENTA
= Sea Ports and IWW Installations.
BLACK
= Rail Stations/Installations.
RED
= RSOM Facilities e.g. Staging Areas
GREY
= Storage Sites
BLUE
= Border Crossing Points
BROWN
= Traffic Control Point or Transportation Point, e.g. ferry or
bridge.
GREEN
= Other Facilities including cultural, military and political
points of reference/interest not shown above.
Step 6: Review the GeoLoc
Before we complete the required detail for the new GeoLoc properties, you can manage
the location by clicking on the GeoLoc marker or icon. The GeoMan shows the name of
the GeoLoc and you will see the Identity Number.
In this Tutorial example the GeoLoc ID is Prefixed XX and has the Serial Number 0000
(this is the first XX GeoLoc in the database).
If the GeoLoc ID does not have your correct National/HQ prefix (in this case prefix XX),
you can change the code in the Object Properties window.
Note: Remember that you can set the prefix code in the Map Preferences windows.
By clicking on the label the user has a number of options as illustrated at Figure 2.63.
For the Tutorial CLICK on the GeoLoc label for the location named XX0000 LIMETOWN.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1 Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 2 – GEO DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
Page 2 - 34
Figure 2.63
There are a number of options available at this stage and these allow the user to:
Select: Clicking on the Select option and the GeoLoc Marker/Icon is highlighted by a
flashing yellow star in the Map Display View. The GeoLoc is also activated in the Map
Objects list. Both of these indicators are illustrated in Figure 2.64.
GeoLoc is
highlighted in the
Map View by a
Flashing Yellow
Star.
Automatically
GeoLoc is
shown in the
Map Objects
Properties tab
Figure 2.64
When selecting the Map Object panel, you can see type of GeoLoc inserted and
eventually other GeoLocs in the Map Display View as illustrated in Figure 2.65.
Figure 2.65
View in Google Earth: If you have LOGFAS installed on a computer that has access to
the internet, you can view the GeoLoc in Google Earth.
Note: This can only be done with an UNCLASSIFIED system that contains no data
graded above UNCLASSIFIED and even so your enquiry (with your IP address) on
a specific location could be recorded and can reveal future CLASSIFIED
intentions.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
CHAPTER 2 – GEO DATA
Page 2 - 35
Remove from View: You can remove the GeoLoc from the display in the Map Display
View by clicking on the Remove from View Option. The GeoLoc is removed from the
display but will remain in the database.
Delete from Database: If you click on this option, and confirm the deletion when
prompted, the GeoLoc will be deleted from your active database. We will return to this
option later.
Drag to New Map Point: If this option is activated the GeoLoc can be moved in the Map
Display View by Dragging the Marker/Icon to the required position.
For the Tutorial CLICK this Option and MOVE LIMETOWN to the south coast of the
peninsular.
Out-of-Gauge Alert: This is specific to transportation location and is used mainly in
CORSOM. Purpose is to add the location in the JOCWatch list (specific to CORSOM) an
alert that this transportation point has reduced capacity. Alert appear when this option is
selected.
Toggle Label On/Off. This allows you to make visible the location name label or to
remove it from the screen.
Note: Remember that we are describing the process, when you apply it to your
own work some details could be different.
Step 7: Inserting and Update the Map Object Properties
The final step in creating a new GeoLoc is to insert the Map Object Properties. This is
the exact details and information relating to the GeoLoc.
Map Object Properties
Once the GeoLoc has been added to the database the Map Object Properties may be
added or updated. The Map Object Properties panel gives the detail that shows the
basic operating characteristics of the GeoLoc.
The information held for an individual GeoLoc will depend on the Location Type selected
or applied when it was created. The main GeoLoc Types have specific sets of data
windows that appear when the GeoLoc is selected. When the GeoLoc is activated, the
related detail will appear in the Map Object Properties panel where it can be inserted,
completed or updated.
Note: Remember that if the selected GeoLoc has an AA GeoLoc Code, you cannot
change the data and information shown on the GeoLoc tab. You have to follow the
procedures given in the Bi-SC AA GeoLoc SOP and request the changes to be
made.
In the Map Object Properties panel there are tick and combo boxes that assist you to
enter standardised data. Other fields require you to insert the required detail. The
windows are based on recognised and accepted standards of measurement and
terminology.
The level of detail and input protocols to be used are decided by the individual nations,
organisations or are agreed by the LOGFAS community.
To access the Map Object Properties for a GeoLoc, SELECT the GeoLoc on the Map
Display View or in the Map Objects panel and then CLICK on the Map Object Properties
tab as shown in Figure 2.66.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 2 – GEO DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
Page 2 - 36
SELECT the
GeoLoc in the Map
Object panel or on
the Map View.
CLICK on
the Map
Object
Properties.
tab.
Figure 2.66
The Map Object Properties panel will open and the relevant tab for the selected GeoLoc
will be available.
You can now insert or update the different tabs with the information that you have
available.
Note: Different GeoLoc Types have specific related tabs that need to be
completed. The fields are self explanatory and should be completed as much as
possible. Remember that the more detail the programs have the better the
outcome.
Location Tab
The Location tab is common to all GeoLocs and it is here that the general detail can be
inserted or updated. The details in the Location tab are:
Name: The location name as it was inserted in the Add GeoLoc window is
displayed. This can be changed if required.
Type: The Location Type selected in the Add GeoLoc window is displayed and
this controls what other tabs are made available. This can be changed if
required.
Nation: The nation selected in the Add GeoLoc window is displayed. Remember
that this should be the Nation where the location is and not the nation creating the
GeoLoc. This can be changed if required.
Location Code: This was automatically allocated by the program when the
GeoLoc was created. This can be changed if required, providing that the serial
number is unique.
For the Tutorial we will change the Location Code that was allocated. CLICK on
the Pick button to the right of the Location code field as shown in Figure 2.67.
Figure 2.67
The Change Location Code window as shown in Figure 2.68 will open on the
screen.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 2 – GEO DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
Page 2 - 37
Figure 2.68
In the New Location Code field INSERT the Code of XX5001.
After inserting the new Location Code CLICK on the OK button; however the new
code will be updated after refreshing the display or by closing and re-opening the
GeoMan.
Lat/Long (Latitude/Longitude): The Lat/Long shown positions the GeoLoc
Marker/Icon on the display in the Map Display View. When a new GeoLoc is
created the Lat/Log shown relates to where the Cursor was placed before clicking
with the Mouse in the Map Display View.
In many cases this may be acceptable for your purposes, but if required the
Lat/Long can be changed.
For the Tutorial CHANGE the Lat/Long for LIMETOWN to 461512N0255851W.
Note: The 0 or 1 after the Latitude must be left in or reinserted within the
Lat/Long. This positions the GeoLoc in the correct part of the world.
As you have changed the detail CLICK on the Save (Diskette) button at the top of
the Map Object Properties panel so that the new detail is added to the database.
If the displayed map is refreshed clicking on the Refresh button, the Lat/Long
shown in the Map Object Properties panel will be used to position GeoLoc
Marker/Icon in the Map Display View.
Sometimes, the position does not move to the new coordinates, in this case you
should conduct a query and select the new location. This will be explained later in
this chapter.
UTM: The program automatically inserts the UTM map reference based on the
Lat/Long.
National Reference: Some nations allocated references or nicknames to certain
locations. If this applies to your GeoLoc you can insert the detail in the field.
Province/State: If it applies and the data is available the user can select the
Province/State where the GeoLoc is. The list provided to select from will be based
on the Nation selected in the Location tab.
Modes of Transportation (MOT): The Tick Boxes provided show the MOT that
apply to the location. In simple terms how can you get to and from the location,
the options are self explanatory and you should activate the relevant MOT. This
detail is important when you use the GeoLoc for movements planning.
The options are Air, Sea, Road, IWW (Inland Waterways), Rail and Pipe
(Pipeline)
For the Tutorial ACTIVATE the Tick Boxes for Rail and Road. These show the
MOT that apply to LIMETOWN and represents the logistical links at this GeoLoc.
For LIMETOWN the other boxes should be left deactivated. Each nation will have
its own protocols for how these should be completed.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 2 – GEO DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
Page 2 - 38
Note: You can enter/insert any additional information relevant to the
GeoLoc. Each nation/HQ will have protocols for how this field should be
completed. In a theatre a SOP should fix detail to be inserted.
Now you have had the explanations of the fields and if you have completed the
detail as instructed your Location tab should look like Figure 2.69.
Note: The UTM code is
inserted automatically
based on the Lat/Long.
The appropriate MOT
Tick Boxes activated to
show the Logistical Links.
Do not forget
the 0 or 1.
Figure 2.69
Throughput Tab
The Throughput tab enables you to enter the details relating to what can be handled,
according to the selected MOT. The detail can also relate to arriving and departing traffic
conditions.
To enter the required detail SELECT Throughput tab and CLICK on the New button as
shown in Figure 2.70 and you can SELECT or INSERT the appropriate details into the
appropriate fields.
Figure 2.70
When you have entered the required detail, CLICK on the Apply button and the detail will
be transferred to the List view. This acts as an index of the different handling operations
related to individual MOTs. When all of the required details have been added and
indexed; the data needs to be entered into the database. For the Tutorial we will not
insert details, CLICK on the Save (Diskette) button.
Associated Areas Tab
It is possible to link a GeoLoc with a Drawn Object created in the GeoMan. This will be
useful when the Drawn Object is an area but is not directly part of the GeoLoc itself, for
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 2 – GEO DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
Page 2 - 39
example a Military Camp (the GeoLoc could be linked to a Training Area (the Map
Object).
At this stage of the Tutorial we have not yet seen how to create an area (as a Map
Object) so we can not show how to use the Associated Areas function using the window
shown at Figure 2.71.
Figure 2.71
Therefore, we return to the Associated Areas window later to show the process linking a
GeoLoc to an Area (represented as a Map Object).
Copying an Existing Location
A useful function is the capability to copy an existing location with all the properties
associated with it.
SELECT the location that you want to copy from the Map Objects panel. DRAG AND
DROP on the map. The Copy Location (with the name of location to be copied) dialog
will open. INSERT the new Location Name and CLICK on OK button. In Figure 2.72
there is an example with LIMETOWN being copied.
SELECT
the GeoLoc
to be
copied.
Position the icon
where you want
the copy to be.
Figure 2.72
The new location is now inserted, with all attached properties from the copied location.
Changes such as the Name and Location Type can be carried out in the Map Objects
panel and tabs.
CLICK into the Map Display View screen to close the Map Object Properties panel.
GeoLoc Query Function
There are many reasons why you may want to display the GeoLoc Markers/Icons on the
displayed map in the Map Display View. It could be to assist with a briefing, to create a
network between locations or to measure the distance between locations to name a few.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1 Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 2 – GEO DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
Page 2 - 40
In order to see the GeoLoc markers/icons in the Map Display View you must perform a
query of the GeoLocs data held in the database. There are two ways you can do this:
You can select all of the GeoLocs that apply to the displayed map. This uses a lot of your
computer’s memory and is not recommended unless absolutely necessary.
You can tell the program the area of interest and then use the Specify Query Region
function. Using this function, which is the recommend method to use; the GeoLocs
within the specified area will be accessed and displayed.
For the Tutorial we will use the Specify Query Region function to access and display the
GeoLocs that are in a specific part of BROWNLAND.
If not already open in the Map Display View, use the Map Control panel and ACTIVATE
the Map Project named ATLANTIS.
Then SELECT the map named atl_new.bmp, remember you can select using the Red
Rectangle on the displayed map or by selecting the map from the list in the Map Controls
panel.
With map named atl_new.bmp displayed in the Map Display View; CLICK on the Tools
menu, then SELECT the GeoLocs option as shown in Figure 2.73 and then SELECT the
Specify Query Region option.
Figure 2.73
Alternatively, you can CLICK on the Query GeoLocs by Selecting an Area icon on the
tool bar as shown in Figure 2.74.
CLICK on the Query
GeoLocs by Selecting
an Area button.
Figure 2.74
The Draw Region Or All window as shown in Figure 2.75 will open.
You can Specify
Region By Rectangle.
You can click this button
to Remove All GeoLocs
from View.
You can display All
GeoLocs in Visible
Area.
Figure 2.75
You now have a number of options:
Specify Region By Rectangle option: If this option is activated you can specify the
area of interest on the displayed map and only the GeoLocs within the area will be
activated for display.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 2 – GEO DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
Page 2 - 41
All GeoLocs in Visible Area option: If this option is activated all of the GeoLocs
available and related to the area of the Displayed Map will be activated for display.
Remove All GeoLocs From View option: If this option is activated all of the GeoLocs
already being displayed in the Map Display View will be removed.
Append To Existing GeoLoc Set option: If selected you can append (add) a selection
of GeoLocs to an existing set that are displayed.
For the Tutorial SELECT the Specify Region By Rectangle option.
Once the option has been activated, a dotted square will be added to the cursor and you
will be able to define a region or area of interest. To do this MOVE the Cursor on the
map where you want the area of interest to start, HOLD DOWN the Left Mouse Button
and DRAG until the area of interest is defined.
For the Tutorial SELECT an Area that includes most of the Atlantis Continent as
illustrated in Figure 2.76.
Start of holding
down left
mouse button
Enlarged area
End of holding
down left mouse
button
Figure 2.76
RELEASE the Mouse Button and the Query GeoLocs window as shown in Figure 2.77
will open.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 2 – GEO DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
Page 2 - 42
You can select
All Nations or
make a
selection of
Nations.
You can select
All Types or
Specify a
GeoLoc type.
You can use the
Listing option to
select an
individual or
selection of
locations.
Figure 2.77
You can now select all of the GeoLocs within the area to be displayed on the screen or
may specify the elements required. You will need to practice with the various options
available to select the GeoLocs for display. The options are:

Display the GeoLocs of all of the Nations in the area or choose a particular Nation
or selection of Nations.

Display all of the specified types of GeoLocs within the area or specify the
location types.

Display all or make a selection of location types within the area.

Display specific locations by using the Listing option and then selecting the
location or locations required.

A combination of some or all of the options shown above.
For the Tutorial, we will now select the elements we want.
CLICK the Select All Nations tick box so it is deactivated. Then SELECT the Nations 99
– ZZ BROWNLAND and UK - UNITED KINGDOM by CLICKING on the Nations’ Names
in the Nations List view.
Now DEACTIVATE the Select All Types option and then SELECT the RSOM Sites,
Airports, Maritime Ports and Rail Facilities options as shown in Figure 2.78.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 2 – GEO DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
Page 2 - 43
Figure 2.78
CLICK the OK button and the locations of the selected nations that meet the criteria will
be displayed on the map in the Map Display View as shown in Figure 2.79.
Figure 2.79
In the Map Display View the Markers/Icons for the GeoLocs will be displayed, the display
is based on the selections made in the Query GeoLoc window. In this case, the GeoLocs
for BROWNLAND and UK are activated, even though the UK is not shown to our Map
Display View.
The reason is that GeoLocs are held in the database with their coordinates and attributes
and they will be displayed regardless whether the map is real world geography or
exercise geography.
Care should be taken so that you select only the nations that apply in the Query
GeoLocs window.
To clear the map display of the GeoLocs you have selected, repeat the Specify Query
Region process and SELECT the Remove All GeoLocs from View option. The locations
on the screen will be removed from the display.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 2 – GEO DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
Page 2 - 44
In addition, you can clear individual GeoLocs by clicking on the specific GeoLoc and then
select the Remove from View option from the Label sub-menu.
For the Tutorial REPEAT the Specify Query Region process and this time only SELECT
the Nation named 99 – ZZ BROWNLAND. SELECT all the GeoLocs listed for display.
Find GeoLoc
There may be a time when you have a number of GeoLocs displayed in the Map Display
View and you are looking for a specific location. This could be for a number of reasons,
for example you know that the GeoLoc is within a particular nation, but you do not know
where it is.
The GeoMan has a Find on Map function and when activated it allows you to find a
specific GeoLoc from all those on display and then the location has a flashing star icon
added so that you can identify it easily.
For the Tutorial CLICK on the Tools menu, SELECT the GeoLocs option and then
SELECT the Find on Map option in the side menu.
Or you can CLICK on the Find GeoLocs icon; these options are shown at Figure 2.80
and Figure 2.81.
Activate from
the Menu or the
shortcut button.
Figure 2.80
Figure 2.81
The Find GeoLoc window as shown at Figure 2.82 will open. The locations listed in the
window relates to the GeoLocs that are displayed in the Map Display View.
Figure 2.82
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 2 – GEO DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
Page 2 - 45
You can now search for and Find a specific GeoLoc from those shown in the Map
Display View; you can do this by:

Enter GeoLoc Name: To do this, INSERT the Name in the field and CLICK the
Find GeoLoc button.

Enter Grid: To do this, INSERT the Grid Reference in the field and CLICK the
Find GeoLoc button. The Find Grid Button is only active if a grid was previously
set for the map.

Insert Lat/Long: To do this, INSERT the Lat/Long in the field and CLICK the Find
GeoLoc button.
For the Tutorial we will Find (search) for GEZA AP from the list of locations displayed in
the Map Display View and in the Find GeoLoc window.
ENTER the first two letters of the name in the Enter GeoLoc Name field. The list will
scroll to the GeoLocs starting with those letters. When you see the name of the location
you are searching for you can click on it in the list view.
For the Tutorial CLICK on GEZA AP (ZZ0012) and then CLICK on the Find GeoLoc
button. The Find GeoLoc window will become transparent, can be closed or re-used to
search for another location, and the location will be indicated in the Map Display View.
A yellow flashing star marker will indicate the GeoLoc found as illustrated in Figure 2.83.
Figure 2.83
To discriminate the highlighted location from the other GeoLocs on display you can
Zoom In the area or select a better display Map from the Map Project.
For the Tutorial, ZOOM IN to the area near the Flashing Yellow Star Marker.
Now CLICK on the Flashing Yellow Star Marker and you will be able to use the Select
option to access the Map Object Properties. If you now access the Map Object
Properties panel, you will see the details for the selected location.
You will note that this is different from what we saw for the location we created earlier
(LIMETOWN). Depending on the Location Type, additional tabs and detail becomes
available.
GEZA AP is a Location Type Airport and therefore the additional tabs that give the
properties of an airfield/airbase/airport are displayed as shown in Figure 2.84.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 2 – GEO DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
Page 2 - 46
Figure 2.84
CLICK on the Airport tab, and the window shown in Figure 2.85 will appear. To complete
this window and the others you should complete the boxes as described at Figure 2.85.
INSERT known
Details.
Leave blank if details
are not known.
ACTIVATE the
Yes, No or
Unknown radio
buttons to show
aircraft suitability.
ACTIVATE the
Yes, No or
Unknown radio
button to show
Restrictions.
INSERT known
Details.
These are
important for
ADAMS and EVE
users.
Figure 2.85
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 2 – GEO DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
Page 2 - 47
Infrastructure Data Conventions
There are a number of agreed conventions used to complete the location infrastructure
windows and these are used to ensure that the data input is regulated and there is
common understanding of the information.
The tabs are different and depend on the Location Type selected when creating the
GeoLoc. The information and detail is location type specific but the method of inserting
the data is the same. Where it can be applied, and as you have seen, use is made of
Tick Boxes and Radio Buttons. However, in some places the user has to insert the detail
required. The following is an example of how this is carried out.
For the Tutorial CLICK on the Runways tab and the window in Figure 2.86 will open.
To add new details, CLICK on the New button and COMPLETE the Fields, in this case
they are marked Runway ID, Length, Width, Condition, Surface and WBC as shown in
Figure 2.86.
Index View
Individual
Line Entry
INPUT details
in these boxes.
Figure 2.86
When the detail has been inserted, CLICK on the Apply button. The new details will be
added to the Index View. This provides you with a reference list of the facilities at the
location.
When you select a line in the Index View, the detail shown in the data fields relates to the
highlighted item. CLICK to SELECT a Line in the Index View.
To update any of the detail relating to a particular line, in this case a runway, and with the
data in the fields you can now make the required changes.
Once the update has been completed, CLICK in to the Index View and changed
information will now be displayed and the data placed in the database.
To delete an entry, SELECT the Item in the Index View and then CLICK the Delete
button. The detail for that particular entry will be deleted from the database.
Note: Remember that these methods of completing the windows and therefore
adding, replacing (updating) and deleting entries apply to all the location
infrastructure windows regardless of the type of location.
Deleting a Location
To delete a location from the database, SELECT the GeoLoc in the Map Objects panel
and RIGHT CLICK. Now CLICK on the Delete from Database option as shown in Figure
2.87.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 2 – GEO DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
Page 2 - 48
The Delete
from Database
option.
Figure 2.87
You will be asked to confirm the deletion. If you are sure, CLICK the Yes button.
The location data will now be deleted and the location marker/icon will be removed from
the Map Display View and from the list of GeoLocs in Map Objects panel.
Alternatively, if the GeoLoc marker or icon is displayed in the Map Display View, CLICK
on the location marker/icon, RIGHT CLICK to access the options and then CLICK on the
Delete from Database option. Again, you will be asked to confirm the deletion. If you are
sure, CLICK the Yes button.
The location data will now be deleted and the location indicator will be removed from the
Map Display View and from the list in the Map Objects panel.
Note: The information contained in the GeoLoc Tab of AA coded locations is fixed
and cannot be changed by normal users; any requests for new locations, updates
to existing locations, or the deletion of locations should be referred to the relevant
LOGFAS Project Officer at ACO using the procedure in the Bi-SC GeoLoc SOP.
Multimedia
There are many reasons why the user may want to use the Multimedia functions
provided in the GeoMan. This could be to provide additional information for other users
or to assist with a briefing.
The Multimedia option in the Map Objects panel allows the user to place a trigger icon on
the Map Display View that provides a link to a multimedia file that can be a Video File,
Image File or a Sound File.
The Trigger Icon provides a link to the subject file that must be placed on your computer
or network in advance, and then the process is applied to make use of the function.
The process is a step by step system and to demonstrate it we will link to an Image File,
in this case a photograph.
OPEN the Map Objects panel and then SELECT the type of multimedia to be applied, in
this case the Image Files option as shown in Figure 2.88.
Figure 2.88
HOLD DOWN the Left Mouse button and DRAG the Icon on to the Map Display View
and place it where you want the Trigger Icon to be. In Figure 2.89 we placed it at
GATDULA RH.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 2 – GEO DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
Page 2 - 49
Figure 2.89
Then RELEASE the Mouse Button. The Add Link to Media File dialog as shown at
Figure 2.90 will appear with instructions.
Figure 2.90
After reading the instruction CLICK on the Browse button and then use normal MS
Windows Explorer functions to select the file that is to be linked to, and then SELECT the
File that is to be linked.
After selecting the relevant link file a Marker/Icon will be displayed. Depending on the
media file selected a Video Camera, Camera or Sound Icon will be placed on the Map
Display View and if you place your cursor on the Icon the Name of the link file will be
displayed as illustrated in Figure 2.91.
Figure 2.91
For the Tutorial, we will insert a photograph of the railway station of GATDULA RH. Use
the instructions given earlier and FIND the GeoLoc named GATDULA RH on the Map
Display View.
ACCESS the Map Objects panel and SELECT the Multimedia/Image option. DRAG the
marker/icon on the GeoLoc Marker/Icon for GATDULA RH;
After placing the Image Icon use MS Windows Explorer functions and SELECT the File
named RAILWAYS STATION.JPG. This is in the Mail In Folder.
CLICK on location Marker/Icon for GATDULA RH, the geo and img options are now
displayed as shown at Figure 2.92.
Figure 2.92
CLICK on img option and you will see the choices available to you. SELECT the Open
Media option.
You have now activated the trigger and the file linked to will open in your browser. In this
example you will see the picture of the Railway Station as illustrated at Figure 2.93.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 2 – GEO DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
Page 2 - 50
Figure 2.93
Also the linked file name will be added to the Multimedia options in the Map Objects
panel as shown at Figure 2.94.
Figure 2.94
Note: It is possible to link to a number of different files for the same point on the
display map. The GeoMan will create a list for you to select from.
The Video Files and Sound Files can be added following the same scheme we did for
Image Files. Those having a sound card could try to replicate the process using the
AIRPORT.wav file in the Mail In Folder.
You are here
Starting with GeoMan
Map Controls
Map Objects and Object Properties
GeoLocs
Multimedia
Drawn Objects
Creating a Line
Creating an Area/Region
Networks
Exporting and Importing Data from GeoMan
Report: Forces and Items
Exercises
Drawn Objects
The Drawn Objects functionality allows users to create and display a line or region in the
Map Display View. The relevant data is stored in the database and can be used with any
Map Project and Map on the computer.
Note: These drawn lines and areas are for use on the individual computer and the
Drawn Objects can not be exported; they have to be created in each database.
Therefore exporting the complete database is a way to transmit Drawn Objects. On
a shared database, Drawn Objects are available for all who are connected.
The basic process used to create a Drawn Object is the same for either a line or a region
and the Tutorial will demonstrate both.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 2 – GEO DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
Page 2 - 51
For the Tutorial, ACCESS the Map Project named ATLANTIS and SELECT the Map
named South Atlantis. Use the GeoLocs functions and have the location named
GATDULA RH, displayed in the Map Display View.
Creating a Line
CLICK on the Draw Object button shown in Figure 2.95.
Figure 2.95
The cursor will change and become a Cross (like an aiming mark) and you can now click
along on the map to draw the line required.
For the Tutorial CLICK on a point to the north of GATDULA RH and then create a line by
CLICKING with your mouse button to draw a succession of segments across the
southern part of BROWNLAND as illustrated at Figure 2.96.
Figure 2.96
The line that has been created can now be saved and given a meaningful name.
For the Tutorial RIGHT CLICK and SELECT the Save Drawn Object option as shown in
Figure 2.97.
Figure 2.97
The Save Drawn Object Dialog window will now open as shown in Figure 2.98.
Figure 2.98
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 2 – GEO DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
Page 2 - 52
You can now save the drawn line as an object with a name and its properties.
For the Tutorial we will give this line the following properties:
Field:
SELECT / INSERT:
Enter Drawn Object Short Name
INSERT RC SOUTH
Enter Drawn Object Description
INSERT Regional Command South
You can associate this drawn object to a GeoLoc that is displayed in the Map Display
View.
For the Tutorial we will associate it with GATDULA RH, SELECT GATDULA RH from the
List of Locations as shown in Figure 2.99.
Figure 2.99
The Statistics view is mainly for CORSOM Users and further details are contained in the
CORSOM Tutorial.
After you have made the selections, CLICK on the OK button to save the detail into the
database. The Drawn Object will be added to the Map Objects panel list and if you place
the cursor on any point along the line the GeoMan will display the inserted name and you
can CLICK to open the options dialog as shown at Figure 2.100.
Figure 2.100
The options available similar to GeoLocs and Multimedia Files, they are:

Select option: Activate the Flashing Star Icon on the starting point of the line;

Adjust Object option: Enables the user to make adjustments to the Drawn
Object and then to save the changes. For the Tutorial CLICK on the Adjust Object
option; the object is now displayed in the Map Display View with Nodes (Squares)
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 2 – GEO DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
Page 2 - 53
and Edges (Lines). Now SELECT a Node, HOLD DOWN the left mouse button
and DRAG the Node to the desired point on the map as shown at Figure 2.101.
As you drag the Node you will see the cursor has a Plus (+) sign added, this is an
indicator that you are changing something that already exists.
The Plus (+) sign
added to the
Cursor.
Figure 2.101
When the changes have been made, RIGHT CLICK your mouse and SELECT
the Save Drawn Object option. The adjustment of the drawn line will be saved in
the database.

Delete option: Removes the Drawn Object from Map Display View and deletes
the detail in the database.

Properties option: reopen the Save Drawn Object dialog so you can view and/or
change the details;

Toggle Label Visible option: Show the name of the Drawn Object at the end of
line;

Toggle Exclusion option: The Drawn Object will be shown with a bold red line
added. This option used in CORSOM to impose route restrictions.

View in Google Earth option: Creates a *.kml file and shows object within a
Google Earth display, if you have this function activated.
Creating an Area or Region
The Draw Region function allow you to show an area on the map, this could be a training
area, exclusion zone or assembly area, that is depicted by its size rather than just as a
point object (like a GeoLoc).
For the Tutorial we will draw a Region that will be a training area and we will associate
the region with the GeoLoc named LIMETOWN that was created earlier.
LOCATE and IDENTIFY the GeoLoc named LIMETOWN in the Map Display View.
SELECT the Draw Object icon as shown in Figure 2.95.
CLICK with the mouse button and CREATE an area near to LIMETOWN as illustrated in
Figure 2.102.
As you can see the process is the same as used to draw a Line, to draw an area the start
and end Node are at the same place.
Figure 2.102
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 2 – GEO DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
Page 2 - 54
After creating the area; you will see that the area and perimeter of the area are included,
RIGHT CLICK on the created area and then SELECT the Save Drawn Object option.
INSERT/SELECT the properties for the area drawn. For the Tutorial we will give this
area the following properties:
Field:
SELECT / INSERT:
Enter Drawn Object Short Name
INSERT LIMETOWN TRG AREA
Enter Drawn Object Description
INSERT LIMETOWN Training Area
including Artillery Ranges.
The user can also allocate a specific colour to the area drawn and apply a transparency
level of their choice and it is also possible to link an image to the Overlay. Just use the
buttons and functions provided.
For the Tutorial: PICK the Colour Purple, SELECT image LOGO (from your Mail In
folder), SET Transparency Level at 25% and Pattern to Forward Diagonal.
You can associate this drawn object to a GeoLoc that is displayed in the Map Display
View. For the Tutorial we will associate it with LIMETOWN. SELECT LIMETOWN from
the List in the Associated Area dialog. The Figure 2.103 shows the window with the
details inserted.
Figure 2.103
CLICK the OK button to save the data to the database.
The Area will now be displayed in the Map Display View and the detail added to the
Drawn Objects list in the Map Objects panel as shown at Figure 2.104.
Figure 2.104
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 2 – GEO DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
Page 2 - 55
Once the area has been created it is recommended that the user CHECKS or ADJUSTS
the object if required, for example you may wish to adjust the coordinates of the Drawn
Area. To make adjustments MOVE your cursor anywhere on the area until its name is
displayed and CLICK, then SELECT the Adjust Object option as shown at Figure 2.105.
Figure 2.105
You can now make the required changes. When you have finished CLICK on the OK
button to save the changes in the database.
You can use the options provided by clicking on line entry in the drawn Regions list of the
Map Objects panel. The options are illustrated at Figure 2.106.
Figure 2.106
Note: The Toggle Exclusion function enables CORSOM and SDM users to avoid an
area and prevent transport from using any route through the area. This function is
described in the appropriate sections of the relevant Tutorials.
You are here
Starting with GeoMan
Map Controls
Map Objects and Object Properties
GeoLocs
Multimedia
Drawn Objects
Networks
Loading Existing Networks
Creating New Networks
Show Connected Edges
Connecting Networks
Deleting Networks
Exporting and Importing Data from GeoMan
Report: Forces and Items
Exercises
NETWORKS
The purpose of network is to link two or more GeoLocs. This is done by Mode of
Transportation (MOT) and the design is a succession of edges and/or trails. They have
attached properties to allow time and congestion calculations to be made taking in to
account any restrictions, maximum capacity, grade and other parameters.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 2 – GEO DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
Page 2 - 56
Some LOGFAS functions use transportation networks and trails to perform calculations
for planning and analysis. While the main user of networks and trails is the M&T
community, other LOGFAS specialists, including sustainment planners working with the
Supply Distribution Model (SDM), can use them to assist with their work.
ADAMS, EVE and CORSOM users can work with Networks within the respective
modules: other LOGFAS users can use the GeoMan to access Networks if it assists with
their work.
Loading Existing Networks
To enable EVE, CORSOM and ADAMS Users to view, plan and calculate timings, and
for SDM to model a sustainment plan, they need to use a Network. Networks are
created, managed and loaded in the GeoMan and can then be worked using the Map
Objects panel. Each Network must be loaded to the Map Project and only one network
for each mode of transport (MOT) can be loaded into the Map Project at any time.
To load an existing network, CLICK on Tools on the main menu and then SELECT the
Networks option. From the sub menu SELECT the Load Existing option and the Select
Network to Load window will open. Here all of the Networks that are in the database will
be displayed and these are indexed by Mode of Transport as shown if Figure 2.107.
Figure 2.107
For the Tutorial ACTIVATE the Mode of Transport of Road radio button and SELECT the
TUT_Road: Atlantis Road option in the list view as shown in Figure 2.108.
Figure 2.108
Then CLICK the OK button to load the network to the plan. The program will now load
the networks and set them as the active Network as shown in Figure 2.109.
Note: At the next Figure, the CORSOM Route may not be shown on your computer
depending from the LOGBASE Loaded and Activated. This has no impact on the
tutorial.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 2 – GEO DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
Page 2 - 57
Route: implementation in
CORSOM and useful for EVE
The road network
shown
Figure 2.109
For the Tutorial LOAD all existing tutorial networks, they all have the Prefix TUT_ before
the MOT in the name, so that they can be used later. LOOK at each of them in turn and
you will see that there are some differences in how they look; these will be explained
later.
The Networks can be toggled on and off by CLICKING on the Network Visible/Hidden
button on the main menu as shown in Figure 2.110.
CLICK on the Network
Visible/Hidden button.
Figure 2.110
Alternatively, in the Map Objects panel SELECT or DESELECT the relevant Tick Box in
the Networks list the as shown in Figure 2.111.
SELECT or
DESELECT the
Tick Box
Figure 2.111
If a Road Route was created (how this is done is described in the CORSOM Tutorial), it
appears in the tree of the Road Network, so that the user can see and work with the
individual parts of the network. For the Tutorial, DESELECT the Network named
CORSOM_TUT_1.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 2 – GEO DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
Page 2 - 58
Create New Networks
There are two main methods available to allow the user to build a network, depending on
the data that is available. We will examine these in sequence.
The first one is valid only for rail and road networks and is mainly used by the M&T Users
of LOGFAS: The GeoMan is able to extract the data used to display road and rail
infrastructure when creating maps that are shown in the Map Display View. The data
used are the *.bin (Binary) files located in the LOGFAS6/Common/DCW/rail and
DCW/roads folders.
The second method is for the user to manually build the detail of the required network on
an existing map.
New Network from Map Data
To build a Network from Map Data you need:
First, a map for the area that applies to the network being created. The required data will
be extracted from the roads/rail layer for the selected area.
For the Tutorial we will create a road network in BROWNLAND SOUTH EAST. SELECT
the map South Atlantis in the Atlantis Map Project.
Second, you need an empty network activated ready to be populated, or an existing
network activated. The network will have extracted data added automatically.
For the Tutorial we will populate a new and therefore empty network. CLICK on the
Tools menu, then SELECT the Networks option and from the sub menu SELECT the
Create option as shown in Figure 2.112.
SELECT the
Create option.
Figure 2.112
This will open the Select Network from DB window, this is similar to the window used
when loading an existing network but it will not display any detail. For the Tutorial
SELECT the Mode of Transport as Road and INSERT the Network Name to Save as
TUT_Test; INSERT some detail for the Network Description. The screen should look
similar to Figure 2.113 and then CLICK the OK button.
Figure 2.113
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 2 – GEO DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
Page 2 - 59
The TUT_Test network now exists in database. Now we must load it to the Map Project
so that it can be activated. In the Map Objects panel, RIGHT CLICK on Networks option
to SELECT the Load Existing Network option as shown in Figure 2.114.
Figure 2.114
The Select Network from DB dialog will reopen. SELECT Road button and TUT_Test
network. CLICK on OK button. The Network named TUT_Test is now available and
activated as shown in Figure 2.115.
Figure 2.115
It is now possible to populate our new network. From the main menu SELECT the
Tools/Networks/Build from Map Data option as shown in Figure 2.116.
Figure 2.116
Once the option has been activated, a dotted square will be added to the cursor and you
will be able to define a region or area of interest where the network will be created. To do
this MOVE the Cursor on to the displayed map where you want the area of interest to
start, HOLD DOWN the Left Mouse Button and then DRAG your Mouse until the area of
interest is defined.
For the Tutorial from map South Atlantis in Atlantis Map Project, ENLARGE an area as
illustrated in Figure 2.117.
Figure 2.117
A dialog with a time warning will open as shown in Figure 2.118.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 2 – GEO DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
Page 2 - 60
Figure 2.118
CLICK on Yes or OK button (the options will depend on your computer configuration).
The GeoMan will now extract the required data and create the network. When this is
completed you will see the created network as shown in Figure 2.119.
Figure 2.119
You can now work with the network as already described.
Creating a Network Manually
The process for creating a network manually is the same regardless of the MOT
requirements. However, it should be noted that the correct selection of the MOT is
important because the M&T Modules use this to apply parameters when calculating
travel time (distance divided by speed equals time).
For the Tutorial we will build an (Inland Water Ways (IWW) network in BROWNLAND
that links GEET BEACH and DUNSTON RH.
If not already activated, OPEN the GeoMan and ACTIVATE the Map Project named
ATLANTIS. Use the Query GeoLocs functions to locate the required locations that will be
linked by our IWW network. SELECT and DISPLAY the Locations named GEET BEACH
and DUNSTON RH on the map South Atlantis. I f you need or want to, ENLARGE the
map to have a good view of the environment as shown at Figure 2.120.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 2 – GEO DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
Page 2 - 61
Figure 2.120
To create a New Network you have to add a new network to the database and then use
the Draw or Repair Network function to insert the detail required.
CLICK on the Tools menu; SELECT the Networks and Create New options. The Select
Network from DB window will open. To create the New Network in the database you
must:

Allocate the correct MOT: SELECT the MOT as IWW by activating the Radio
Button.

Insert a Network Name to Save in the database for the network: INSERT the
Name as TRG_Waterway.

Insert a Network Description: INSERT the Network Description as For Training.
When you have completed these processes and inserted the required detail the Select
Network from Database window should look as shown in Figure 2.121.
Figure 2.121
CLICK on OK button. The Select Network from Database window will close, the detail
will be added to the database, the network will be activated and you can now add the
detail required.
To add the detail of the network CLICK on the Draw or Repair Network icon as shown at
Figure 2.122.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 2 – GEO DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
Page 2 - 62
Figure 2.122
We can now insert the detail to show the route that the network is to follow. Move the
Cursor onto the Map Display View, you will see that it becomes a cross mark. Now you
can click along the route for the network.
Start from GEET BEACH CLICK to create a series of points that will draw a Line to
DUNSTON RH passing through the lake as shown at Figure 2.123.
Figure 2.123
When you have added the points for the network, PLACE the Cursor on the drawn line
and RIGHT CLICK. The sub-menu dialog shown at Figure 2.124 will appear with a
number of options, SELECT the Save Drawn Object option.
Figure 2.124
The Save As… dialog as shown in Figure 2.125 will open. This has two options for saving
the network and we will first have a look at the Add As Edges Option. CLICK on the Add
As Edges button.
Figure 2.125
The created network is now saved to the database and is displayed in the Map Display
View with all edges visible.
Note: The properties and modifications that can be applied to the edges will be
detailed later.
As you can see at Figure 2.126 the saved network has a number of elements:
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 2 – GEO DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
Page 2 - 63
An
Edge.
Access Edge
Properties
A Node.
Figure 2.126
The elements are:

The Nodes: These are the Black Edged boxes and they are the points on the
displayed map where the cursor was clicked to create the network.

The Edge, This is the connecting White Line that is displayed between two nodes.

Access Edge Properties: These are the Red Edged boxes and allow you to
activate an individual edge and allocate attributes to the edge using the Object
Properties panel.
If required you can add more edges to the network until it is the way that you want it to
be. For the Tutorial we will add an additional IWW route between the displayed locations.
CLICK again on the Draw or Repair Network icon. Start from GEET BEACH and CLICK
a Series of Points to draw a line to DUNSTON RH passing to the North of the previous
network as shown at Figure 2.127. Remember that this is illustrative and does not have
to be exactly the same as shown in the Figure.
Fig 2.127
When you have established the route to be followed, PLACE the Cursor on the drawn
line and RIGHT CLICK; The sub-menu dialog shown at Figure 2.127 will appear with a
number of options, SELECT the Save Drawn Object option.
The Save As … dialog will open. For this part of the Tutorial SELECT the Add As Trail
option and CLICK the button.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 2 – GEO DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
Page 2 - 64
As you can see illustrated in Figure 2.128, the network as it was created is now visible
but there is only one edge. CLICK on the Red Bordered-White Square in the centre of
the edge; the Edge will be activated and will be highlighted.
RIGHT CLICK with the cursor over the red line and you will see the different options
available.
One of these is to Enter Data (Selected Edge). If you did this you would notice that while
the displayed Edge shows the network segment as a single, straight line that the
distance displayed shows the total following the trail, the point that were clicked.
Figure 2.128
We will examine the options one by one; this will also give us the opportunity to redesign
the North Branch of this IWW Network.

Delete Edge option: This will delete the selected Edge but there is no warning,
the program will complete the deletion of the selected edge.

Redraw Edge option: This option allows you to move a node to a new position
on the displayed map as shown at Figure 2.129.
CLICK on the
node and drag
the cursor.
Figure 2.129
When you have repositioned the node, RIGHT CLICK and SELECT the Save
Drawn Object option. The node will reposition and the edges linked to it will be
realigned.

Split Selected Edge option: This option allows you to slit and existing edge into
two parts and is used to add further detail if required into a smaller part of the
network. SELECT the Split Selected Edge option and as shown at Figure 2.130
the selected edge is now split in to two edges.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 2 – GEO DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
Page 2 - 65
Figure 2.130

Enter Data (Selected Edge) option: This option allows you to access the data
for the selected edge and then you can insert attributes that will be applied to it.
SELECT the Enter Data (Selected Edge) option. CLICK on the Object Properties
panel. As you can see in Figure 2.131 there is an example of the required data
entered for the edge that is an EU Class 3 IWW. CLICKING on Direction B will
give the same properties for both ways.
Note: When activating the Selected Edge Direction A is indicated by the
Arrow Head.
Figure 2.131
As you can see there are a number of options for entering the required
restrictions that will apply to the Selected Edge, these include:

Regular Throughput (convoys option): This allows you to set a regular
level of throughput. Mainly used by CORSOM to assist in the control of
traffic. The level set can assist in the analysis of the flow of traffic using the
Regular Throughput as the average or mean.
Note: Although the word convoys is used the principle can be applied
to all MOT and Asset Types.

Maximum Throughput (convoys per hour): This allows you to set a
maximum level of throughput. Mainly used by CORSOM to assist in the
control of traffic. The level set can assist in the analysis of the flow of traffic
using the Maximum Throughput to show where this is being exceeded.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
CHAPTER 2 – GEO DATA
Page 2 - 66
Note: Although the word convoys is used the principle can be applied
to all MOT and Asset Types.

Max. Cargoheight (CM): This option is used mainly when there are tunnels
or other obstacles that cause a restriction to the traffic flow. It allows the
movement planners to find a route along the network where the restriction
does not apply.
Note: Mainly applied to the MOTs of Road, Rail and IWW the
expression of Cargoheight refers to equipment itself and when loaded
to each other then the overall height is used.

Max. Cargowidth (CM): This option is used mainly when there are tunnels
or other obstacles that cause a restriction to the traffic flow. It allows the
movement planners to find a route along the network where the restriction
does not apply.
Note: Mainly applied to the MOTs of Road, Rail and IWW the
expression Cargowidth refers to equipment itself and when loaded to
each other then the overall width is used.

Max. Cargolength (CM): This option is used mainly when there are bends
or other obstacles that cause a restriction to the traffic flow. It allows the
movement planners to find a route along the network where the restriction
does not apply.
Note: Mainly applied to the MOT of Road the expression Cargolength
refers to equipment itself and when loaded to each other then the
overall length is used.

Max. Cargoweight (Tons): This option is used mainly when there are
bridges or other obstacles, such as weak road surfaces, that cause a
restriction to the traffic flow. It allows the movement planners to find a route
along the network where the restriction does not apply.
Note: Mainly applied to the MOTs of Road and Rail the expression
Cargoweight refers to equipment itself and when loaded to each other
then the overall weight is used.

Max. VehiclesSpeed (Km per hour): This option allows the movements
planner to impose a speed limit to the edge and this will be applied to
movement components (overriding the parameters) or to assets (overriding
the asset speed) if it is less then the normal speed setting.
Note: If the speed setting of the component or asset is less than the
Max. Vehiclespeed then the lower setting will be applied.

Est. Traveltime (hours): This option allows the movements planner to set a
n estimated amount of time to travel the distance represented by the Edge
and this will be applied to movement components (overriding the speed
shown in the parameters) or to assets (overriding the asset speed) if it is
less then what could be achieved.
Note: If the speed setting of the component or asset means that the
time taken will be more than the Est. Traveltime then the worst case
timing will be applied.

Restrictions option: This option allows the user to insert any other
restriction that may apply. These are for information only and are not
enforced by the programs.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 2 – GEO DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
Page 2 - 67

Number of Lanes/Tracks option: This option allows the user to show the
number of lanes for road movement and tracks for rail movement to assist
with traffic flow calculations. This option is manly used by CORSOM.

Max. Grade (percentage): This option is mainly used by CORSOM to
impose additional (and normally temporary) restrictions against the normal
conditions and is applied to the Max. Cargoheight, Max. Cargowidth, Max.
Cargolength and Max. Cargoweight restrictions. This means that the
baseline setting do not have to be adjusted.

Traffic Throughput (percentage): This option is mainly used by CORSOM
to impose additional (and normally temporary) restrictions against the
normal conditions and is applied to the Regular Throughput and Maximum
Throughput restrictions. This means that the baseline setting do not have to
be adjusted.
These setting can be applied and they can be different for each direction. However, if
they are equal in both directions they can be applied easily by clicking on the Click to
copy to other direction button.
For the next section SELECT the Map named SOUTH ATLANTIS.bmp.
Show Connected Edges
As you have seen creating networks is easy regardless if this is done using map data or
manually. But it is possible that you could create a number of edges that look right but
there is a disconnection between them.
Then as you plan using the Network, if there is a disconnection it will cause delays and
affect the timings between locations. Remember that these disconnections may not be
visible on the displayed map in the Map Display View.
Using the Show Connected Edges functionality allows you to check the Networks by
showing all the connected edges of a Network and this will save you time and effect.
To check the connections within a network it must be visible in the Map Display View;
you need to activate the Network you want to check by using the Map Objects panel and
activating the Network required.
For the Tutorial ACCESS the Map Objects panel and SELECT the Network named
TUT_Test (Road). With the network selected RIGHT CLICK and from the sub menu
dialog SELECT the Show Connected Edges option as shown in Figure 2.132.
SELECT the
Show Connected
Edges option.
Figure 2.132
The Network will now be displayed in the Map Display View. You can see that each part
of the disconnected network are displayed in different colours as shown in Figure 2.133.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 2 – GEO DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
Page 2 - 68
Figure 2.133
The disconnection may be for any number of reasons, the main ones are that there was
no single Network available, that your network was a combining of other work, or an
edge was not created during the building of the Network.
In the network shown for this part of the Tutorial, naturally the islands are disconnected,
because there are no bridges.
Connecting Networks
If a connecting edge is missing, you can draw in the missing edge and save it to the
Network. We will do it for the Tutorial.
ZOOM IN to the affected area of the network as indicated in Figure 2.134. Remember
that the colours for the network parts could be different on your screen.
Network
Disconnection.
Figure 2.134
To connect a Network an edge needs to be drawn between the two points that are
causing the disconnection.
Note: With the Network active and displayed in the Map Display View it is
recommended that you use the Zoom In function so that the disconnection can be
clearly seen.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 2 – GEO DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
Page 2 - 69
CLICK on the Draw or Repair Network icon, as before the cursor will now change to a
crosshair. Move it on to the Node that you want to use as the staring point to repair the
network. This will normally be the nearest one to the disconnection between the
networks
Now CLICK on it and then you can CLICK along the route you want to use to create the
required edges until the networks are connected. As the new edges are created a red
line will appear, as shown in Figure 2.135.
Then CLICK to
draw the route
till the node to
be connected
CLICK first on
this node
Figure 2.135
When you have the required edges displayed in the Map Display View, RIGHT CLICK
and in the sub-menu dialog that opens SELECT the Save Drawn Object option. For the
Tutorial SELECT the Add As Edges option. The network should now be connected; to
prove that, SELECT the Show Connected Edges option again and the network should
appear in a single colour as at Figure 2.136.
.Figure 2.136
If the line that has been drawn is not correct SELECT the Undo option and start the
process again.
Copy/Merge Networks
The LOGFAS introduces capability of merging networks that are the same MOT. This is
useful when you have two or more networks and want to combine them and use the
overall network. For example, when you have a DDP that is using different areas, each
with separate networks, by combining them the time/distance calculations will use all of
the details in the global network.
Remember that our generic scenario is to deploy a force from BROWNLAND to
BLUELAND. For the Tutorial we will merge the two networks, these are named
TUT_Road in Blueland and TUT_Test in Brownland. All calculations in the DDP, whether
in ADAMS, EVE or CORSOM will be done using the merged network.
If we did not merge the networks and because in the modules you can only have one
activated network for each MOT we would have wrong results for time/distance
calculations. Part or the calculations would be achieved using the distances and
restrictions with the selected network and the other part will be done using the arc
distance where there is no network.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 2 – GEO DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
Page 2 - 70
CLICK on the Tools menu and SELECT the Networks and Copy/Merge options as
shown at Figure 2.137.
Figure 2.137
This will open the Merge or Copy Dialog as shown at Figure 2.138.
Figure 2.138
For the Tutorial we will merge TUT_ROAD into TUT_Test network.
CLICK on the OK button and the Select Network dialog will open. This shown at Figure
2.139.
Figure 2.139
Now we can select the first Network, SELECT the Network named TUT_ROAD in the list
and then CLICK on the OK button. This will open the Merge or Copy Dialog as shown at
Figure 2.140.
Figure 2.140
CLICK on the OK button and the Select Network window will reopen; now SELECT the
Network named TUT_Test. The program will confirm the selections in the Network Merge
dialog as shown at Figure 2.141.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 2 – GEO DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
Page 2 - 71
Figure 2.141
CLICK on the OK button and the program will complete the merge of data. When the
process is completed the Network Merge dialog as shown at Figure 2.142 will open to
confirm that the work is completed.
Figure 2.142
CLICK on the OK button to close the dialog. To show the result of merge, in the Map
Display View, DISPLAY the Map named GENERAL ATLANTIS and then LOAD the
Network named TUT_ROAD and as shown in Figure 2.143, both networks will be
displayed.
Figure 2.143
Deleting Networks
To Delete a Network from the database, CLICK the Tools main menu, SELECT the
Networks option and from the sub menu SELECT the Delete option as shown in Figure
2.144.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 2 – GEO DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
Page 2 - 72
SELECT
Delete
option.
Figure 2.144
This will open the Select Network to Delete window. For the Tutorial SELECT the Mode
of Transport as Road and then SELECT the Network named TUT_Test as shown in
Figure 2.145.
Figure 2.145
Note: You will receive no warnings asking you if you are sure you want to delete
this network. Once you have clicked OK it will be deleted and removed from the
database.
For the Tutorial CLICK on the OK button and the selected network will be deleted from
the database.
Another way to delete the Network is by using the Map Objects panel. CLICK on the
Map Objects panel and then SELECT the Network you want to delete. With the Network
set as Active RIGHT CLICK and from the sub menu and SELECT the Delete option.
You are here
Starting with GeoMan
Map Controls
Map Objects and Object Properties
Exporting and Importing Data from GeoMan
Exporting GeoLocs
Importing GeoLocs
Importing Networks
Exporting Networks
Analyse Networks
Report: Forces and Items
Exercises
EXPORTING AND IMPORTING DATA FROM GEOMAN
The creation of GeoLocs and Networks, and the population of the related data fields
takes time and effort; to minimise the impact of this the GeoLocs and Network data can
be shared and managed so that the data is created once, then shared and used any
number of times. Therefore, GeoLoc and Network data (Map Objects and Map Object
Properties) that have created can be exported and imported and exchanged between
databases.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 2 – GEO DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
Page 2 - 73
Note: For AA Coded GeoLocs the main data (Location Tab) is controlled and can
not be changed by individual users. The Bi-SC GeoLoc SOP gives the detail on
how such changes can be requested. It should also be noted that for these
locations the detail in the other tabs may be changed but is not exportable
between databases.
Exporting GeoLocs
To export GeoLocs CLICK on the Data menu and SELECT the Export GeoLocs option
as shown in Figure 2.146.
SELECT the
Export GeoLocs
option.
Figure 2.146
The Exporting GeoLocs To File window as shown in Figure 2.147 will open.
CLICK the Retrieve
Data from LOGBASE
button.
The Export
Location
options row.
After retrieving the data you
can Save the result to disk.
Figure 2.147
The exporting of GeoLoc data requires you to select the locations to be exported. You
have the following options:

All GeoLocs in Selected Nation option: This will export all locations of the
selected nation, regardless of who created them.

GeoLocs with Selected GeoCode option: This uses the two-letter prefix, which
was referred to when creating locations and when discussing AA codes. This
indicates the nation, headquarters, or organisation responsible for entering the
data. If this option is used for exporting, the required code is selected from the
combo box provided and then all locations with the selected prefix will be
exported.

Export all GeoLocs Visible on Map option: This can be a selection of specific
locations. You can then select the required group for exporting. This option
provides you with greater control on the locations being exported and allows a
mixture of locations of different Location Codes and/or Nations.
For the Tutorial we will export all GeoLocs that are within the nation of BROWNLAND.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 2 – GEO DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
Page 2 - 74
CLICK the All GeoLocs in Selected Nation radio button and then SELECT the Nation
named 099: ZZ BROWNLAND in the combo box.
After making the selections CLICK the Retrieve Data From LOGBASE button. The
details of the records loaded from the database are now displayed in the Exporting
GeoLocs To File window as illustrated in Figure 2.148.
Figure 2.148
Now CLICK on the Save to File button.
Normal MS Windows functionality will access the Save As window and you will be
prompted to SELECT the Save in location on your computer or network and to NAME
the File. All GeoLoc files are saved in Extensible Markup Language (*.xml) format; the
file extension is added automatically.
For the Tutorial EXPORT the selected GeoLocs to your Mail Out folder with the name
GEOLOCS_099BROWNLAND.
Importing GeoLocs
To demonstrate how a GeoLoc can be imported into the database, use the functions
provided to FIND the GeoLoc named LIMETOWN and DELETE the Location from the
database. This process is illustrated at Figure 2.149.
Figure 2.149
For the Tutorial we will restore the location named LIMETOWN that was deleted by
importing the file containing the BROWNLAND GeoLocs data, which includes
LIMETOWN.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 2 – GEO DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
Page 2 - 75
To import a GeoLoc file CLICK the Data menu and SELECT the Import GeoLocs option
as shown in Figure 2.150.
Figure 2.150
Normal MS Windows functionality will access the Open window and you can SELECT
the File to import. For the Tutorial SELECT the File named GeoLocs_099Brownland from
your Mail Out folder as illustrated in Figure 2.151.
SELECT the Mail
Out folder.
SELECT the File
to import from
your Mail Out
folder.
Figure 2.151
When you have selected the file for import CLICK on the Open button, the Importing
GeoLocs From File window will open and this shows the data to be imported as shown in
Figure 2.152.
CLICK to
begin the
Import.
Figure 2.152
At this stage the program is checking the status of the data within the file and if there are
no problems you can proceed.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 2 – GEO DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
Page 2 - 76
Note: If there is a failure with any of the data you should abort the import and refer
the problem to the person who sent you the file. Do not import data if it has the
potential to corrupt your database.
To proceed and for the Tutorial CLICK on the Import to LogBase button.
When the import process has been completed and the data has been Inserted, Updated
and Loaded to LogBase the status columns will be completed as illustrated in Figure
2.153.
Shows our
GeoLoc
(Limetown)
record Inserted
Import
finished
CLICK the
Commit button.
Figure 2.153
You can save the result of import by clicking on Save Log button.
To complete the import process CLICK on the Commit button and the Importing
GeoLocs From File window will close. The program will now automatically refresh and
the imported locations will be added to the database.
If you now query the database and display the GeoLoc named LIMETOWN, you will see
that the location and related data has now been added to database.
Importing Networks
In LOGFAS Version 6.1, Networks are Imported or Exported as a *.XML file. To import a
Network into the database, CLICK on the Data option on the main menu and SELECT
the Import Network option as shown in Figure 2.154.
CLICK the Data
and then SELECT
the Import Network
options.
Figure 2.154
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 2 – GEO DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
Page 2 - 77
For the Tutorial ACCESS the Mail In folder and SELECT the file named NGP_56.XML
and then CLICK on the Open button.
This will open the Importing Networks From File window and the information relating to
the Network to be imported will be displayed as at Figure 2.155.
Figure 2.155
At this stage the program is checking the status of the data within the file and if there are
no problems you can proceed.
Note: If there is a failure with any of the data you should abort the import and refer
the problem to the person who sent you the file. Do not import data if it has the
potential to corrupt your database.
To complete the Import process CLICK on Import to LogBase button.
Once the imported is completed, you should see a green and white tick button and words
Network Insert Completed will appear at the bottom of the Import Activity window as
shown in Figure 2.156.
Network
Insertion
Completed.
Figure 2.156
If you wish, you can import more than one Network while the Import Networks from File
window is open. To do this CLICK on the Open Import File button and select another
Network to Import.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 2 – GEO DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
Page 2 - 78
Once you have finished importing all of the required Networks, CLICK on the Close
Button.
Note: You will now have to load the newly imported network in the database to
your Map Project see and work with it.
Exporting Networks
To Export a Network CLICK on Data on the main menu then SELECT the Export
Network option as shown in Figure 2.157.
SELECT the
Export Network
option.
Figure 2.157
The Export Networks to File window will now open and you would select the Network to
export. For the Tutorial SELECT the Pipe option as the Mode of Transport and then
SELECT the Network named Gaz_56 Main LPG Line as shown at Figure 2.158.
Figure 2.158
CLICK on the Retrieve Data button and all data for this Network will now be loaded into
the window.
CLICK on the Save To File button this will open the Save As window and you can save
the *.XML file.
For the Tutorial use normal MS Windows conventions to Save the file in the Mail Out
Folder and INSERT the File name as TRG_PIPELINE_Export.
After setting the Save as location, CLICK on the Save button to complete the process;
The data will be exported and window will be closed and.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 2 – GEO DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
Page 2 - 79
Analyse Networks
With the previous paragraphs we dealt with the networks, creating, exporting and
importing. When you have a network loaded to the Map Project we can conduct an
analysis of any network.
The Analyse functionality allows us to get information more accurate that the information
we can get from Distance Tool option. The Analyse Functionality that can be used with
Networks is mainly used by CORSOM.
For the Tutorial CLICK on the Analyse menu and you can select one of the options as
shown in Figure 2.159.
Figure 2.159
The Analyse options are:

Direct Distance option: This options calculates and displays the distance
between the selected points in the Map Display View following the arc, this is the
direct straight line distance.

Minimising Distance option: This option calculates and displays the distance
between the selected points in the Map Display View using a combination of
itineraries in the network to minimise the distance, even if a CORSOM route
exists.
At Figure 2.160 there is an example of result using the Minimising Distance
option.
Figure 2.160
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 2 – GEO DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
Page 2 - 80

Minimising Times option: This calculate and displays the distance between the
selected points in the Map Display View using a combination of itineraries in the
network taking in account the speed restrictions applied to the edges to minimise
the travelling time, even if a CORSOM route exists.
You are here
Starting with GeoMan
Map Controls
Map Objects and Object Properties
Exporting and Importing Data from GeoMan
Reports in GeoMan: Forces and Items
Exercises
REPORTS IN GEOMAN
LOGFAS Vs 6.1 reintroduces the functionality that allows you to view details and to
obtain reports and charts from the Force Profile and Holdings files that were created
using the LDM. The functions also allow the user to take the Map and other displayed
objects that is displayed in the Map Display View of the GeoMan for use in his own
reports and presentations.
How to manipulate the Report and Charts is described in detail in the Reports Chapter of
this Tutorial.
In the GeoMan the Forces Menu options are shown at Figure 2.161 and the Short-cut
Icons are shown at Figure 2.162.
Figure 2.161
Figure 2.162
The options and outcomes are the same regardless of the method used to activate them.
For the Tutorial ACTIVATE the Map Project named ATLANTIS and then SELECT the
Map named ATL_New for display in the Map Display View.
Select Profile from Database.
This option allows the user to load a Force Profile and Holdings file created in the LDM
into the GeoMan and the detail is displayed on the active Map in the Map Display View.
For the Tutorial CLICK on the Select Profile from database icon as shown at Figure
2.163.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 2 – GEO DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
Page 2 - 81
Figure 2.163
This will open the Select a Force Profile window and you can select any of force profile
existing in the active database as shown in Figure 2.164.
Figure 2.164
For the Tutorial SELECT the Force Profile named 099BROWN and CLICK on the OK
button. The units are now displayed with Coloured Markers: Red for Navy and Marines,
Yellow for Air Force and Green for Land forces.
You can change the look of the Force icon display by using the Preference window. At
Figure 2.165, we have selected to use the AAP 6a Symbols and Display Unit Flag
options. How to set the GeoLoc display is explained later in the Section.
Figure 2.165
Passing the cursor over the unit icon will display the name of the unit as shown at Figure
2.166.
Figure 2.166
NOTE: Display of units and their subordinates are generally merged when at same
location. You can differentiate the units by dragging one after one at another
location.
You can remove the displayed Forces from the Map Display View by using the Toggle
Units Visible icon shown in Figure 2.167. This button will hide/restore the display of units
on Map.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 2 – GEO DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
Page 2 - 82
Figure 2.167
We will now make a selection of individual or multiple forces from the Force Profile that
has been loaded to GeoMan.
For the Tutorial we will RE-SELECT the Force Profile named 099BROWN as explained
previously.
Then in Map Objects panel we will SELECT the Forces by Profile option. All the Forces
within the Force Profile selected are listed, but remember we only want a selection.
UNCHECK the Tick Box for 099BROWN as shown at Figure 2.168.
UNCHECK the
Tick Box for 099
BROWN.
Figure 2.168
Now we can activate the Individual or Selection of Forces that we want to work with.
CHECK the Tick Box for Brownland Regt; the unit is now displayed on the active map in
the Map Display View.
It is possible to obtain additional information from within the Map Object Panel. As an
example RIGHT CLICK on the Force named Brownland Regt in the Forces by Profile list
and then SELECT the Unit Data option as shown in Figure 2.169.
Figure 2.169
The Unit Data window as shown in Figure 2.170 will open on the screen and you will
access information related to the selected unit.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 2 – GEO DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
Page 2 - 83
Information
List.
Figure 2.170
The Display Information options allow you to see the details relating to the selected force
by selecting the appropriate Radio Button, these are:

Subordinate Units option: This option is only available if the selected force has
subordinate units. If selected the list view will show the name/names of the
Subordinate Units.

Unit Equipment option: This option is only available if the selected force has
items allocated to the Holdings in the Force Profile. If selected the list view will
show basic details of the items and Actual Onhand (Quantity) of the selected unit
(this does not include any amounts for the subordinate forces).

Unit Troops option: This option is only available if the selected force has
personnel, with a RIC beginning with the letter Y, allocated to the Holdings in the
Force Profile. If selected the list view will show basic details of the Personnel and
Actual Onhand (Quantity) of the selected unit (this does not include any amounts
for the subordinate forces).
It should be noted that the detail displayed in the List View can be copied from the using
normal MS Windows functions to Copy (Control+V or Right Click Copy) and Paste
(Control+C or Right Click Paste)) in any of the MS Office programs.
For the Tutorial CLICK on OK button to close the window.
Selection of Units
Select Units By Region
This option allows the user to control the display of forces in the Map Display View by
Selecting an area. CLICK on the Select Units by Region Icon as shown at Figure 2.171.
Select Units by
Region button.
Figure 2.171
After activating the Select Units by Region button the cursor will change to and a white
dotted square is attached to the cursor, this indicates that you can define an area of
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 2 – GEO DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
Page 2 - 84
interest. For the Tutorial we will define an area in the North of BROWNLAND as shown
at Figure 2.172.
These are the
locations that
apply in the
Force Profile.
Figure 2.172
CLICK and DRAG to define the area or region of interest. Now only the Forces that are
located in the defined area will be displayed in the Map Display View and in the Map
Objects Panel the Forces By Profile list will be updated and the appropriate Force Tick
Boxes will be activated as shown at Figure 2.173.
Note: Any reports and charts extracted from the GeoMan are based on the Forces
that are displayed in the Map Display View.
Figure 2.173
Remember that you can use the Forces By Profile options in the Map Object Panel to
select an individual unit or specific selection of units for display as well.
Select Units by Holdings
This function allows you to display the Forces in the Map Display View that hold certain
items or capabilities.
Note: This function requires that the Items have the correct or most appropriate
RIC allocated to the Item Properties window.
For the Tutorial CLICK on the Units by Holdings button as shown at Figure 2.174.
Select Units by
Holdings button.
Figure 2.174
This will open the Select Reportable Item Code window and you can select the required
capability by individual RIC, selection of RICs and this can be at any of the levels in the
RIC Tree.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 2 – GEO DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
Page 2 - 85
For the Tutorial we will search the units that are equipped with helicopters. EXPAND the
RIC Tree and SELECT the RIC ROTARY WING [HB] [EA] option as shown at Figure
2.175. To activate your selection you can CLICK on the Green Cross to select an
individual RIC or DOUBLE CLICK on the RIC Tree to select a group of RICs.
For the Tutorial DOUBLE CLICK on the RIC ROTARY WING [HB] [EA] option.
CLICK on the Green Cross
to select the individual RICs.
Figure 2.175
The program will interrogate the Force Profile and the Forces that hold the required
capability are displayed in the Map Display View and are activated in the Forces By
Profile list in the Map Object Panel as shown at Figure 2.176.
Figure 2.176
Display Units at
This option allow you to display the units in the Map display View at there Homebase
Locations, as defined in the Force Properties window, or at their Current Location, this is
normally the a Location where you have moved the unit to on the Map in the Map Display
View.
For the Tutorial, In the Map Display View SELECT the Map named ATL_New. In the
Map Objects Panel DESELECT any GeoLocs that are View and then REFRESH the
Map Display View, this will clear the display.
In the Map Object Panel SELECT the Forces By Profile by activating the Tick Box so that
all of the Forces in the Force Profile are active.
In Forces By Profile list DESELECT the Tick Box for 099BROWN and then SELECT the
Tick Box for 1 Recce Bn. This force will now be displayed in the Map Display View.
In the Map Display View PLACE the Cursor on the Unit Icon and you should see the Unit
Name displayed as shown in Figure 2.177.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 2 – GEO DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
Page 2 - 86
Figure 2.177
We will now move the Force to a new location on the Map.
HOLD DOWN the ALT Key on your keyboard and the CLICK AND HOLD DOWN the
LEFT Mouse button, and then DRAG the Force to a location on the Map.
When you have placed the Force Icon at the required location, RELEASE the Mouse
Button and the ALT Key.
A Dialog will open on the screen asking if the new coordinates are Temporary or a New
Home Base. The options are:

Temporary option: This option will display the Force at the new location on the
Map Display. But, the data relating to the Home Base will not be changed and
when the GeoMan Map Display View is refreshed, or closed and re-opened, the
Force will return to the original location.
In addition, you can PLACE the cursor on the new location HOLD DOWN the
CTRL Key on the keyboard and CLICK on the LEFT Mouse button and the unit
will return the original Home Base.

New Home Base option: If this option is used the Home Base of the Force will
be updated and the new location will be added to the Force Properties window.
Then Selecting either the Current Location or Home Base from the Display Units at menu
option as shown in Figure 2.178, the Force will be shown in the Map Display View at
Current Location or Home Base location.
Figure 2.178
Set Unit Symbols
This function allows the user to change between different display options or to set how
the Force Symbol is shown in Map Display View.
For the Tutorial CLICK on the Tools menu and SELECT the Map Preferences option as
shown in Figure 2.179.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 2 – GEO DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
Page 2 - 87
Figure 2.179
The Map Preferences window as shown in Figure 2.180 will open.
Figure 2.180
In the GeoLoc Display Section you can see the options available to you. These are self
explanatory so we will now go into the detail here.
Selecting one of GeoLoc Display options will change the Forces Symbol in the Map
Display View.
After making your selection, you will need to refresh your Map Display View if the
symbols do not change automatically.
CLICK on the OK button to close the Map Preferences window.
Item Inventories Chart
This function allows you to create a chart that shows quantities of Items, by location
name and by RIC.
Note: This function requires that the Items have the correct or most appropriate
RIC allocated in the Item Properties window.
For the Tutorial we will produce a chart showing the amounts and location of the
Helicopters in the Force Profile.
CLICK on the Item Inventories Chart short cut button as shown at Figure 2.181
Figure 2.181
This will open the Select Reportable Item Code window and you can select the required
capability by individual RIC, selection of RICs and this can be at any of the levels in the
RIC Tree.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 2 – GEO DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
Page 2 - 88
For the Tutorial we will search the units that are equipped with helicopters. EXPAND the
RIC Tree and SELECT the RIC ROTARY WING [HB] [EA] option as shown at Figure
2.182. To activate your selection you can CLICK on the Green Cross to select an
individual RIC or DOUBLE CLICK on the RIC Tree to select a group of RICs.
For the Tutorial DOUBLE CLICK on the RIC ROTARY WING [HB] [EA] option.
CLICK on the Green Cross
to select the individual RICs.
Figure 2.182
This produce the quantities of Selected Items at Selected Location chart as shown at
Figure 2.183.
Figure 2.183
If you RIGHT CLICK in the Chart Display you have a number of options that control how
the chart appears and you are also able to Copy or Save the image and use it in other
applications.
CLICK on the Close button.
Item Inventories Report
This functionality allows the user to produce a report that displays the inventories of the
Forces in a text format that is printable and exportable.
For the Tutorial we will use the functionality to the 009 BROWN Force Profile and for all
items that are Small Arms.
The user can create reports for All Items or for Individual or Groups of Items.
Note: This function requires that the Items have the correct or most appropriate
RIC allocated in the Item Properties window.
CLICK on the Item Inventories Report option in the tool bar and then SELECT the Single
RIC option as shown in Figure 2.184.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 2 – GEO DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
Page 2 - 89
Figure 2.184
This will open the Select Reportable Item Code window and you can select the required
capability by individual RIC, selection of RICs and this can be at any of the levels in the
RIC Tree.
For the Tutorial we will select the RICs in that are shown as SMALL ARM RIC [BA] [EA].
SELECT the SMALL ARM RIC [BA] [EA] as shown at Figure 2.185. To activate your
selection you can CLICK on the Green Cross to select an individual RIC or DOUBLE
CLICK on the RIC Tree to select a group of RICs.
For the Tutorial DOUBLE CLICK on the RIC named SMALL ARM RIC [BA] [EA].
CLICK on the Green Cross
to select the individual RICs.
Figure 2.185
This will open the Enter Title Information window where you can customise the
Classification, Report Title and Add a Report Comment shown in Figure 2.186.
Figure 2.186
After making you selections of the required changes CLICK on the OK button and the
GeoMan will generate a report as illustrated in Figure 2.187.
Figure 2.187
The report is displayed as a Print Preview and is ready to be exported or printed when
clicking on the Export report button shown at Figure 2.188.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 2 – GEO DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
Page 2 - 90
Figure 2.188
Further information on how these reports can be Printed or Exported in other formats is
given in the Reports Chapter of this Tutorial.
You are here
Starting with GeoMan
Map Controls
Map Objects and Object Properties
Exporting and Importing Data from GeoMan
Reports in GeoMan: Forces and Items
Exercises
EXERCISES
Exercise 2 - 1: Map Projects, Maps, GeoLocs, Drawn Object
a. CREATE a new Map Project with the name EXERCISE; use the ATLANTIS
exercise Map Data set as your option when prompted.
b. CREATE two Maps of your own choosing within the EXERCISE Map Project.
Make one of them the default map that can always be displayed by right clicking.
c. CREATE a new Location for the nation 099: ZZ BROWNLAND with a XX Prefix
Code – NAME the Location as LINKTOWN RAILHEAD (National Reference
BRLR) and INSERT the coordinates Lat/Lon - 470429N0271225W
Use the information in the following paragraph to COMPLETE the Location Data.
Use the relevant tick and text boxes to reflect the detail describes herein after;
This multiple function station has good links to the main road system and can
handle all types of traffic, including containers.
There are 6 side- and 4 end-loading ramps.
Electricity and water are available and catering facilities can be provided with 48
hours notice.
There is a large storage facility: 1000 m2 covered.
d. EXPORT the GeoLocs of the Nation 099: ZZ BROWNLAND including the data of
the GeoLoc you have just created.
e. DELETE the Location named LINKTOWN from the database.
f.
IMPORT the GeoLocs file that that you exported at Serial 5.
g. DISPLAY in the Map Display View the location named LINKTOWN RAILHEAD.
h. ZOOM IN to the area around LINKTOWN RAILHEAD. CREATE a drawn object
(Region) around LINKTOWN that will be named SALSA SPECIAL AREA.
Add a description for the Drawn Object and then SET a Colour, Image, Pattern
and Transparency of your own choosing. Complete the Actual size (M2) and
Actual # Vehicles as shown below:
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 2 – GEO DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
Page 2 - 91
i.
ASSOCIATE the Drawn Object (Region) to LINKTOWN RAILHEAD.
j.
EXPERIMENT the various options available using the Right Click with the cursor
placed on the Drawn object.
k. VERIFY that the area is associated with LINKTOWN in GeoLoc properties.
l.
DELETE the SALSA SPECIAL AREA.
Exercise 2 - 2 Networks
a. Using the Map Project named EXERCISE, BUILD from Map data a road
network in the North of Atlantis, using the map Manghalour. Name it
TRG_ROAD_01.
b. CONDUCT a GeoLoc Query and Analyse the distances between different
locations.
c. COMPARE the distances with the Arc (Straight Line) Distances that would be
seen without a network.
d. DELETE the network.
Exercise 2 - 3 Map Projects, Maps, GeoLocs
a. CREATE a new Map Project; NAME it using Your Own Family or Surname;
SELECT the Real World geography option when prompted.
b. CREATE at least one Map of your own choosing, for example, your own nation
and hometown area. Make use of the different features available to give as
much information as possible.
c. CREATE at least four GeoLocs relevant to the maps you created at Serial b.
These could be your home or other place of interest to you.
d. EXPORT the GeoLocs of the Nation containing the new GeoLocs.
e. DELETE the Locations you have created.
f.
IMPORT the GeoLocs file that that you exported at Serial e. PERFORM a
Specify GeoLocs Query and FIND the Locations you have just imported.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 2 – GEO DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
Page 2 - 92
This Page Intentionally Blank
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
CHAPTER 3 – INTRODUCING EVE
Page 3 - 1
Chapter 3 – Introducing EVE
You are here
General
Introduction to EVE
M&T Related Documentation
The Movements Process
The Movements Planning Process
The Movement Execution Process
Flow Execution Plans
EVE in the MCC Environment
Standard Operating Procedures (SOPs)
Introduction to Templates
Chapter 3 – Conclusion
General
This Chapter introduces the concepts of the EVE application and gives guidance on the
establishment of Standard Operating Procedures (SOPs).
Introduction to EVE
Originally developed to support NATO Operations in Afghanistan, EVE was developed in
2003 during the deployment and rotation of forces assigned to the International Security
Assistance Force (ISAF). For this mission the emphasis was on air movements to, from
and within the theatre. However, the system has now been expanded to include all
modes of transportation (MOT).
EVE provides the Movements Community at all levels with the means to have visibility of
the execution of the movements plan. The program gives a quick and easy way to
monitor and/or control the movements flow by allowing relevant Movements Staff and
their Movement Control Centres (MCC) to review, prioritise and deconflict the flow of the
forces to, in and out the theatre and to pass the information to all interested parties.
It is possible too to start using EVE from a Detailed Deployment Plan (DDP) produced by
the Allied Deployment and Movements System ADAMS or one that has been accessed
using the Coalition Reception Onwards Movement System (CORSOM).
The DDP is created by the individual nations; these national DDPs can then be
combined at the Strategic or Operational HQs Movement Control Centres to create a
Multi-National DDP (MNDDP). The information and data regarding the individual or
National movements plan are passed by the means of DDPs; these can be exported
from national LOGBASE and imported into an EVE shared database.
However, due to the complexity of ADAMS it would be difficult to use the program to
reflect individual changes as the planned movements were executed. Therefore, the
EVE program provides an easy tool to monitor movements, request for transportation
and allocation of resources.
Related Documents
To full understand the concepts behind the EVE software, a good knowledge of NATO
doctrine is required. These include the Allied Movements Publications (AMov P1 (A)2(A), 3(A), and 5) and the Allied Joint Publication AJP4-5, relating to Logistics,
Movements and Transportation (M&T) issues; the relevance will depend on the type of
operation being undertaken and the movement and transport restrictions that have to be
applied.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
CHAPTER 3 – INTRODUCING EVE
Page 3 - 2
In general EVE conforms to the Glossary and definitions set in AAP 6; some specific
wordings are explained at Chapter 11 of this Tutorial. As far as possible, forms used in
EVE are built based on the established STANAGs (e.g. STANAG 2155 for Road
Movements Request) or documents internationally recognised by mode of transportation.
The EVE Manager should have a good working knowledge about the existing SOPs,
instructions and guidance related to the M&T area used at the HQs and Theatre. It
would also be useful to be familiar with the existing EVE installation: network, database
and workstation set-up that is in place.
You are here
General
Introduction to EVE
M&T Related Documentation
The Movements Process
The Movements Planning Process
The Movement Execution Process
Flow Execution Plans
EVE in the MCC Environment
Standard Operating Procedures (SOPs)
Introduction to Templates
Chapter 3 – Conclusion
The Movements Process
The Movements Planning Process
Any movement planning process starts with the individual forces or units that are to be
moved; they are split into movement components (movement parties). To move from the
Homebase to the Final Destination, they have lines of communication (LOCs) inserted
and timings allocated; which are based on predetermined averages depending on the
mode of transportation (MOT) being used.
Finally, individual assets are allocated to the planned movements; at this stage, the
characteristics of the assigned asset (speed, capacity etc) are applied to give an
overview of what could be achieved.
The movement planning process takes the force / unit from its Homebase to Final
Destination along a series of LOCs and through a series of critical points. These points
include Ports of Embarkation (POE), Ports of Debarkation (POD), Marshalling Areas
(MA), Staging Areas (SA) and Storage Sites.
A simple illustration of the deployment planning process is shown at Figure 3.1.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 3 – INTRODUCING EVE
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
Page 3 - 3
Figure 3.1
The Movement Execution Process
As the deployment plan is executed, there is a requirement to provide all interested
parties with updated information that reflects what is actually taking place. For example,
this could include changes to asset allocation, timings and routing information.
There is also a requirement to allow information to be passed regarding movements that
may be related to but not directly part of the movements plan; this could include intratheatre movements.
In addition, the need to review, prioritise and deconflict the movement into and within a
theatre; is particularly important when the level of traffic into an individual or critical
location; for example, a Port of Debarkation (POD) requires control or is restricted.
It should be noted that although EVE was primarily developed to support the control and
visibility of forces arriving into a theatre of operations at specific PODs, it could be used
equally for any location, including Staging Areas (SAs), Marshalling Areas (MAs) and
Final Destinations (FDs).
Therefore, the module could also be used by a nation to monitor the internal movement
before the strategic part of the deployment, such as from Homebases to Ports of
Embarkation (POE).
Illustrated at Figure 3.2 is an overview of the airlift control and information points that was
established for the ISAF Operation.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 3 – INTRODUCING EVE
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
Page 3 - 4
Figure 3.2
Flow Execution Plans (FEPs)
The requirement for controlling and having visibility of the planned asset movements at
specific locations led to the EVE Module being developed. This spreadsheet-based
system allows the user to make changes to individual movements that reflect the
operating reality without the need to make any changes to the original DDP. The
program also allows this information to be passed or displayed quickly and easily.
EVE FEPs can be created using a DDP as the source or, alternatively, they can be
generated directly in EVE; both methods will be explained hereinafter. A DDP when
imported becomes a FEP.
Note: If not renamed, all modifications to a FEP created from a DDP will be
inserted in DDP that can quickly lead to confusion if the user returns to the
original DDP.
A simplified illustration of the FEP DDP based process is shown in Figure 3.3.
Figure 3.3
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 3 – INTRODUCING EVE
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
Page 3 - 5
As the execution of the movement plan progresses, the updated FEP can be passed
between the locations that have an interest using the EVE export and import functions, or
the information can be shared on a server based system, such as the NS WAN or via the
Internet (EVE on Web) if the security of communications and classification allows this.
An illustration of the Execution Phase Information Flow is shown at Figure 3.4.
Figure 3.4
The illustration at Figure 3.4 demonstrates how all of the interested parties who are
concerned with the movements plan are able to make use of a LOGBASE Shared
Database that has the EVE Database loaded. This facilitates the submission of the
Asset Schedule Requests and Movement Slot Allocations among the Nations, NSEs,
Force HQs and the relevant controlling HQs.
In addition, updated information regarding the planned and executed movements can be
distributed quickly and to all those concerned at the same time. This information and
data can be assessed at all levels in report form.
You are here
General
Introduction to EVE
M&T Related Documentation
The Movements Process
The Movements Planning Process
The Movement Execution Process
Flow Execution Plans
EVE in the MCC Environment
Standard Operating Procedures (SOPs)
Introduction to Templates
Chapter 3 – Conclusion
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 3 – INTRODUCING EVE
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
Page 3 - 6
EVE in the MCC Environment
The advantage of EVE is that it can be set-up to suit any individual Movement Control
Centre (MCC) situation. The range of options that are provided allow the program to be
used to monitor current operations as well as planning for the future, all utilising the
same FEP. This utilisation is achieved by installing the EVE database onto a server that
all of the interested HQs/Locations can access, although the program could be installed
onto standalone computers and the information passed using exported files.
If required individual MOT cells can be established, each one will deal with a specific
area or areas. There could also be current operations and future planning elements.
Each of these is able to use the various search filters for locations, dates and MOT in
order to conduct their work.
It is recognised that different areas of the MCC has its own needs. Therefore, individual
cells can have filters and display options set to meet their requirements; these could be
dependent on the particular functions they are working with, including MOT, location,
dates and movement status. While each of these sets of options can be viewed by each
workstation, the operations display can be set to show the information required in a
separate way.
The flow of information in and out of the MCC EVE system may require some degree of
control to ensure that the details are passed quickly to the correct section.
As well as the planned movements, if the Flow Execution Plan (FEP) was created from a
DDP, additional movement requests that can be in a preset format (or Template) will
need to be managed as they are received. The requests then need to be passed to the
relevant section for action.
Although we will discuss templates in more detail later, it is worth mentioning at this
stage that the Movement Request Forms are MS Excel based and this allows the
necessary detail to be extracted directly into the EVE Movements Views.
Correspondingly, when all of the required action has been completed, the confirmation
parts of the form can also be completed automatically direct from the program and these
can then be sent to the requestor.
Figure 3.5 gives an example of a possible MCC Set-up where all of the cells discussed
are included.
Figure 3.5
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 3 – INTRODUCING EVE
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
Page 3 - 7
Figure 3.5 also shows how the information flow can be controlled into and out of the
MCC. Of course, how any individual MCC is set-up is dependant on many factors and
this Figure is for illustrative purposes only.
Another advantage is presented by the use of projectors (beamers) to show the status of
the movement execution displayed directly from the program onto screens.
A photograph of such a display that was used to support the ISAF Air Movements
operation is shown at Figure 3.6. Note that the display situation has now been changed,
but the photograph show both the old Operations Boards and the Projected display.
Figure 3.6
As you can observe in Figure 3.6, the background and text colour options that can be
applied to individual cells, entire rows or columns can be set so that critical information or
situations can be quickly identified and the necessary corrective action then taken.
You are here
General
Introduction to EVE
M&T Related Documentation
The Movements Process
The Movements Planning Process
The Movement Execution Process
Flow Execution Plans
EVE in the MCC Environment
Standard Operating Procedures (SOPs)
Introduction to Templates
Chapter 3 – Conclusion
Standing Operating Procedures (SOPs)
It would be impossible, and we would not presume to do so, to provide a standard set of
SOPs for EVE, since the requirements at any given location will depend on many factors.
However, it is recommended that as a minimum the SOPs that are put into place should
control the areas in the following table:
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
CHAPTER 3 – INTRODUCING EVE
Page 3 - 8
Topic:
Comments:
Setting up EVE.
This SOP should control the column and display setting for
the location and which templates are to be applied. If
required, a separate SOP may be required to inform
operators how they may customise their individual settings so
that it does not interfere with the overall requirements
Preparing and
Distributing
Information:
This SOP should establish the procedure for preparing and
distributing information such as the Flow Table and the
Future Plan data that is based on the FEP. The SOP should
also state the times for the distribution of the information, the
distribution list and method of distribution to be used.
Handling Incoming
Information:
This SOP should establish the procedure for handling
incoming information sent to MCC. There may be a need for
separate SOPs for different types of information, such as
Notices to Airmen (NOTAM) and Actual Times.
Handling Request
Forms for Cargo, Pax,
Vehicles and
Movement:
This SOP should establish the procedure for handling a new
cargo, Pax, vehicle or movement requests. It should include
who is responsible for carrying out the procedure as well as
how the forms are to be managed. For movement requests,
if a PPR protocol is to be applied a separate SOP may be
required.
Handling changes to
submitted Cargo, Pax,
Vehicles and
Movement Requests.
This SOP should establish the procedure for dealing with a
change to a submitted cargo, Pax and movement request. A
separate SOP may be required for the handling of
cancellations.
Contact Information
and Set-up:
This SOP should establish the procedure for creating and
controlling contact information within the organisation. This
could include how and when to set-up individual E-Mail
profiles for the computer/network.
EVE on Web:
In conjunction with the J6 section, a SOP should establish list
of approved users, approved requesters and how to get
access to the EVE WEB Server. Possible connections
through secured channel over remains a solely responsibility
of J6 cells involved.
Geographic Data:
A SOP should standardise how to introduce new geographic
locations, update the networks and the responsibilities about
this topic for all people working with the shared database.
Note: These SOPs should clarify and standardise the various responsibilities, how
the revisions/cancellation should be prepared and transmitted so that there is no
confusion and to avoid double booking an individual movement.
There are some examples of SOPs that have been created for various locations; these
are in the Example SOPs folder in the C:\Program Files\NATO\LOGFAS\DATA\ISAF
Templates folder of your installation and can be found on LOGNET.
Introduction to Templates
In EVE it is possible to establish pre-set formats for viewing, importing and exporting
some data and information from the database using dedicated EVE functionalities based
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
CHAPTER 3 – INTRODUCING EVE
Page 3 - 9
on Microsoft Excel program (or compatible software). In EVE, these are referred to as
Templates.
These templates will be setup and managed by the Site EVE Manager to control two
main areas:


Displays of data with predetermined column selections filtered and/or sorted by:
o
An individual location or group of locations.
o
A single date or range of dates.
o
The MOT for the location(s), and colour coding of the text or background, by
Individual or groups of cells.
o
Details related to the Assets and Missions.
Template Formats: Templates are linked within EVE in the Preferences window and
we will deal with these in Chapter 4. The following is a brief description of each of
the main Template Formats:
Template Type:
Purpose:
ATO Feeder:
This template format allows the operator to export relevant
ATO elements request to the NATO-wide Integrated
Command and Control (ICC) Software for Air Operations.
Cargo:
This template should also be distributed to all individuals or
forces that are required to submit cargo requests to the
controlling location or HQ.
EVE Update:
This template allows the specification of a selection of columns
that should be included in the EVE Update Files, created by
the program.
Flowtable:
With this option, you export Slot Allocation for a specified
location and date to an Excel file. This is related to the
management of a specific location.
Gantt Export:
This template format allows exporting a Gantt chart using MS
Excel. It shows the activity diagram for a location as bars that
start at the arrival time, and end at the departure time. The
view can be used to visualise the flow plan, and to see how
many assets are present at the location at each time.
HTML Template:
This template format allows the specification of the data
selection that should be displayed when accessed with any
browser.
Movement
Request Forms:
This template should be distributed to all individuals or forces
that are required to submit movement requests to the
controlling location or HQ. It allows import/export request and
answer of any type of movement. The format of the Movement
Request Form will depend on the requirements of the
individual Controlling Location or HQ and the Mode of
Transportation (MOT) involved. The forms are created in MS
Excel format and provide a method of passing the required
details in a standard way.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
CHAPTER 3 – INTRODUCING EVE
Page 3 - 10
Template Type:
Purpose:
PAX:
This template format to submit passenger requests to the
controlling location or HQ. The format of the Pax Form will
depend on the requirements of the individual Controlling
Location or HQ and the Mode of Transportation (MOT)
involved. The forms are created in MS Excel format and
provide a method of passing the required details in a standard
way.
Prior Permission
Required - PPR
Request
Template:
Some airfields or locations are identified as Prior Permission
Required (PPR) airfields or locations. These can be looked up
in the Aeronautical Information Publication (AIP) and/or via
NOTAM. Failure to obtain a PPR will result in denial of landing
clearance as well as possible future denial of all PPR
requests.
These templates are essential to the management of EVE at any individual location and
for any given Operational situation.
Chapter 3 Conclusion
The environment of the tasks to be achieved within the Movement & Transports functions
is now set. Details on the HOW TO, will be explained in the next Chapters so that the
EVE User can prepare and manage the working configuration in his area of
responsibility. We will deal in turn with: the Preferences that can be implemented, the
Basic Data that can be prepared, and the different Views available and Reports.
This completes Chapter 3.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
EVE PREFERENCES
Page 4 - 1
Chapter 4 – EVE Preferences
You are here
General
Setting Preferences
Introduction
Accessing EVE
How to Login
Preparing EVE for Tutorial
Preferences Introduction
Preferences Windows
View Tab
Column Preferences
Pick Columns
Column Order
Save and Import
Insert a column layout name
Implement Another Layout
Contact Preference
Location Preferences
Miscellaneous Preferences
Print Preferences
Cargo Preferences
Template Preferences
ATO Feeder (for Air Task Order)
Cargo
EVE Update
Flow Table (Output)
Gantt Export
Generic Request Form (GRF)
HTML Template
Import Flowtable
Movement Request Form (MRF)
PAX
PPR Request
Time Table or Terminal Flow Plan
XML
Exporting and Importing Template Settings
Export
Import
Setting a Preferred Template
Exercises - 4
General
This Chapter describes the procedures for setting-up the EVE module and your defined
preferences, or User Defined Defaults.
When working with a shared database, an EVE Manager will have normally set your
configuration. SOPs may also have given guidance on how to configure your working
environment and where the necessary files to be downloaded are located.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
EVE PREFERENCES
Page 4 - 2
When working independently or with others who do not have access to EVE, the software
provides tools for exchanging data, using Excel templates that must be constructed within
the EVE installation. This can be done using the various EVE Preferences.
This tutorial will teach you how to configure the EVE module to enable EVE users to work:

With organisations that do not have EVE installed;

With other users of EVE not connected to the same LOGBASE;

Between individual operators who share the same database.
This Chapter details the procedures for setting-up the EVE module and the required
preferences, or User Defined Defaults.
All the data and file formats used in this Chapter can be found in the EVE Mail In folder
provided on the DVD and on LOGNET.
Setting Preferences
Introduction
The EVE Module allows you to pre-set a number of preferences within the application.
These preferences create user-defined filters within the database, which speed up access
times and create short cuts for the more commonly used functions.
The settings and templates that need to be applied to the EVE installations at any given
location are a management issue. These control mechanisms should be covered in local
SOPs. The required setting and templates should be installed on the workstation and the
EVE users should become familiar with them.
Two points need consideration:
 Some settings are written in the computer registry; this means that if a user moves
from one computer to another, the preferences set will have to be reinstated. This is
normally achieved by importing a saved setting or reselecting the options.
 Some data is written directly in the database and is accessible to all users sharing
the database. EVE users should be aware of the dangers of the cascade effect on a
relational database. Any changes should be made
o
Only in accordance with established SOPs dealing with data and database
management issues;
o
Or with prior agreement of the local EVE Manager.
In this Tutorial we will deal mainly with the client to server configuration. Different
configurations for standalone set-ups will be described by a note.
In order to set the preferences, you need to open the EVE application.
Accessing EVE
The EVE Module can be started from your Start/Programs menu or by DOUBLE
CLICKING on the Eve icon, which is the short cut button folder on your desktop. See
Figure 4.1.
Figure 4.1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
EVE PREFERENCES
Page 4 - 3
How to Login
The EVE Module uses the LOGFAS database model common to all LOGFAS
applications. The database has a built-in security and auditing system for tracking
changes to the database, linked directly to the Computer ID that identifies the user in the
PostgresSQL database.
As a result, there is no need for a specific LOGFAS password. CLICK on the EVE icon
and the module will start and the EVE window will appear on your screen. The menu and
tool bar arrangement is shown in Figure 4.2.
Figure 4.2
It may be wise at this stage to check which version of the EVE application is loaded to
your computer, also which version of the AA GeoLocs, AA Assets and RIC Version
have been loaded to the active database.
To check the installed application version on the computer and the version number for
centrally controlled data sets, CLICK the Help menu and SELECT the About EVE
option. Alternatively, you can CLICK on the Question Mark symbol button.
The About EVE window, as shown in Figure 4.3 will appear on the screen.
Indicates which
updates are
loaded to the
database.
EVE application
Version and Build
Number are
shown.
Your Workstation and ID
Figure 4.3
At the time of writing this tutorial, the EVE application is version 6.1 Build 64 and the
current updates that should be applied are:
AA GeoLocs
-
AA Geo Update Number 12
AA Asset Types
-
AA Assets 5
RIC Version
-
RIC Version 12.0
You should check with the EVE Manager/ Site System Administrator to ensure you have
the latest versions and updates loaded to the current database. Updates can be
downloaded from the LOGNET site.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
EVE PREFERENCES
Page 4 - 4
Note: The instructions required to upgrade the installation and update the
controlled data sets are given in the EVE Installation and Upgrading Guide.
CLICK the OK button and the About EVE window will close.
Preparing EVE for Tutorial
The first task in configuring EVE is setting Preferences. We will then examine the Basic
Data.
To see the impact of the Preferences and Templates on the EVE Flowplan windows and
dialog boxes, we will need to have a Flow Execution Plan (FEP) open or ready to be open,
previously checked.
For the Tutorial CLICK on the File menu and the Open FEP option. When the Open FEP
window has been accessed, SELECT the DDP named EVE PREFERENCES as shown at
Figure 4.4 and then CLICK on the OK button.
Figure 4.4
The Movement Management View for the EVE PREFERENCES FEP will open. IDENTIFY
the two buttons Reset Criteria and Show Movements at the right of the window. Do not
worry about the different details at this stage. CLICK the Reset Criteria and the Show
Movements buttons.
CLICK the Reset
Criteria and the
Show Movements
buttons.
Figure 4.4
VERIFY that the movements are shown and examine the different information in the
windows. Do not manipulate the different buttons or selections available, we will
discover them one by one during the tutorial.
SELECT the File and Close Window option from the bar menu to close the FEP.
Preferences Introduction
EVE can be customised for individual needs by setting the User Preferences. Some data
are stored in the Windows Registry, making Preferences specific for each workstation.
However, Templates can be loaded from EVE Preference File (*.epf) files. Also some
User Preferences such as Column Settings can be loaded from specific files exported
after creation, as we will see.
Particular care should be taken when selecting Preferences as they will impact on the
views and dialog boxes that you will be using. In short:
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1 Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
EVE PREFERENCES
Page 4 - 5
If you are assigned to a permanent EVE position that has well established SOPs, you
should use the given preferences. The EVE Manager should give you guidance on which
preferences and relative data to import.
In the absence of formal guidance, you can apply the default settings and modify them as
you wish, saving your own preferences and configuration. Alternatively, you can import
the files from the EVE Mail In folder and then modify them as you require.
At this stage we will just discuss the Preferences options available to you and what needs
to be set to support the Tutorial. The details of the settings applied at an individual
location will be given by or set by the EVE Manager or contained within the SOPs.
To set the preferences; CLICK on the File menu and then SELECT the Preferences
option, this process is illustrated in Figure 4.6 Alternatively, the F9 button on the keyboard
can be used.
SELECT the
Preferences
option.
Figure 4.6
When selected, the Preferences Properties window as shown in Figure 4.7 will appear on
the screen.
Note: When assigned to an EVE user position, you may find that the Preferences
were set by your EVE Manager or by the previous EVE User. In this case, you may
find that different settings are in place. Do not change them without the consent of
your EVE Manager or according to your local SOPs.
A quick test is to select templates tab and see if there is data in the templates windows.
If you need to change settings, as we will do in the Tutorial the process is as follows:
For the Tutorial CLICK on the Reset All Preferences to Eve Default Settings option. When
the EVE warning dialog appears on the screen, CLICK on the Yes button to accept the
reset. A dialog will confirm the action and the Preferences window will close.
We will now show how to set the Preferences. CLICK on the F9 button on your keyboard.
Preferences Windows
View Tab
The first tab and default when the Preferences Properties window is accessed is the View
Window; this is shown at Figure 4.7.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
EVE PREFERENCES
Page 4 - 6
CLICK here to
reset the
Preferences.
Figure 4.7
The View window allows you to:

Select the EVE Default Flowplan View.
As illustrated, there are seven options available. The type of Flowplan View that is
selected will depend on the requirements of your work or your personal preference.
The options will be discussed in detail later in the Tutorial.
For this part of the Tutorial SELECT the Classic View option.
 Set the Default Terminal Flowplan Day setting. Remember that the Terminal
Flowplan View is based on your selection at the beginning of this section. Depending
on which Flowplan View you select, you can control how the date is displayed within
the view. The options are:
o Calendar day – Displays the dates in Day: Month: Year format; however, the
actual format will depend on your computer settings.
o
ATO day – Displays the date relative to the assigned ATO date.
We will discuss the difference for these options later. For the Tutorial SELECT the
Calendar Day option.
 Select the Default date format setting. This controls how the current date is
displayed in the various Flowplan Views and in some of the Windows. The options
are:
o Textual: Dates are displayed as Day: Month: Year format; the actual format will
depend on your computer settings.
o
Julian date: Displays the number of days counting from 1st January.
For the Tutorial SELECT the Textual option.
 Select the Location Text: This allows you to select how the Location Text should
be displayed in the appropriate cells of the Flowplan views. Your selection will depend
on your knowledge of the options provided and the requirements of where you are
working. The options are:
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1 Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
EVE PREFERENCES
Page 4 - 7
o LOGFAS Code: The code and serial number for the location will be displayed,
as it is held in the database.
o Location Name: The location name as given in the GeoLoc Name field will be
displayed.
o ICAO Code: For air installations only, the four-letter International Civil Aviation
Organization code will be displayed.
o According [to] MOT: The format as set in the Location Output Format options
will be displayed.
For the Tutorial SELECT the According [to] MOT option. By using this selection you
can specify different formats for each MOT used in the EVE Views. The choices are
the same as the Location Text options described above. For the Tutorial SELECT the
Location name option for each of the possible location types.
 Select how to Calculate MOG according to: This allows you to select how the
Maximum on Ground (MOG) should be calculated. This part of EVE is linked to the
location data we discussed in Chapter 2. Remember that within the Update GeoLoc
Window it was possible to state the number of assets that could be at the location at
any one time. If this data has been entered EVE will use it to give you a visual
indicator in the selected Flowplan View when the limits are exceeded.
The MOG calculation can be based on:
o Wide (Body Aircraft)/Narrow Body (Aircraft)/Ship/Train/Road Asset – Based on
the Asset Type.
o
Civil/Military (Aircraft) Based on the Mission Type – Available for Air Only.
o Civil/Military (Aircraft) and Wide (Body Aircraft)/Narrow body (Aircraft) –
Available for Air Only.
For the Tutorial SELECT the Wide/Narrow Body/Ship/Train/Road Asset based on
asset type option.
 Indicate Length and Weight unit for items. This controls how such data is
displayed in the EVE Views and can be changed at any time. Your choice will not
impact on any LOGFAS module; it is only a generic conversion tool for the EVE View
windows.
Figure 4.8
For the Tutorial SELECT the centimetre (metric) and kilogram (metric) options.
Column Preferences
CLICK on the Columns tab and the Column window as shown in Figure 4.9 will be
displayed.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
EVE PREFERENCES
Page 4 - 8
CLICK on
the
Columns
tab.
Figure 4.9
This window is a “Save What You Can See” function that allows the users to create a
number of column display options and then to be able to switch from one to the other
when the FEP is open.
To demonstrate the functionality we will use the EVE PREFERENCES DDP we opened at
the start of this Chapter.
CLICK on the File menu and the Open FEP option. When the Open FEP window has
been accessed, SELECT the plan named EVE TUT 1 and DDP named EVE
PREFERENCES as shown at Figure 4.10 and CLICK on the OK button.
Figure 4.10
The Movement Management View for EVE PREFERENCES Flowplan will open.
IDENTIFY the two buttons Reset Criteria and Show Movements at the right of the
windows. Do not worry about the different details at this stage. CLICK the Reset Criteria
and the Show Movements buttons as indicated in Figure 4.11.
Today is
automatically
set.
CLICK the Reset
Criteria and the
Show Movements
buttons.
Figure 4.11
It is possible to display up to 102 different columns in the various EVE views. In EVE it is
possible to Pick the Columns in order to display only those which are required. It is also
possible to change the Column Order and to impose a Data Sort Order.
After selecting and arranging the required columns to be displayed, the selection can be
given a meaningful name. This name is displayed in the Columns window of the
Preferences. The named selection can be picked to ensure that the selected columns are
used each time they are needed. For the Tutorial we will create a Columns Selection
relating to Sea Movement.
Column settings can either be applied by individual users or loaded from saved files
provided by the EVE Manager.
CLICK on the OK button to close the Preferences window.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
EVE PREFERENCES
Page 4 - 9
Pick Columns
This function allows the user to display only those columns that are required for the
current task. Each EVE View has its own selection available and we will use the Classic
View options to show how the make the choices. The same principles apply to all of the
EVE Views.
For the Tutorial CLICK on the Pick Columns button as shown at Figure 4.12.
Figure 4.12
This will open the Please Select the columns that you want to use window as shown at
Figure 4.13.
Note: The options available will depend on which EVE view was accessed before
clicking on the Pick Columns button.
Figure 4.13
If some columns are checked, CLICK on the Un-Check All button.
Now we can SELECT the Columns that we want for display. For the Tutorial we will do a
selection for the Planned Sea Movements. SELECT the Columns as indicated in Figure
4.14.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
EVE PREFERENCES
Page 4 - 10
Figure 4.14
After making a selection the user can record this setting within the database; CLICK on
the Set As Preferred button. Now each time the EVE view is opened this column selection
will be the first displayed.
This will continue to be the default selection, unless another selection is created and set
as the preferred.
It is also possible to save a selection to file using the Save to file option. This can be used
to re-set the user’s computer or to make the same selection common to a number of
different users. The other users need not follow the entire process but merely load a
shared file. Once created, the selected saved file can be used to establish common
settings/selections using the Load From File option.
Note: How to configure, save and import will be explained later (your EVE Manager
is conversant with the process); you will be given enough guidance to allow you to
load the necessary files or follow SOPs
Column Order
The Column Order of the selected and active columns can be changed when creating the
settings. CLICK on the Change Column order button as shown at Figure 4.15.
Figure 4.15
The Change Column Order window as shown at Figure 4.16 will open.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
EVE PREFERENCES
Page 4 - 11
Figure 4.16
As you can see, when the Change Column Order window is opened some of the column
labels are Greyed Out; these are the ones that were not selected for display. It is only the
active columns we are interested in so CLICK on the Visible First button and the active
columns will be grouped at the top of the list.
Now the display order can be changed. For the Tutorial we will change the order so that
the Asset column will be the first displayed in the grid.
Then as shown at Figure 4.17 SELECT the column object named Asset.
Save the new
order.
Close window without
saving.
Move Up
button.
Move Down
button.
Figure 4.17
Now use the Move Up or Move Down buttons to place the column labels in the desired
order. Individual labels can also be dragged and dropped into the order required. For the
Tutorial CHANGE the Column order as shown at Figure 4.18.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
EVE PREFERENCES
Page 4 - 12
Figure 4.18
As with the Pick column order window, the user can CLICK on the Set As Preferred button
so that the order is saved in the database. It can be retrieved quickly by CLICKING on My
Settings button.
After setting the required order CLICK on the Green Tick button. Now the columns will be
shown in the required order in the EVE View grid as shown in Figure 4.19. To display Sea
Movement only; CLICK the Reset Criteria Button, TICK the box SEA in MOT window and
CLICK the Show Movements button. The Date / Time could vary depending on the date of
your training.
Figure 4.19
You should note that an extra column has been added to the end of the columns: IATA
Code Arrival. This is a User-Defined Column automatically inserted as the last column if
the User-Defined Column was selected in the Please select Columns that you want to use
window. We will discuss the creation and update of such columns later.
Save and Import
Even though we know that our columns choices will be saved in our preferences, we
may need to save the data for distribution or to be reinstalled.
The following process described covers the methods used to save the choices. The
process applies both to Column Order and Pick Columns. The only differences are the
location of button as displayed in Figure 4.20
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
EVE PREFERENCES
Page 4 - 13
For the Column Order
For the Pick Columns
Figure 4.20
CLICK on Save to File button. This opens the Save As windows, where the extension
of files (*.eco & *.evs) will be automatically added as shown in Figure 4.21.
For the Tutorial SAVE in the EVE Mail Out folder both Column Order and Pick
Columns. SET the name of files as shown in Figure 4.20.
Figure 4.21
Insert a column layout name
Having set the desired display of the FDP, CLICK on the F9 button on your keyboard and
SELECT Columns tab. In the field Name for layout, you should TYPE PLANNED_SEA
and CLICK on Remember current EVE column layout button. The Displayed Name is now
inserted as shown at Figure 4. 22.
Figure 4.22
CLICK on OK button in the Preferences Properties window to save your entry and refresh
the Preferences. Now in the Flowplan window, you have new information in the Column
Preference list as shown in Figure 4. 23.
Figure 4.23
Now, we will demonstrate how it works. SELECT Pick Columns button. In the Please
Select the columns that you want to use window SELECT Check All button, then CLICK
Set As Preferred button. CLICK on the OK button. All existing columns are now shown.
Normally, all columns will open when opening a FDP. CLOSE the Flowplan.
SELECT PLANNED_SEA from the Column Preference list displayed below the menu bar
as shown in Figure 4.24.
Figure 4.24
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
EVE PREFERENCES
Page 4 - 14
RE-OPEN the EVE PREFERENCES FDP; note that all columns are arranged as for the
PLANNED SEA selection. The reason is that a selection in the Column Preference list will
supersede any previous column selection.
Note: A complete set of Layout columns could have been created by your EVE
Manager or specified in a SOP. To restore the configuration on your desktop, you
need only to import the files that contain the Pick and Order Columns (evs & eco)
and then insert the relevant Layout name in the Columns window in Preference.
You are here
General
Setting Preferences
Introduction
Accessing EVE
How to Login
Preparing EVE for Tutorial
Preferences Introduction
Preferences Windows
View Tab
Column Preferences
Pick Columns
Column Order
Save and Import
Insert a column layout name
Implement Another Layout
Contact Preference
Location Preferences
Miscellaneous Preferences
Print Preferences
Cargo Preferences
Template Preferences
ATO Feeder (for Air Task Order)
Cargo
EVE Update
Flow Table (Output)
Gantt Export
Generic Request Form (GRF)
HTML Template
Import Flowtable
Movement Request Form (MRF)
PAX
PPR Request
Time Table or Terminal Flow Plan
XML
Exporting and Importing Template Settings
Export
Import
Setting a Preferred Template
Exercises - 4
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
EVE PREFERENCES
Page 4 - 15
Implement Another Layout
For Tutorial and to confirm your recent knowledge, IMPLEMENT a PLANNED_AIR
Column in Column Preferences. This will be based on the selection and settings shown at
Figures 4.25 and 4.26.
Figure 4.25
Figure 4.26
To remind you, the process is as follows.
CLOSE any open Flowplan. For the Tutorial we will OPEN the EVE PREFERENCES
Flowplan. CLICK the Reset Criteria Button, TICK the AIR box in the MOT window and
CLICK the Show Movements button. Below the menu bar SELECT the Pick Columns
button and make your selection. SELECT the Change Order Column button and make
your selection. Have a look at your Flowplan view; the Date / Time could be different
depending on the date of your training.
Now CLICK on F9. In the Column Tab, TYPE PLANNED_AIR in the Name for Layout and
CLICK the Remember current EVE column layout button.
When finishing, you should have in the Column Preference list the two existing columns
options as shown in Figure 4. 27.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
EVE PREFERENCES
Page 4 - 16
Figure 4.27
Now, EXAMINE the effect of switching between PLANNED_AIR and PLANNED_SEA in
the EVE PREFERENCE Flowplan.
An easy exercise to complete our Column Layouts
In the EVE Mail In Folder you will find PLANNED_ROAD and PLANNED_TRAIN files to
configure your Column Layouts in your Preferences with the relevant Pick and Order of
Columns. IMPLEMENT the Layouts you have found in the Mail In folder. When
completed, your Columns Preference List should look similar to Figure 4.28.
Figure 4.28
You can use the new layouts directly or modify them as required. They are designed to be
used in the EVE deployment planning phase. At end of this Chapter, there is an exercise
to modify them for use during the execution phase.
Contact Preference
CLICK on the Contact tab; an illustration of a complete Contact window is shown in Figure
4.29
Figure 4.29
The Contact tab window allows you to insert the contact details you may wish to have
automatically added to the Movement Request Forms (MRFs), other templates and
reports created by the program.
Fields: They are self-explanatory; therefore we will not explain them in detail here. Phone
and Fax numbers need to be inserted with the International Dialling Code included or in
the NATO format if using the NATO Secure Network (NSN).
For the Tutorial INSERT your own Contact details.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
EVE PREFERENCES
Page 4 - 17
Default Nation: This option allows you to set a preference for the displayed nation
whenever a national criteria is required. For users working at their national HQs this can
be set to their nation. For users working at international HQs, it is recommended that this
be set to the MULTINATIONAL option (this has the code XM or XMN). Alternatively, the
primary nation where the operation or exercise is taking place can be used. For the
Tutorial, SET the Default Nation to 099 BROWNLAND.
Location Preferences
CLICK on the Locations tab and the window shown in Figure 4.30 will appear on the
screen.
Figure 4.30
Note: It may happen that this window contains data which has been inserted by the
EVE Manager or a previous user. In this case do not delete or modify without
informing your Eve Manager or consulting the relevant SOP.
The Locations window allows you to create a series of location lists, which show the
locations to be managed. These selections affect the sorting functionality in EVE and will
be detailed in Chapter 6.
It is possible to generate a number of different lists, in order to represent different phases
of an operation or be set to reflect different MOTs or POE / POD.
To add a new list to the index, CLICK on the Create Location List button and the Edit List
of Managed Locations window as shown in Figure 4.31 will appear on the screen.
Give the list an
internal name.
Button to open the
Insert Location window.
Figure 4.31
The window allows the template to be given an internal name to facilitate identification.
For the Tutorial, INSERT the name EVE POD and then CLICK the Insert Location(s)
button. The Pick Locations window shown in Figure 4.32 will appear on the screen.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
EVE PREFERENCES
Page 4 - 18
We set this as our
preferred Nation.
Figure 4.32
Note: The location to be added to the list must already exist in the database. The
process for adding a new location to the database is given in Chapter 2 of this
Tutorial Document.
The window gives you a number of options to assist in finding the locations you want to
add to the Locations List. The individual criteria for searching are:

Code: Insert the LOGFAS Location ID Code number.

ICAO: Insert the ICAO four-letter location code.

Nation: Select a nation, only the locations in that nation will be displayed.
 Location Name: If you know part of the location name you can search using the
additional criteria provided.
 Facilities: Displays locations that have the logistic facilities listed. These are set
in the Location Properties views.
 Location Type: Displays locations based on the location type set in the Location
Properties views.
The search and list criteria may be used individually or in combination. For the Tutorial
SET the following Criteria:

Nation: SELECT the Nation 099: ZZ BROWNLAND,

Location Type: CLICK and ACTIVATE the Airports and Seaports options.
Now CLICK the List locations button. The locations matching the search and list criteria
will be shown in the Locations List view.
It is possible to look in the properties of an individual location. For the Tutorial, SELECT
the Location ZZ0071 ADELMAR SP in the list view and then CLICK the Geo Viewer
button.
The Geo Viewer window will now appear on the screen and this is illustrated in Figure
4.33.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
EVE PREFERENCES
Page 4 - 19
Even if not “greyed”, it
cannot be changed
Data cannot be
changed
Figure 4.33
The Geo Viewer window allows you to look at the detail and information about the
location, but not to change the detail. To change any detail, the location properties need
to be accessed in GeoMan.
To close the Geo Viewer window, CLICK the Close button in the top right hand corner and
you will return to the Pick Locations window.
You can cancel the search and list criteria by clicking the Reset Criteria button and the
window will return to default view. CLICK the Reset Criteria button for the Tutorial.
Locations can be selected individually or you can use normal Windows functions to make
multiple selections, using the Ctrl key to make additional individual selections or the Shift
key to make block selections.
For the Tutorial SELECT the following Locations for the nation 096 ZZ: BLUELAND in the
list view. They are the Ports of Debarkation for the EVE PREFERENCE Flowplan.
ZZ0165 CALTROP AB, ZZ0166 CALTROP SP, ZZ0228 EQUINOX AB, and ZZ 0103
ARAMBULO SP.
After making the selections your screen should look similar to Figure 4.34.
Nation Selected
We selected Airports &
Seaports
Multiple selections:
Shift and/or Ctrl key
Figure 4.34
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
EVE PREFERENCES
Page 4 - 20
We will now add the selected locations to the Edit List of Managed Locations window.
CLICK the OK button. The Pick Locations window will close and the selected locations will
now be added to the Edit List of Managed Locations window. This is illustrated in Figure
4.35.
Figure 4.35
Additional locations may be added to the list by repeating the select locations process
above. To remove locations from the list, select the required location in the list view and
then click the Remove Location(s) button.
The locations are shown in the list in alphanumeric order when clicking on the Location
name header. This affects other views in EVE. Therefore, you can place the locations in
the list in a display order of priority by selecting the required location and then using the
Increase ( ) and / or Decrease ( ) priority buttons provided.
When you have completed the required locations list you can close the window.
For the Tutorial, CLICK the OK button.
The Edit List of Managed Locations window will close and you will return to the Locations
tab on the Preferences Properties window, shown in Figure 4.36.
Figure 4.36
You can have more than one location list in EVE. In order to add an additional location list,
repeat the process we have just described. Remember that each list must have a unique
Displayed Name.
You can also set one of the location lists as your preferred (default) list. Select the
preferred list in the list view and then click the Set As Preferred button. To remove a
location list from the database; select the list to be removed in the list view and then click
the Remove Location List button.
An easy exercise to complete our Locations Preferences
Create a location list (EVE POE) based on the Ports of Embarkation in Brownland for the
EVE PREFERENCES Flowplan. These are: ADELMAR AB, ADELMAR SP, ADELMAR
BEACH, GEET AB, GEZA AP, GEZA SP, GYORGY INT.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
EVE PREFERENCES
Page 4 - 21
When you are finished your Locations should be as displayed in Figure 4.37.
Figure 4.37
Miscellaneous Preferences
CLICK on the Miscellaneous tab and the window shown in Figure 4.38 will appear on the
screen.
Figure 4.38
On this window you can set some additional criteria to assist with the data input and the
mapping functions used in different EVE views.

Automatic generation of serial numbers for incoming slot requests:
As a movement request is imported into EVE, the program will automatically allocate it
a serial number. It is possible to assign a serial number specific for PAX and Cargo.
The allocated serial number can have a text prefix followed by a number of digits.
For the Tutorial INSERT the prefix of TUT and SET the number of digits to 4. This will
mean that any added serials will be automatically numbered, beginning with TUT0001
and continuing to TUT9999. SET the number of digits to 4 for PAX/Cargo Requests.

GANTT colours based on:
LOGFAS 6.1 introduces the capability to assign colours to specific objects (Asset
Type, First status, Last status) and related rows/columns to enhance display within the
GANTT views. In Chapter 6, we will modify the options to see their effects. ACCEPT
the Asset type Default Option.

Change Indicator:
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
EVE PREFERENCES
Page 4 - 22
The required option is selected by activating the appropriate radio button. The options
are:
o Since last reset by User – The change indicators will remain until you save
newer data.
o Within last – This is the default option and if selected the program will show
the change indicator for the specified number of hours.
For the Tutorial we will ACCEPT the Default Option and retain the time period of 24
hours.

Google Earth:
It is possible to link individual computers to Google Earth and use the mapping
provided in EVE views. The mapping data will be saved as a KML file on the computer
hard drive or on a network drive.
When opening a KML file Google Earth will display data contained in KML files into the
Google Earth viewer. Once your server is properly configured and its URL (address)
shared, anyone with a Google Earth installation can share the same views and access
your data.
If you select the option Create kml files, EVE will automatically create a kml file
containing the location list created in Location preferences. You can show it in Google
Earth by clicking on the file saved in the indicated folder.
For the Tutorial we will not make any selection.

Item description and Force description
These options control how items and forces are displayed in the EVE views. The
options are:
o None - None of the name fields in the Edit Item and / or Edit Force window
will be displayed.
o English Name – Only the English name in the Edit Item and / or Edit Force
window will be displayed.
o National Name - Only the National name in the Edit Item and / or Edit Force
window will be displayed.
o English Name + National Name – Both naming conventions in the Edit Item
and / or Edit Force window will be displayed.
For the Tutorial, we will ACCEPT the Default Option, which is the English Name.

Nation Sort Order:
This allows the displaying of the Nation names sorted by codes (2 or 3 digits) or by
name. It is recommended that if you work with imported files from LOGFAS 5.x (when
all LOGFAS modules were not full compliant with the ISO 3 convention) you select
Nation Code (2 letters). However, this can be changed at any time in any of the views.
We will do this later in Chapter 6.
For the Tutorial SELECT the NATO 3 letter code option.

When assigning SQUAWK options:
These boxes are used mainly in Air Movement and a squawk (IFF identifier) is
allocated by the Air Component Commander. Squawks are sometimes allocated for
other purposes. If a squawk is not allocated, an aircraft cannot enter controlled
airspace. Since data is sometimes not automatically shared with the ACC there is
scope for error and typing errors must be avoided when entering squawks.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1 Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
EVE PREFERENCES
Page 4 - 23
For the Tutorial we will SELECT both options and we will see the effects in Chapter 6.
When you have completed the changes to the Miscellaneous window the screen should
look similar to Figure 4.39.
Figure 4.39
Print Preferences
CLICK on the Print tab and the window as shown in Figure 4.40 will appear on the screen.
Figure 4.40
The reports that you can generate from EVE by default use the FEP (DDP) ID as the
header and the Plan Classification as the footer. The user can override these defaults
and insert their own header and footer text.
This is achieved by inserting text into the fields provided on the Print window. These can
be reset at any time by clicking on the button provided. For the Tutorial, we will ACCEPT
the Default inserted or blank Headers and Footers.
Cargo Preferences
Setting the Cargo Preferences allows the user to select which automatic actions will be
performed by the EVE software when the Mission Editor closes.
CLICK on the Cargo tab and the window as shown in Figure 4.41 will appear on the
screen.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
EVE PREFERENCES
Page 4 - 24
Figure 4.41
 When closing Mission Editor boxes allow selecting to perform automatic tests for
cargo against asset type and to update PAX/cargo loads.
 Containerisation provides functionality to adjust the maximum weight (in tons) to
vehicles and/or bulk cargo, when these categories are added. 20 Foot, 40 Foot or both
container sizes can be specified.
 Allocate According to Cargo performs a check according to Shipping Dimensions
or Operating Dimensions and Gross Weight or Tare Weight.
 Lane Meter Algorithm verifies which dimensions the cargo can have and how items
are stored in the cargo storage. When cargo is added to a mission and the capacity
usage needs to be calculated, it is possible to make adjustments on which types of
cargo will be ignored in this calculation.
 Allow PAX loaded on Cargo bays by their weight: this option should be exercised
only if you include the weight of personnel in your items list and that your assets are
designed to load a PAX and Cargo combination.
 Use volumetric weight for light items: this option allows the user to set a weight
value for light items and the system will use the calculation (can be changed by typing
a new value)
 Status Code: when highlighted, the cargo with the specified status will be ignored
in the check. The use of this Cargo preference will be explained later in the section
relating to the Mission Editor. The effects between different settings will be
demonstrated.
For now, leave the window as shown in Figure 4.41 (no change).
Now CLICK the OK button, which will close the Preferences Properties window as well as
saving your preferences in the database.
Currently there is no mechanism for exporting the settings and so the user must rely on
good SOPs to ensure continuity.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
EVE PREFERENCES
Page 4 - 25
NCSA have produced a Guide for LOGBASE Management & Installation for use by HQ J6
authorities. The guide includes guidance on preference imports and exports as well as
connecting and repairing LOGFAS installations. If needed, you should consult your J6
section.
CLICK on the OK button; this will close the Preference window, data will be written in the
Window registry and available for use.
Template Preferences
The Templates Preferences are a way to describe the content of EVE files used to import /
export data to those without direct access to EVE.
 One of the big advantages is that the operator can control some of data during the
import process.
 The second is that the forms to be employed can be standardized, customized
and are user friendly, being based on Excel spreadsheets.
In this Guide and Tutorial for EVE users we will not describe how to create the forms and
associated files. This is fully explained in the EVE Manager Guide.
We will use a series of Tutorial templates to demonstrate how they are created and used.
The templates are exactly the same as those taught on the EVE Managers Course and so
you may come across them in your normal daily work. Template formats and locations are
normally described in local SOPs.
CLICK on F9 to re-open Preferences and CLICK on the Templates tab.
Import Templates
Figure 4.42
You may specify templates for twelve different types of imports/exports: ATO Feeder,
Cargo Manifest, Flow Table, GANTT Export, Generic Request Form, HTML Template,
Import Flowtable, Movement Request Form, PAX Manifest, PPR Request, Time Table and
XML. These templates provide some options that control how the tables are viewed in
EVE and how the inputs / outputs from the location should be automatically formatted.
The Templates window allows you to configure the following:
 Add File Template: This provides links to the template files; the process applied
will depend on the template type that is selected. You will see this later at end of this
chapter.
 Remove Template: This option allows you to delete the selected template from the
list view.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1 Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
EVE PREFERENCES
Page 4 - 26
 Set as Preferred: It is possible to have more than one template for an individual
function; this option allows you to set one as the preferred template, while still giving
access to the others.
 Hyperlink Destination: This option will be removed in the next version of EVE. It
was created to allow an automatic destination indicated by the URL address. EVE
looks for the URL attachments used in the asset movements. The function was used
very briefly at start of EVE in ISAF to specify an unique destination for all EVE
produced and exported documents.
CLICK on the Templates for EVE generated files combo box at the top right of the window
and a list of the template types will be displayed. This list is shown in Figure 4.43.
Figure 4.43
For the Tutorial we need to have an extensive list of available templates and we will import
it.
CLICK the Import button, then in your EVE Mail In folder, SELECT the file named
TEMPLATES EVE USER.epf as shown in Figure 4.44 and OPEN it.
Figure 4.44
An information window will open.
Figure 4.45
SELECT the Yes button.
Figure 4.46
And then CLICK the OK button.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
EVE PREFERENCES
Page 4 - 27
The list of imported Templates will be shown as in Figure 4.47
Figure 4.47
The following sections are descriptions of the use and illustrations of the options available.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
EVE PREFERENCES
Page 4 - 28
You are here
General
Setting Preferences
Introduction
Accessing EVE
How to Login
Preparing EVE for Tutorial
Preferences Introduction
Preferences Windows
View Tab
Column Preferences
Pick Columns
Column Order
Save and Import
Insert a column layout name
Implement Another Layout
Contact Preference
Location Preferences
Miscellaneous Preferences
Print Preferences
Cargo Preferences
Template Preferences
ATO Feeder (for Air Task Order)
Cargo
EVE Update
Flow Table (Output)
Gantt Export
Generic Request Form (GRF)
HTML Template
Import Flowtable
Movement Request Form (MRF)
PAX
PPR Request
Time Table or Terminal Flow Plan
XML
Exporting and Importing Template Settings
Export
Import
Setting a Preferred Template
Exercises - 4
ATO Feeder (for Air Task Order)
This template format is held in the database and is an automatic selection of specific data
relating to ATO related elements when passing information to the NATO wide Integrated
Command and Control (ICC) Software used for Air Operations.
This template allows export only of a Message Text Format under the ADatP-3 / APP11(C) standard that can be imported in the ACC.
For the Tutorial SELECT the EVE ATO FEEDER row in the Templates window and
CLICK on it.
The Configure ATO Feeder Output window as shown in Figure 4.48 will appear on the
screen.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
EVE PREFERENCES
Page 4 - 29
Figure 4.48
This window allows you to insert a local name for the file.
CLICK the Cancel button; then CLICK on the OK button of the Preferences Properties
window.
We will examine an export produced by this template. For the Tutorial, CLICK on the File
menu and the Open FEP option. When the Open FEP window has been accessed,
SELECT the DDP named EVE PREFERENCES.
CLICK on the OK button. This is shown at Figure 4.49
Figure 4.49
The Movement Management View for EVE PREFERENCES Flowplan will open.
IDENTIFY the two buttons Reset Criteria, and Show Movements at the right of the
window. CLICK the Reset Criteria button, SELECT the AIR option from the MOT window
and CLICK the Show Movements button.
TICK Air
option
Figure 4.50
On top of window, as shown in Figure 4.47, SELECT EVE_ATO_FEEDER from the
templates list. You will see that the OUT button changed from grey to black colour.
The Column list from EVE
Preferences
The OUT button
Templates list
Figure 4.51
SELECT a Mission Row in the Mission View. CLICK on the OUT button. The Save As
window will open and will suggest a default name / date file as shown in Figure 4. 52.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
EVE PREFERENCES
Page 4 - 30
Figure 4.52
ACCEPT the name and SAVE in your EVE Mail Out folder. OPEN the exported file from
your EVE Mail Out folder choosing Open with Notepad, if requested.
The file appears in Adapt 3 message format. If you examine the details, you will be able to
identify all elements of the planned flight that have been inserted for the selected flight.
This format will act as a request to be inserted in the ATO for the date of planned mission,
once transmitted to the ICC.
Note: The above example is common to all template exports.
Cargo
This format is used to export a list of loaded or intended cargo directly in MS Excel format.
The template is held on the computer’s hard drive or on the location network and is
generally distributed to all individuals or forces required to export cargo.
The introduction of the Generic Request Form and capability of exporting cargo from the
PPR Out form will gradually reduce the use of this template. The use of these alternatives
will be explained later in the section.
However, we will use the template as a cargo export example.
The process is the same for all templates where there a need to map the information in
the Excel sheet with the fields in LOGBASE that contain the same information.
For training we will use a very basic Excel sheet which represents the possible use in a
Sea Port. This is a simple design for Tutorial use.
Note: Throughout the Tutorial there will be exercises so you will be trained to use a
Cargo template for the Import and Export of the details.
OPEN the file CARGO OUT SEA.xls contained in your EVE Mail In folder. Read or print it
(figure 4.53). But DO NOT CHANGE any of data inside this file.
Figure 4.53
CLOSE the Excel file. We will now examine related dialogs that may use it.
SELECT PLANNED_SEA in the Columns List, OPEN EVE PREFERENCES Flowplan, if
not already open. CLICK Reset Criteria, SELECT Sea MOT only and CLICK the Show
Movements button. Then SELECT the first row in the Missions window and DOUBLE
CLICK. The Mission Editor window will open. This window it will be explained in more
detail in Chapter 6. Now SELECT the Cargo Manifest tab as shown in Figure 4.54.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
EVE PREFERENCES
Page 4 - 31
Mission Selected
Cargo Manifest tab
To close Mission
Editor when no
data inserted
Figure 4.54
The Cargo Manifest window shows information related to the cargo payload that can be
exported as mission data. At the bottom of the windows are buttons and a scrolling list
containing the templates available for the export / import of Cargo and Pax. You should
find the CARGO SEA OUT template that we have just examined.
Some data on Cargo
manifest.
Export / Import.
Pax and Cargo
templates.
Figure 4.55
SELECT this template then CLICK on the Out button. This will open the Save In windows
with a pre-set name as shown at Figure 4.56.
Figure 4.56
ACCEPT it and save in your EVE Mail Out folder. A dialog will inform you about the
successful export. This file can be sent to anyone concerned.
CLICK on the Cancel button in the Mission Editor window.
Then SELECT CARGO [Time-Date].xls in your EVE Mail Out folder and you will have
access to the export shown in Figure 4. 57.
The cargo template is based on mission number (FEP serial). It provides the details of
legs made by an asset. Here we have two legs for asset.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
EVE PREFERENCES
Page 4 - 32
Figure 4.57
Note: For templates, the XLS format is used by most users (this is the Microsoft
spreadsheet format).
With the Cargo template, we have demonstrated the general process to implement a
template and to get data from a form. Later we will examine other types of template
(import / export). In all cases, the basic process is the same.
EVE Update
This template format no longer exists; it was in LOGFAS 5.xx and LOGFAS 6.0 only.
Flow Table (Output)
This template format is held in the database and allows you to export the flow of assets for
a specific location and specified dates
For the Tutorial we will export the flow of aircraft at CALTROP AB.
OPEN the EVE PREFERENCES Flowplan, if not already open. TICK the Air option in
MOT list; SELECT CALTROP AB in the Location list and SELECT some dates where
there are Missions.
TICK
Air.
Location
list.
SELECT dates
with the calendar
or TYPE IN.
Figure 4.58
CLICK the Show Movement button. From the Templates List, SELECT EVE FLOW
TABLE option and TICK the OUT Button as shown in Figure 4.59.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
EVE PREFERENCES
Page 4 - 33
The Templates
List
The Out
button
Figure 4.59
Using the Windows conventions, SAVE in your EVE Mail Out folder with the proposed
name, which will be in the language settings of the workstation.
Figure 4.60
When the export is completed, an EVE information message will be shown. If the export
cannot be achieved the wording completed successfully is replaced by word: failed.
Figure 4.61
From your EVE Mail Out folder, OPEN the previously exported file. SELECT the 24 Jul.
CALTROP AB tab in the open Excel spreadsheet.
.
Details of daily
movements
Slots ID
Figure 4.62
The slots ID will be explained at Chapter 5 dealing with the basic data. For the moment,
remember that these are the predefined timeframes for activities at the airport by type of
movements. OP = OPS, IN = In Theatre Flights; ALL = including civilian flights.
EXAMINE the data and CLOSE the Excel spreadsheet.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
EVE PREFERENCES
Page 4 - 34
GANTT Export
This template format is held on the computer’s hard drive or on the shared database and
allows you to export a data selection that may be converted and displayed in a GANTT
Format.
The output file created will be based on a selection of locations and dates made in the
accessed EVE View and will display an Excel based GANTT after import.
In order to create the output file, the data has to be exported from the database using a
template, and then placed where other personnel can access it using the MS Excel
program.
For the Tutorial we will use the Template named GANTT CHART OUTPUT.xls; this is in
the EVE Mail In folder. The internal name is EVE GANTT as at Figure 4.63.
Figure 4.63
For the Tutorial in your EVE PREFERENCES Flowplan, RESET all Criteria; CLICK on
EVE GANTT in the Templates List as shown at Figure 4.64.
Gantt is by Location
Export to file
Templates List
Access
Dates to be set
Figure 4.64
If the GANTT criteria have not been completely set the system will ask for them to be
completed.
We will use the same selection that in the previous paragraph, so eventually we can
compare the information. SELECT CALTROP AB as the location and SET the date of the
first movement in your Mission View and one day later. TICK the Air and Road buttons
from MOT options. CLICK the OUT button.
This will have two effects, it will open:

CALTROP AB Activity Diagram for [date – time],

Save In dialog with a predefined extension.
Note: The file export is an MS Excel format and it will save each of the selected
days as a separate worksheet; in this example this means there will be 2
worksheets.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
EVE PREFERENCES
Page 4 - 35
Figure 4.65
ACCEPT it and SAVE in your EVE Mail Out folder. Then OPEN the saved file in Excel.
You will find a spreadsheet with a left window (Figure 4.66) and a right window showing a
GANTT Chart arranged for printing (Figure 4.67).
Figure 4.66
Figure 4.67
Generic Request Form (GRF)
This form was introduced at the request of the users with the aim of having only one
generic form to manage all of the requests, be they for cargo, Pax, vehicles or missions.
The Mission option being similar to the Movement Request Form (MRF) that will be
studied in detail later in this Chapter.
Note: This type of template (GRF) is intended to replace Cargo, Pax and different
types of Movement Request Forms with a standardised interface.
As with other templates, the generic request form needs two files to be active within EVE:

the MS Excel spreadsheet with headers and cells to be completed;
 The second is a specific EVE file (extension *.erq) to map the data from MS Excel
sheet with the corresponding field in LOGBASE.
How to create them is described in the EVE Manager Guide and Tutorial. Here we will
conduct just a quick review.
At Figure 4.68 is shown a sample for the tutorial of a Cargo Request Form filled and at
Figure 4.69 the content of an *.erq file corresponding to the template being used.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
EVE PREFERENCES
Page 4 - 36
Figure 4.68
Dimensions and Weight are for individual Items; EVE will calculate according to the
Quantity.
Figure 4.69
The practical use of the Cargo Request shown in Figure 4.68 will be demonstrated in
Chapter 6. However, briefly, the process is similar to that of other templates we have seen
for export:
Activate a Flowplan SELECT the template in the Templates List and CLICK the In button.
Data will be imported in LOGBASE and can be seen in EVE.
The import mechanism in the Preferences window, such a template and its associated
*.erq file, will be explained in Import / Export files at end of this chapter.
HTML Template
This template format is held on the computer’s hard drive or on the location network and
allows you to specify the data selection that should be displayed when accessed. The
EVE Manager and/or SOPs will specify the required data format and should be consulted.
The HTML Template displays the required information in a read only format, so the reader
cannot amend the information displayed. This is a useful way to allow personnel who
have not been trained to use EVE or are based at other locations to see the data without
having access to the database. The HTML format allows the same display using any
browser and can easily be disseminated using INTERNET or WAN/LAN Web server.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
EVE PREFERENCES
Page 4 - 37
In order to give access to the information, the data has to be exported from the database
using the template and then placed where other personnel can access it. This can be on
a LAN or WAN. The SOPs for your location should detail the frequency of the export.
For the Tutorial we will use the EVE HTML template and a selection of movements. We
will use the same selection as in the previous paragraph, so we can eventually compare
the information. SET the date of the first movement in your Mission View and one day
later. TICK the Air buttons from MOT options. SELECT PLANNED AIR in the Columns
list. CLICK the Show Movement button.
SELECT the first three missions in the Missions view, then the HTML template in
Template List
To select missions TICK
in the column left and
use Ctrl+ or Shift key.
.
Figure 4.70
CLICK the OUT button. An Eve information window will open. CLICK the Yes button.
Figure 4.71
ACCEPT the proposed name for export to be done in your EVE Mail Out folder.
OPEN the saved file using any browser and an HTML page similar to Figure 4.72 will
open.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
EVE PREFERENCES
Page 4 - 38
Figure 4.72
Import Flowtable
This type of template is now obsolete due to the development of use of the shared
LOGBASE, all data being available inside the theatre or area of exercise.
The current process is based on the individual import of Movement Request forms (MRF)
associated with the Prior Permission Required (PPR) form for military and civilian special
controlled areas. It is possible in EVE (we will see it in Chapter 6) to get the equivalent in
just a few clicks with LOGBASE accessible.
It is more efficient to use the functionalities in EVE than to go to the long process on
import with these templates that are created on demand by NC3A and NCSA.
We will not describe the template at this stage.
Movement Request Form (MRF)
This template format is held on the computer’s hard drive or on the location network and
should also be distributed to all individuals or forces required to submit movement
requests to the controlling location or HQ.
The format of the Movement Request Form will depend on the requirements of the
individual controlling location or HQ and the Mode of Transportation (MOT) involved. The
forms are created in MS Excel format and provide a method of passing the required detail
in a standard format. An example of an Air Movement Request Form is shown in Figure
4.73 and you can find such a template in your Mail In folder as MRF Air Generic.xls file.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1 Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
EVE PREFERENCES
Page 4 - 39
As others templates, the MRF needs two files to be active within EVE:

One is an MS Excel spreadsheet with headers and cells to be completed;
 The second is a specific EVE file (extension *.erf) to map the data from MS Excel
sheet with the corresponding field in LOGBASE.
You should note that the type of Movement Request Format processes we describe here
applies for all types of requests.
Note: In the EVE Mail In folder you can find examples of such requests, identified as
MRF AIR GENERIC, MRF SEA GENERIC, MRF ROAD GENERIC 2155, MRF RAIL
GENERIC with their *.erf files. They can be used and modified by your EVE
Manager as required.
The EVE Manager and/or SOPs will direct the format for the Movement Request Forms to
be used for each MOT. The formats will be distributed to all who have to submit the
requests.
EVE Users should note that the request formats are linked within the program to allow the
required information to be directly imported into or exported from the EVE views. The
creation of the formats and the information extraction linking the procedure are given in
the EVE Management Guide and Tutorial Document.
For the Tutorial we will import a request for a Road movement.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
EVE PREFERENCES
Page 4 - 40
Figure 4.73
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
EVE PREFERENCES
Page 4 - 41
You are here
General
Setting Preferences
Introduction
Accessing EVE
How to Login
Preparing EVE for Tutorial
Preferences Introduction
Preferences Windows
View Tab
Column Preferences
Pick Columns
Column Order
Save and Import
Insert a column layout name
Implement Another Layout
Contact Preference
Location Preferences
Miscellaneous Preferences
Print Preferences
Cargo Preferences
Template Preferences
ATO Feeder (for Air Task Order)
Cargo
EVE Update
Flow Table (Output)
Gantt Export
Generic Request Form (GRF)
HTML Template
Import Flowtable
Movement Request Form (MRF)
PAX
PPR Request
Time Table or Terminal Flow Plan
XML
Exporting and Importing Template Settings
Export
Import
Setting a Preferred Template
Exercises - 4
PAX
This template format is held on the computer’s hard drive or on the location network and
should also be distributed to all individuals or forces required to submit or to export Pax list
to / from the controlling location or HQ.
The format of the PAX template will depend on the requirements of the individual
controlling location or HQ and the Mode of Transportation (MOT) involved. The forms are
created in MS Excel format, populated using a User Interface combined with a created
format. This provides a method of passing the required detail in a standard format directly
from and / or to the individual asset mission. The method of using the Pax template is
similar to the Cargo template Form; both are normally created by the EVE Manager.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
EVE PREFERENCES
Page 4 - 42
For the Tutorial we will examine a sample PAX template called the EVE PAX MANIFEST
to demonstrate the interface with LOGBASE.
Note: Remember that in the Tutorial we are only describing a process.
For the Tutorial SELECT the PAX option in the combo box on the Templates window;
IDENTIFY the EVE PAX MANIFEST row and DOUBLE CLICK the row as shown in
Figure 4.74.
.
Figure 4.74
The Manage PAX import / export window is shown in Figure 4.75.
It shows:

The Internal Name EVE PAX MANIFEST in the Internal name window;

The Excel template location address – in this case in your EVE Mail In folder;

The Export method where the options allow customisation of export files;

The Mapping between the Excel sheet and LOGBASE as shown in Figure 4.75.
Where the
template
is stored
The mapping between
EXCEL row / column and
fields in LOGBASE
Figure 4.75
CLICK on the Cancel button and OPEN the Excel Template to have a look at it.
For the Tutorial SELECT the PAX MANIFEST ALLIANCE.xls file; this is in your EVE Mail
In folder. OPEN it to examine the Excel spreadsheet, which is shown at figure 4.76
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
EVE PREFERENCES
Page 4 - 43
Figure 4.76
As it is a template, the file should be read-only and protected. Make a copy before using it
to create a Pax list.
At Chapter 6 we will use this form to extract a manifest from a mission.
PPR Request
Prior Permission Required (PPR) protocols may be in effect for some air and sea ports.
This means that all aircraft & ship movements require clearance before arrival.
The primary purpose of the PPR procedure is to give added control to the ground handling
/ parking at a particular location. The PPR procedure does not automatically grant flight
clearance, which must be applied for by submitting Flight Plans in the normal way.
The Air Information Procedures (AIP) and / or Notices to Airmen (NOTAM) for the
Operational Area and / or the SOPs for the Movement Control Centres (MCCs) will list
locations where PPR procedures are in effect and how they are to be managed.
The PPR template format is held on the computer’s hard drive or on the location network
and should also be distributed to all individuals or forces required to submit movement
requests requiring PPR to the controlling location or HQ.
The forms are created in MS Excel format and provide a method of passing the required
detail in a standard format. The format is the same as was described for the Movement
Request Form with the additional PPR columns added.
Note: A new functionality was added in LOGFAS 6.1 to export the Cargo Manifest
with the PPR answer. This indicates to the requester information concerning cargo
waiting or planned for shipment.
The EVE Site Manager and / or SOPs will direct the format for the PPR Request Forms
that are to be used for each MOT. The formats will be distributed to all who are required
to submit the requests.
EVE operators should note that the PPR Request formats are linked within the program to
allow the required information to be directly imported into or exported from the various
EVE views.
For the Tutorial, ACCESS your EVE Mail In folder, SELECT the File named PPR IN AIR
GENERIC.xls and OPEN it. The MS Excel (spreadsheet) format that will be used will be
shown as in Figure 4.78.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
EVE PREFERENCES
Page 4 - 44
As it possible to export cargo with the acceptance of PPR, if we need to use the facility,
we will have to generate a specific template, which takes cargo waiting into account.
Indeed, it should exist in our Preference Properties windows. You can see such in the
extract of Templates in Preferences Properties windows as shown in Figure 4.77.
Figure 4.77
Figure 4.78
We will use the template to request a PPR in Chapter 6.
Time Table or Terminal Flow Plan
This template format is held on the computer’s hard drive or on the location network and
allows you to specify the data selection that should be displayed when accessed.
The EVE Site Manager and / or SOPs will specify the data required for display and should
be consulted.
The Time Table (or Terminal Flow Plan) Template exports the required information in a
MS Excel format. This is a useful way to allow personnel who have not been trained to
use EVE or other locations to see the data without having direct access to the database.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
EVE PREFERENCES
Page 4 - 45
The aim of the template is to produce, for each location, a summary of the movements by
days. It should be noted that using the Export GANTT will give only an approximate result,
in a different format; therefore usage of such a form is declining. The form can be
considered as an export of the Embedded View that we will see at Chapter 6.
Such a generic Excel template is shown in figure 4.79 and can be found in your EVE Mail
In folder as TERMINAL FLOW PLAN TEMPLATE.xls. A customised version of the form
can be created by request by NC3A or NCSA.
Figure 4.79
In order to give access to the information, the data has to be exported from the database
using the template and then sent to or placed where other personnel can access it.
The method of export is the same as that for all exports. Use the Templates List in the
open FEP and clicking the OUT button.
We will not use this functionality in this document.
XML
The Extensible Markup Language (XML) is a general-purpose Markup Language and its
primary purpose is to facilitate the sharing of data across different information systems.
The detail about what data should be extracted from LOGBASE is written in the XML file.
This file is held in the database when created or imported. The format of the XML template
will depend on the requirements of the information system to be populated.
Such a process is undertaken only by highly qualified programmers and will not be used in
this document.
Exporting and Importing Template Settings
As you can see, the process for creating and linking the templates in EVE can be time
consuming and there is the possibility of operator error. Therefore, it is possible to export
and import the template settings that can either be held centrally on a network or used on
individual computers. The only criterion is that the files that are to be linked must be
located in a compatible folder to the one given in the file path name.
On a network this is easily achieved if the required files are located on a central (public)
drive of the network. The EVE Site Manager should be consulted about locating the data
set (templates) to be used.
On a standalone computer, the files should be located in a folder that can be copied and
applied equally to each individual machine. The Site Systems Manager and EVE Site
Manager should agree to the procedure for this.
In either case, the SOPs should reflect the requirements to allow this procedure to be
completed. We will examine this process.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
EVE PREFERENCES
Page 4 - 46
EXPORT
For the Tutorial CLICK the Export button as shown in Figure 4.80.
Figure 4.80
An Export window similar to that shown in Figure 4.81 will appear on the screen. We will
use normal Windows functions to locate the folder where the file being created will be
stored.
For the Tutorial SELECT the EVE Mail In folder option in the Export window. The program
gives the file a name automatically; you can accept this or give it a name of your own
choosing (the recommended option).
Note: the Template Preference exported file must be stored in the same folder as
the templates files and associated files.
For the Tutorial INSERT the File Name of EVE Tutorial Preferences Exported and then
CLICK the Save button. The EVE preferences file (*.epf) extension will be added
automatically.
Illustration only
Figure 4.81
The template settings will now be exported from the database as an EVE Preferences file
and will be allocated the file extension of (*.epf). You may now send the file to other
operators who are required to work with the same settings.
Import
To import the template preference setting, follow the procedure below.
CLICK on the Import button as illustrated in Figure 4.82.
Figure 4.82
The process will now require you to locate and select the file to be imported. This is
carried out using normal Windows procedures and the Import window will appear on the
screen.
For the Tutorial, SELECT the File that you exported previously named EVE Tutorial
Preferences Exported.epf; this file is located in your EVE Mail In folder.
Now CLICK the Open button.
The program will now start the import process and will display an EVE options dialog as
illustrated in Figure 4.83.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
EVE PREFERENCES
Page 4 - 47
Figure 4.83
In this dialog the options are to:
 Click the Yes button: This option will delete the entire current configuration and
replace it with the ones in the import file.
 Click the No button: This option will keep your existing template definitions as
they are and only replace the definitions with the same internal name. Any
templates in the import file that are not currently part of your list will be added.
 Click the Cancel button: This option will abort the import process and your
current settings will be retained.
It is recommended that you select the No button, unless you are absolutely sure
that Yes option is better for your purposes.
For the Tutorial CLICK the No button (the recommended action).
The program will now complete the import process. Once completed, EVE will display a
completion dialog. See Figure 4.84.
Figure 4.84
CLICK the OK button to finalise the import process.
Setting a Preferred Template
As well as different template types, it is possible to have more than one version of a
template type linked by EVE. An example would be: a Sea Movement Request, a Road
Movement Request or an Air Movement Request. Therefore, it is possible to set one of
these as your preferred option for use in EVE.
To set the preferred file, SELECT the required File in the list view and then CLICK the Set
as Preferred button.
The program will confirm the selection and setting.
This is the end of Chapter 4 and the exercises follow.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
EVE PREFERENCES
Page 4 - 48
Exercises - 4
CLOSE the EVE module and any LOGFAS module if open. REOPEN EVE Module. ACCESS
the Preferences window and CARRY OUT the following exercises.
Part 1
Look at the individual tab windows and EXAMINE the Different Options. CROSSCHECK
the Options with the explanations given in this Chapter.
Part 2
ACCESS the Templates tab.
DELETE all the templates listed using the Remove Template button. CLICK on the OK
button to close the Preferences window.
ACCESS the Preferences window and CLICK on the Templates tab, the Template
window should be empty.
IMPORT the file EVE Tutorial Preferences Exported.epf from your Mail In folder. Check
that the templates are set in your Templates Preferences
Part 3
CLICK on the Locations tab and ADD a new Location list which includes the locations in
the table below. INSERT the Internal name as BROWN LOC.
Hint: The Location Name and ADAMS/LOGFAS Code for each location are shown in
the table below.
ADAMS/LOGFAS Code:
ZZ0014
ZZ0016
ZZ0018
ZZ0022
ZZ0040
ZZ0042
ZZ0044
ZZ0517
Location Name:
GATDULA SP
FABIUSZ SP
GERJEN JET BASE
GUMATA JET BASE
GOULET
GUNGABURG
GATDULA RH
GATDULA AP
CLOSE the Preferences window and EXIT the EVE module.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
CHAPTER 5 – CREATING BASIC DATA
Page 5 - 1
Chapter 5 – Creating Basic Data
You are here
General
Introduction
Basic Data Table
GeoLoc Data
Forces and Items Data
Plans Data
Plans
Creating a Plan
Updating a Plan
Statement of Requirements
Allied Disposition List Data
Assets
Asset Types Data
Asset Fleet Data
Basic Data of EVE
Slot Definitions
Location Time Table Definitions Data
Default Routes Data
Notices Data
Mission Types Data
ATO Days Data
User-Defined Columns Data
Exporting and Importing Basic Data
Exporting from EVE
Importing into EVE
Exchange of data not Exported / Imported
Printing Basic Data from EVE
Exercises
5 - 1 Import Definitions
5 - 2 Update Notice
General
This Chapter describes how to maintain the basic data that is used by EVE Users. The
Tutorial will discuss the types of basic data that can be applied and the procedures for
updating such data.
The EVE Manager will normally prepare or control the basic data to be used and will
have developed SOPs to ensure that all operators using the site update their information
using the same criteria.
Introduction
The EVE module is used for creating and managing the basic data linked to individual
locations or used in a FEP. LOGFAS also uses the Geographic Data Management
Module (GeoMan) to create and maintain the location and infrastructure data.
Basic Data Table
The basic data sets used by EVE are stored in LOGFAS LOGBASE; they are shown in
the following table:
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 5 – CREATING BASIC DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 5 - 2
Data Name:
Description:
GeoLoc Data
Basic and detailed location data including
logistical links and infrastructure information. This
subject is covered in detail in Chapter 3 of the
Tutorial.
Forces and Items Data
Data that is used to create computer file
representations of the forces, their equipment and
supplies to be moved.
Plans Data
Link files used
relationships.
Statement of Requirements
The list of force types required to meet the
operational planning concept of operations
(CONOPS).
Allied Disposition List
The list of national forces contributed to meet the
Statement of Requirement.
Asset Types Data
Template assets based on individual MOTs.
Asset Fleet Data
Individual assets based on the Asset Types.
These represent the actual aircraft, ships etc
being used or planned to be used.
Slot Definitions
These allow time periods to be created for a
location, mainly for parking and arrival allocation
and occupation.
Location Time Table Definitions Data
These allow a number of arrivals and departures
of assets to be defined in a series of equal time
intervals.
Default Routes Data
These allow routes to be defined for a specific
location.
Notices Data
These allow technical information to be linked to
a specific location. (e.g. Notices to Airmen
(NOTAM)).
Mission Types Data
These allow the creation of a list of types of
mission and handling conditions.
ATO Days Data
These allow the definition, description and setting
of the ATO date for the Theatre / Operation.
User-Defined Columns Data
These allow the user to add columns with specific
definitions to certain areas within EVE.
by
EVE
to
create
data
We will give a full explanation of the majority of the above types of data in turn.
The EVE Manager and/or SOPs should always be consulted when basic data primary
fields need to be modified, inserted or deleted.
GeoLoc Data
Although it is possible to view location and location infrastructure data in EVE, it is
normally created, updated and maintained using the GeoMan.
A large number of standard locations are normally contained in the issued database and
additional specific locations with their infrastructure can be added as required. Detailed
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 5 – CREATING BASIC DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 5 - 3
instructions on the creation and updating of locations, location infrastructure and
Networks are given in Chapter 2 of this Tutorial. The application of Geographic Data in
EVE is further described in Chapters 4, 5, 6 and 7. You will recall that Geographic Data
was used when we created the Location List in Chapter 4.
Forces and Items Data
The creation and management of Force and Item data is a national responsibility and the
functions are carried out using the LDM. Because some forces and items are either
theatre assets or belong to multinational HQs; this paragraph applies equally to HQs or
theatres as well as nations.
Within the database, the Force and Item Lists are arranged by nation. The National
Prefix Code (the 2 or 3 letter format) is automatically added as an aid to identification.
The prefix is contained normally in one of the primary fields. For example, for forces this
is the Force ID field and for items it is the NIC field.
A Force Profile and Holding file is a format specific to LOGFAS. It allows the forces to be
selected and placed within a hierarchy and the associated items that represent the
inventory to be added and quantified. For the purposes of the LOGFAS modules the
term Items is applied to Personnel, Equipment and Supplies.
The ability to access the various Force and Items data areas has been added to EVE to
enable the user to examine, create and modify the data without the need to open
additional modules (in this case the LDM).
To access these data areas and for the Tutorial OPEN EVE, CLICK on the Basic Data
menu and SELECT the Forces & Items option as shown in Figure 5.1.
Figure 5.1
From this point you can select the area of interest from the side menu options.
As discussed above, the creation and management of these data sets is normally a
national responsibility and, in most cases, it is the nations who will submit the data to
you. If you require more detail on the processes involved in managing such data, you
should refer to the LDM Basic Data documentation in Chapter 3 of ADAMS, SPM or
LOGREP.
Note: It is possible to create, edit and delete Items, Forces and Force Profile &
Holdings within EVE. However, EVE will not give you access to the export/import
function of LDM; therefore, you will need to open LDM to export any changes.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 5 – CREATING BASIC DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 5 - 4
Plans Data
Plans
EVE uses Plans to create data links and relationships within the program. For example,
all DDPs and FEPs need to be created under a common plan name so that certain
common attributes, such as a Reference or Mark Date can be assigned.
Note: The Reference Date is particularly important and must be set before the FEP
is created, whether from a DDP or directly in EVE. Only if the date is set can EVE
allocate the correct date in the FEP, if no Reference Date is set then all date related
columns in the FEP will default to the current date and will not be updated against
the Reference Date.
After importing a DDP into the database you must ensure that the correct Reference
Date has been set before using the DDP to create a FEP.
The attributes of the plan are automatically included when either a DDP or FEP is
exported from or imported into EVE.
To examine the plans that are already in the database CLICK on the Basic Data menu
and then SELECT the Edit Plans option as illustrated in Figure 5.2.
Figure 5.2
This will activate the EVE – [Plan List] window that is illustrated in Figure 5.3.
Figure 5.3
You can now see the plans that are currently in the database. Additional plans can be
inserted into the list, edited or deleted.
For the Tutorial we need an empty plan. We will create one, although this task is
normally performed by an EVE Manager.
Creating a Plan
An EVE Flow Plan (or DDP) can only exist within an existing Plan. To create a new Plan
in EVE, CLICK on the Plans menu and then SELECT the Insert Plan option. This
process is illustrated in Figure 5.4.
SELECT the Insert
Plan option.
Figure 5.4
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 5 – CREATING BASIC DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 5 - 5
The Edit Plan window as shown in Figure 5.5 will appear on the screen.
Figure 5.5
Now SELECT or INSERT the detail required. For the Tutorial insert the following detail
into the fields provided.
Field:
INSERT/ SELECT:
Remarks:
Plan Name:
EVE EXAMPLE 2
Here you can insert the Full Title for your
plan.
Ref Day:
G
Here you insert the appropriate Active Day
reference.
This will normally be C, D, G or M Day,
whichever is allocated.
The definitions of these terms are given in the
Glossary.
Ref Date:
ACTIVATE the tick- Date designated as the Ref Date. At time of
box and SELECT writing the default date was selected and
one week prior to the inserted as 01/10/2011.
training.
Plan Type:
PEACE KEEPING
Here you select the appropriate Type of
Operation name.
Classification: NATO
UNCLASSIFIED
Remarks:
LOGFAS 6.1;
EVE Tutorial
Here you select the appropriate or allocated
classification for the plan.
for This is a freeform text box and you can insert
additional information useful to you.
When you have completed this process, your window should look similar to
the one in Figure 5.6.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 5 – CREATING BASIC DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 5 - 6
Figure 5.6
Look at the options provided in the combo boxes. These may be expanded to suit an
individual HQ or Nation’s requirement.
When you have inserted / selected the required details, CLICK on the OK button. The
Edit Plan window will be removed from the screen and your new plan will be added to the
Plan List view as illustrated in Figure 5.7.
The New Plan
is added to the
list.
Figure 5.7
Updating a Plan
You may change any of the inserted details as and when required. Select the Plan to
change from within the Plans List window.
Now CLICK on the Record menu and SELECT the Edit option. Alternatively, you can
RIGHT CLICK on the Plan Name in the Plans List view and SELECT the Edit option in
the sub-menu dialog or DOUBLE CLICK on the line entry in the Plans List view. When
the changes have been made CLICK the OK button; the window will close and the
details in the Plan List will be updated.
Deleting a Plan
To delete a plan from your list, ACCESS the Plans window as before and SELECT the
Plan you want to delete. Now CLICK on the Record menu and SELECT the Delete
option. You can also RIGHT CLICK on the Plan Name in the Plans List view and
SELECT the Delete option in the sub-menu dialog. The plan will then be deleted from
the database.
Note: If you delete a plan as described above, all other areas to which the plan is
referenced, such as SORs, DDPs and FEPs will be deleted automatically.
CLICK on the Exit button to close the Plans window.
Statement of Requirements
A Statement of Requirements (SOR) is the Force Commander’s list of required forces for
a specific operation. The requirement is normally expressed as a Force Type and not as
a requirement for specific (named) units.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
CHAPTER 5 – CREATING BASIC DATA
Page 5 - 7
The creation of the SOR is not directly a function of either the Logistics or Movements
community. The SOR will eventually be taken over by other programs used by the
Operational Planning Staff.
However, LOGFAS needs a SOR in order to allow the movements and sustainment
planning processes to be undertaken. This is normally carried out using the LDM
functions that support ADAMS during the processes that lead to the creation of a DDP.
However, the Operational Planning Process (OPP) can be dynamic and the plan may
continue to be refined as the deployment is being executed. The functionality has
therefore been added to EVE to allow the SOR to be refined and updated, if necessary.
It is possible to create the SOR directly in EVE; the basic processes are the same as in
LDM. EVE Operators can easily adapt an existing SOR, using the same set of
instructions found in Chapter 3 (LDM Basic Data) of the LOGREP, ADAMS, and SPM
modules.
Note: If an SOR needs to be substantially changed, it is recommended that the LDM be used
rather than EVE.
The main reason for the advice given in the above note is that the LDM allows such
changes to me more easily exported and the changes cascaded to all interested parties.
Because EVE is primarily used as an execution tool it is highly unlikely that it will be used
for major changes to an SOR. Such changes will normally be made using the LDM. EVE
can however still be used to make minor adjustments to SOR entries during execution.
Changes to SORs should be normally undertaken with the guidance of the EVE
Manager. A fuller description is given in the EVE Manager Guide.
The SOR is described further in the section dealing with the Allied Disposition List (ADL).
Allied Disposition List Data
An Allied Disposition List (ADL) shows the national force contributions for a specific
operation. These are shown against the SOR force type requirement and display the
specific named units being provided.
Although the ADL is used in the EVE Movement View, like the SOR its creation is not
directly a function of either the Logistics or Movements communities. ADL creation will
eventually be taken over by other programs used by the Operational Planning Staff.
Because an ADL is an essential prerequisite for movement planning, EVE allows the
creation and updating of the necessary data; although this is normally carried out using
the LDM functions that support the ADAMS DDP creation process.
It is possible to create the ADL directly in EVE. The basic processes are the same as in
the LDM. EVE Managers can easily adapt an existing ADL, using the same set of
instructions found in Chapter 3 (LDM Basic Data) of the LOGREP, ADAMS, and SPM
modules.
Because EVE is primarily used as an execution tool it is highly unlikely that it will be used
for major changes to an ADL. Such changes will normally be made using the LDM. EVE
can however still be used to make minor adjustments to ADL entries during execution.
Such changes should be undertaken by the EVE Manager or under his/her control. A
fuller description is given in the EVE Manager Guide.
However, for training purposes the ADL, SOR and Force Profile used in this document
are shown on the next page with a short explanation.
SELECT Edit Allied Disposition List option from the Basic Data menu, see Figure 5.8.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 5 – CREATING BASIC DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 5 - 8
Figure 5.8
This will open the EVE [Allied Disposition List] module with empty windows. SELECT the
EVE TUT 1 Plan and the 099BROWN: MASTER 11 profile options.
This force is proposed to
fulfil a SOR requirement.
SOR
Details
button.
These units are
assigned to the SOR.
Some units from other
force profiles are shown
in the Requirements
Box in GREEN to
indicate that their
contribution has met the
requirement fully.
The RED colour shows
the forces allocated to
fulfil the SOR
requirements.
They cannot be reused
in another SOR within
the same plan.
Figure 5.9
CLICK the SOR Details button.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 5 – CREATING BASIC DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 5 - 9
SOR serial is red when
Forces are nationally
proposed to fulfil a SOR
requirement and green
when accepted in
Disposition List.
Figure 5.10
CLOSE the open windows.
You are here
General
Introduction
Basic Data Table
GeoLoc Data
Forces and Items Data
Plans Data
Plans
Creating a Plan
Updating a Plan
Statement of Requirements
Allied Disposition List Data
Assets
Asset Types Data
Asset Fleet Data
Basic Data of EVE
Slot Definitions
Location Time Table Definitions Data
Default Routes Data
Notices Data
Mission Types Data
ATO Days Data
User-Defined Columns Data
Exporting and Importing Basic Data
Exporting from EVE
Importing into EVE
Exchange of data not Exported / Imported
Printing Basic Data from EVE
Exercises
5 - 1 Import Definitions
5 - 2 Update Notice
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 5 – CREATING BASIC DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 5 - 10
Assets
Asset Types Data
Asset Types are a template of the assets required to complete analysis of a DDP and
allocation. These templates are used to create the Asset Fleets (Real Assets) that are
used by EVE. This will be explained in the next section.
Asset Types are used to show the common characteristics such as; speed, range and
configuration. Such information is readily available from various open sources.
A number of standard templates have been created within LOGFAS, which are available
in your database. These have the prefix AAA. (AA coded assets continue to exist to
provide compliance with DDPs created by previous LOGFAS 5.2 and 6.0 installations).
The LOGFAS user community has agreed the detail within these templates.
As a user, your database should contain the Asset Types used within your area of
responsibility. If you are working with a new DDP, the Asset Types will be imported
during the LDM import process. Once installed, the DDP is part of your database and the
required Asset Types will be loaded with it.
Creating, updating, deleting an Asset Type are tasks that should be undertaken by or
under the control of the EVE Manager. A full description is given in the EVE Manager
Guide.
If you should need to look at your asset types you can access them in the Basic Data
menu. CLICK on the Basic Data menu and then SELECT the Edit Asset Types option in
the drop down box as shown in Figure 5.11
.
Figure 5.11
The Assets Type window, partially shown in Figure 5.12 will appear on the screen.
Asset Types
Tree view
Asset Types List view
Figure 5.12
As you can see the window is arranged into two parts. The left side is the Asset Types
Tree view; here the asset types are arranged into the four main categories of Aircraft,
Railcar and Train, Road Asset and Convoy Types, and Ship Types.
The right side is the Asset Types List view; this shows the asset types that have been
selected by MOT in the tree view.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 5 – CREATING BASIC DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 5 - 11
Selecting a category or specific asset type in the tree view will filter the details shown in
the list view.
In the Asset Types Tree view CLICK on the Aircraft Types option; you will see that the
Asset Types List view now only shows the asset types within that category. DOUBLE
CLICK the TUT C130 asset type. It can be found towards the bottom of the list. This will
open the Asset Type editor window that groups the main characteristics of the asset type
as shown at Figure 5.13.
Figure 5.13
CLICK the Aircraft tab to look at the service characteristics. These are used in ADAMS
when allocating assets.
Figure 5.14
CLICK on the Pax & Cargo Bays tab.; your screen should look similar to Figure 5.15.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 5 – CREATING BASIC DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 5 - 12
Figure 5.15
The dimensions of the cargo bays determine an asset’s cargo carrying capability. If an
asset has specialist capabilities, we can define the cargo bays to carry certain items of
equipment
For example, a ship may have an uncovered cargo bay for loading containers only
(measured in TEUs) and a RORO may have a cargo bay for wheeled vehicles
(measured in Lane Metres or LIMS).
If we need to create additional cargo bays and input all our own data we would do so by
adding a New cargo bay, or alternatively CLICKING on the Copy button and making the
necessary changes.
If we wanted to remove a cargo bay we would select the required cargo bay and then
CLICK the Delete button and the cargo bay would be removed from the screen.
If we need the asset to be able to carry both 70 Pax AND 15 tons of cargo, we would
have to create two separate cargo bays; one for the Pax and one for the cargo.
The use of the Handling Capacity tab is an advanced feature, outside the scope of this
Tutorial. It is not used for current EVE functions. It is reserved for future functionality.
CLICK on the Cancel button and the Asset Types editor window be closed.
Asset Fleet Data
The Asset Fleet used by the movement planner consists of those individual assets that
have been created from the various asset types. Once placed in the database they can
be allocated to movement components that do not self deploy.
It may happen that specific assets need to be added to a current fleet: either national or
allocated to a theatre. The Tutorial will show the user how to create, update or delete
individual assets from a fleet.
Before an individual asset can be created, its asset type must exist. In some cases,
such as large and complex maritime assets with unique characteristics, there will be a
one to one relationship between asset type and asset. More often, one asset type will
form the basis of many individual assets.
Once individual assets have been created they are stored as part of your asset fleet and
are available within the Asset Fleet tree view.
CLICK on the Basic Data menu and then SELECT the Edit Asset Fleet option as
illustrated in Figure 5.16.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 5 – CREATING BASIC DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 5 - 13
Figure 5.16
An Asset Fleet window similar to Figure 5.17 will appear on the screen.
The Asset Types
available. Here we
selected Ships
Selection of
Nation
The Asset Fleet
belonging to Brownland.
Figure 5.17
The Asset Types are listed on the left-hand side of the screen. They are shown in a tree
view similar to that used in the Asset Types window.
The right hand side of the screen shows the Asset Fleet that has been created within the
Asset Type category highlighted in the Asset Tree view.
At the top of the Assets List view there is a combo box. This allows you to select either
(*)(All Nations) or a specific individual nation. When opening the window, the default
nation will be your Preferred Nation, selected in the Preferences Properties window.
Creating Assets
There are two methods of creating assets. The first method allows you to create assets
individually. This method is appropriate when it is necessary only to create one asset, as
is the case for ships.
This is the best method of creating a new asset with an unique name (such as MV
Germania). It is also useful when all assets of a particular type are not at the same
location.
To demonstrate the individual asset creation process, we will create a new Ship Asset for
BROWNLAND. First SELECT the nation 099: ZZ BROWNLAND in the Nation combo
box.
CLICK on Ship Types in the Asset Types Tree view to expand the maritime asset types
available for use. In the right hand screen you will see all the individual assets of that
type available in the database.
In the Asset Type Tree view SELECT the Asset Type named AAA CONT MED. You will
see in the right hand screen that we have no Asset Fleet created using this Asset Type.
This is illustrated in Figure 5.18.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 5 – CREATING BASIC DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 5 - 14
Shows the Asset
Fleet based on this
Type. In this case
there are none AAA
coded.
SELECT the
Asset Type
Figure 5.18
We will now create the asset to add to our fleet.
CLICK in the Asset Fleet view to activate it, then CLICK on the Assets menu and
SELECT the Insert option. This process is shown in Figure 5.19.
Figure 5.19
The Asset editor window as shown in Figure 5.20 will appear on the screen.
Blank Field shows
that it is a New
Record.
The Greyed out characteristics
have been taken from our Asset
Type and cannot be changed.
Figure 5.20
We are now ready to create a new Asset, with the characteristics of the AAA CONT
MED.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 5 – CREATING BASIC DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 5 - 15
Greyed-out fields cannot be changed; they are taken from the Asset Type. To change
the other fields, click in the appropriate boxes and type in the necessary information, or
use the combo boxes to select the required data.
For the Tutorial INSERT/SELECT the following detail:
Field:
INSERT/SELECT:
Remarks:
Asset ID:
99MED CONTAINER
Primary
unique.
Name:
MV EVE
Insert the
Asset.
Asset Type Code
and Asset Kind:
field
must
name
of
be
the
Automatically taken from the
Asset Type.
Owner Nation:
099: ZZ BROWNLAND
Based on the selected
nation, you can change this
if required.
Base Port Nation:
099: ZZ BROWNLAND
This field is not mandatory.
It will be imported when Port
will be selected.
Port:
GEZA SP (Loc Code ZZ0277)
This field is not mandatory.
To allocate a Location follow
the instructions below.
To allocate a base port, CLICK on the Access GeoLocs button at the right of the Port
field. This will open the Pick Locations window; this is shown in Figure 5.21.
SELECT the
Nation.
SELECT the
location type of
Seaports.
CLICK on to
List
Locations.
SELECT the
Location.
CLICK the
OK button.
Figure 5.21
As before, you can use the Pick Locations window to find the location you want to
allocate. SELECT the Nation 099 ZZ BROWNLAND then CLICK and activate the
Seaport option in the Location Types. Now CLICK on the List locations button.
The Locations List view will display locations that meet the criteria set. SELECT the
Location GEZA SP (Loc Code ZZ0277), and then CLICK the OK button. This location
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 5 – CREATING BASIC DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 5 - 16
will be inserted as the Port for this asset. Your upper screen should look similar to
Figure 5.22.
Figure 5.22
When you have completed the required detail, CLICK the OK button. The Asset editor
will close and the new asset will be added to the Asset Fleet List view. This is shown in
Figure 5.23.
Figure 5.23
This asset is now available for use in EVE and the other LOGFAS applications.
Creating Multiples Assets
The second method of creating assets allows us to create multiple assets
simultaneously. We can use this method when all the new assets are based on one
particular asset type and the names and/or current locations of the new assets are either
identical or do not matter.
To demonstrate this method we will create three C-130J Assets for BROWNLAND from
the AAA C130J asset type.
CLICK on Aircraft Types in the Asset Tree view to expand the airlift asset types available
for use. Now CLICK on the Asset Type named AAA C130J - C130J PAX&CARGO. You
will note that there are no assets of this type presently displayed in the Asset Fleet List
view since none have yet been created.
CLICK in the Asset Fleet List view to activate it, then CLICK on the Assets menu and
SELECT the Create Multiple Assets option. This is shown in Figure 5.24.
Figure 5.24
The Create Multiple Assets window, as shown in Figure 5.25 will appear on the screen.
Figure 5.25
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 5 – CREATING BASIC DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 5 - 17
In this window we can specify the quantity of assets we want to create for a particular
Asset Type.
The Owner Nation and the Home Station of the assets can also be specified. However, it
is not essential to enter the Home Station. It is only necessary to specify the Home
Station if the user wants to take any positioning movements into account in his planning.
For EVE, it is best to insert the Home Station.
Data is inserted or selected into the field cells. Inserting a Prefix Key at the beginning of
the Asset ID Code makes the asset easier to identify.
Information and data is entered in the various boxes by either typing or using the combo
boxes provided.
For the Tutorial INSERT/ SELECT the following detail into the appropriate fields:
Field:
Remarks: INSERT/ SELECT:
Asset Type Code:
This will be based on the Asset Type selected; you can
change it if you wish.
For the Tutorial ACCEPT the type AA C130J
Quantity:
Insert the quantity of assets you want to create based on
this Asset Type.
For the Tutorial INSERT the Number 3.
Prefix Key:
A suitable PEFIX to ease identification
(Name)
For the Tutorial INSERTC-130J-TRG-
Prefix Description:
Here you can accept what the program gives you or insert
your own description.
For the Tutorial we will accept the program’s option.
Owner Nation:
For the Tutorial SELECT 99 that is ZZ BROWNLAND.
Home Station:
For the Tutorial SELECT ADELMAR AB
The Owner Nation field is empty or has the preferred nation code. If it is empty, the
information will be added assuming that the Owner Nation is the same as Home Station.
You can set an Owner Nation, and then select a Home Station from another nation (In
the case of deployed assets).
After inserting the detail, CLICK the OK button. The three new assets will be created.
CLICK on Aircraft Types in the Asset Type tree view and then on AA C130J to view the
assets created. Your screen should look like Figure 5.26.
Figure 5.26
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 5 – CREATING BASIC DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 5 - 18
Updating Asset
You may change any of the inserted details as and when required. SELECT the Asset to
change from within the Asset Fleet List view. CLICK on the Assets menu and SELECT
the Edit option. The Asset editor window will open and you can make the changes
required. When the changes have been made, CLICK the OK button, the window will
close and the details in the Asset List will be updated.
For the Tutorial we will change data for the first C 130 J of our fleet. SELECT the first
Asset from those you have just created. Now DOUBLE CLICK on the Asset to access
the Asset editor.
You can also activate the View Preview Pane button as shown in Figure 5.27. This will
open an additional window on your screen; this is also an Asset Editor view.
Figure 5.27
In this window you are able to make any changes you wish. For the Tutorial CHANGE
the Name of the asset to 99-ABAA and add the Serial Number 5114 as illustrated in
Figure 5.28.
Figure 5.28
SAVE the input by CLICKING on Diskette Icon.
You can note that the data has been updated in the Fleet View, see Figure 5.29.
Figure 5.29
Deleting Asset
To delete an Asset from your list, OPEN the Asset Fleet window as before and select the
Asset you want to delete. Now CLICK on the Assets menu and select the Delete option.
Note: You should note that if you do delete an Asset as described above, all other areas
to which the asset was referenced, such as in DDPs and FEPs will also be deleted
automatically.
CLICK on the Close button and the Asset Fleet window will be updated in database and
removed from the screen.
Basic Data of EVE
Slot Definitions
Slot Definitions are used to allocate a timeframe for a movement related activity in a
predetermined pattern, at a specific location. They allow the operators to control what
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
CHAPTER 5 – CREATING BASIC DATA
Page 5 - 19
types of traffic make use of the location or terminal and allow planners to see what
assets could be used to carry out the movements.
A Slot Definition table consists of a predetermined set of columns, completed by the
user, which are then linked to the selected location or terminal. The detail required to
complete the columns should be included in SOPs.
Slot Definitions should be included in the working database. The EVE Manager is
normally responsible for nominating all locations where Slot Definitions are required and
will usually preload them to the working database. If necessary and authorised, the user
can edit, insert, and remove details of Slot Definitions. The method of importing Slot
Definitions is described at the end of this chapter. A full explanation is given in The EVE
Manager Guide.
Note: A Slot Definition can be applied to any location to pinpoint a timeframe in a
predetermined pattern for a specific movement related activity. As an example, it
could be used at a Border Crossing point to separate military convoys from the
civilian for checks.
To illustrate this we will examine a Slot Definitions table for EQUINOX AB (Loc Code
ZZ0228) in BLUELAND.
Editing Slot Definitions
CLICK the Basic Data menu and then SELECT the Edit Slot Definitions option, this
process is illustrated in Figure 5.30.
Figure 5.30
When you access the Pick Location window there may be a list of locations on view,
these are the locations that already have a Slot Definitions table created, see Figure
5.31.
The Nation
list
All these boxes act as filter
Clicking on the Geo
Viewer button will
give you access to
GeoLoc properties
Figure 5.31
If you wish to edit the definitions for a location SELECT the Location you need to work
with from the list and then CLICK on the OK button. The Slot Definitions table for that
location will appear on the screen and you can make the changes you wish.
For the Tutorial we will use the alternate method and DOUBLE CLICK the EQUINOX AB
row. The Slot window will appear on the screen; this is shown in Figure 5.32.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 5 – CREATING BASIC DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 5 - 20
Figure 5.32
In the example, we have five slots:

A four-hour slot for operational use (OP);

A three-hour slot for in theatre assets flights (IN);

A thirteen-hour slot for civilian and military flights (ALL);

A two-hour slot for in theatre assets flights (IN);

A two-hour slot for operational use (OP).
There is also another use for slots at an airport. It is possible to define the number or
aircraft per type of aircraft that the airport can accommodate during a specific time frame.
This procedure (that is the ICAO / FAA /EUROCONTROL approach) is currently under
discussion in the LOGFAS Users’ Group. The issue is highlighted in the Exercise which
deals with information updates at BENDEGUZ AP.
Updating Slot Definition
To update a Slot Definition, access the Slot Definitions table for the required location or
terminal as before.
When the table is on the screen, ACTIVATE the Cell for amendment and make the
required changes.
After completing the changes; CLICK on the Diskette Icon to save them to complete the
process and then close the Slot Definitions window.
Deleting Slot Definitions
To delete a Slot Definition, access the Slot Definitions table for the required location or
terminal as before.
When the table is on the screen, select the row or rows to be deleted and then click on
the Delete button as shown here in Figure 5.32.
Figure 5.32
The application will ask you to confirm the deletion. When this happens, CLICK on the
Yes button and the selected Slot Definition will be deleted.
Note: An EVE User should not delete a Slot Definition without consent of the EVE
Manager. Updates are permissible if stated in SOP.
SAVE the data you have modified, and CLOSE the table.
The Slot Definitions you have updated will now be available for you to view and use in
the FEP windows.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
CHAPTER 5 – CREATING BASIC DATA
Page 5 - 21
You are here
General
Introduction
Basic Data Table
GeoLoc Data
Forces and Items Data
Plans Data
Plans
Creating a Plan
Updating a Plan
Statement of Requirements
Allied Disposition List Data
Assets
Asset Types Data
Asset Fleet Data
Basic Data of EVE
Slot Definitions
Location Time Table Definitions Data
Default Routes Data
Notices Data
Mission Types Data
ATO Days Data
User-Defined Columns Data
Exporting and Importing Basic Data
Exporting from EVE
Importing into EVE
Exchange of data not Exported / Imported
Printing Basic Data from EVE
Exercises
5 - 1 Import Definitions
5 - 2 Update Notice
Location Time Table Definitions Data
Location Time Table (or Flowplan) Definitions are used to control and/or allocate the
planned activities within the operating constraints of the location or terminal in a
predetermined pattern. They allow the operators to control the number of asset arrivals
and departures at the location or terminal. They are used in the EVE Embedded View to
give an immediate look at the daily occupancy of a selected location.
A Location Time Table Definitions table consists of a predetermined set of columns
completed by the user, which are then linked to the selected location or terminal. The
detail required to complete the columns should be included in SOPs.
The Location Time Table should be part of the working database. The EVE Manager is
normally responsible for nominating all locations where Location Time Tables are
required and will usually preload them to the working database. If necessary and
authorised, the user can edit, insert and remove details of Time Table Definitions. The
method of importing Time Tables is described at end of this chapter. A full explanation is
given in The EVE Manager Guide.
Note: A Location Time Table Definition can be applied to any location to pinpoint
the number of arrivals and departures in a predetermined pattern for a specific
movement related activity. As an example, it could be used at a Border Crossing
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 5 – CREATING BASIC DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 5 - 22
point to indicate the number of convoys that can be accepted within a defined time
frame.
To illustrate the process we will edit Location Time Table Definitions for EQUINOX AB
(Loc Code ZZ0228) in BLUELAND. The example will show the number of assets that can
arrive and/or depart over a 24-hour period.
Remember that this example is to illustrate the process, which can then be applied to
display the individual location or terminal capability.
Editing Location Time Table Definitions
CLICK on the Basic Data menu and then SELECT the Edit Location Time Table
Definitions option, this process is illustrated in Figure 5.34.
Figure 5.34
The Pick Location window will open with a list of all locations having a Location
Timetable Definition set. To indicate the required location you wish to edit, SELECT the
Location. To do this DOUBLE CLICK the location that you would like to edit as shown in
Figure 5.35.
Figure 5.35
The Flowplan definitions for (location name) window will appear on the screen; a partial
view is shown in Figure 5.36 for EQUINOX AB.
Figure 5.36
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 5 – CREATING BASIC DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 5 - 23
Updating Location Time Table Definition
To update a Location Time Table Definition, access the Flowplan definitions table for the
required location or terminal as before.
When the table is on the screen, CLICK into the Cell for amendment and make the
required changes.
After completing the changes CLICK on the Save button to complete the process and
then close the Flowplan definitions table.
For the Tutorial, we will amend the existing Time Table for EQUINOX AB.

HIGHLIGHT the row J1 it as shown in Figure 5.37;
CLICK in the
first column to
select the row.
Figure 5.37

DOUBLE CLICK the cell in the third column to select the value;
DOUBLE CLICK the
cell to select the value.
Figure 5.38
 INSERT the number 4. CLICK the diskette icon to save data as shown in Figure
5.39. If not saved a red marker will appear in the first column of the modified row.
Figure 5.39
 SELECT the number we modified in J1 row, third column. RIGHT CLICK to get
access to the options. SELECT Copy option as in figure 5.40.
Figure 5.40
 SELECT the next three following cells in the same column. RIGHT CLICK in any
cell and SELECT Paste + Fill option as in figure 5.41.
Figure 5.41
 CLICK the diskette icon to save the data to avoid a red marker in the first column
of the modified rows.
CLOSE the Flowplan definition window.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 5 – CREATING BASIC DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 5 - 24
Deleting Location Time Table Definitions
To delete a Location Time Table Definition, ACCESS the Location Time Table Definition
for the required location or terminal as explained above.
When the table is on the screen, select the row or rows to be deleted and then click on
the Delete button, Figure 5.42.
Delete button.
Figure 5.42
The application will ask you to confirm the deletion. CLICK on the Yes button to confirm
and the selected Location Time Table Definition(s) will be deleted.
Note: An EVE User should not delete a Location Time Table Definitions without the consent of
the EVE Manager, but updates are permissible if authorised in SOPs.
The Location Time Table Definitions you have created will now be available for you to
view and use in the FEP windows.
Default Routes Data
Default Routes are used to control the traffic into and out of a specific location and over a
specified region. Their main use is for Air traffic. A Default Routes table consists of a
predetermined number of columns, defined in SOPs and completed by the user.
The EVE Manager is normally responsible for inserting Default Routes into the active
database. If authorised in SOPs, the user can edit, insert, and remove details of Default
Routes. Import procedures are described at end of this chapter. A full explanation is
given in The EVE Manager Guide.
Note: A Default Routes set can be applied to any location requiring routes for arrivals or
departure of assets to be specified. As an example, it may be used at a Border Crossing point
to indicate the desired itinerary of convoys within a given timeframe. Note also that: Routes
defined here have no link in the database or software calculations with routes created in
ADAMS or CORSOM and used by EVE in Flowplan.
To illustrate the process we will examine a Default Routes table for EQUINOX AB (Loc
Code ZZ0228) in BLUELAND.
Editing Default Routes
CLICK on the Basic Data menu and then SELECT the Edit Default Routes option, this
process is illustrated in Figure 5.43.
Figure 5.43
When you access the Pick Location window there may be a list of locations on view,
these are the locations that already have a Default Routes table created. See Figure
5.44.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 5 – CREATING BASIC DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 5 - 25
Figure 5.44
In the Location List view CLICK on the Location required and then CLICK the OK button.
The Default Flight routes and Entry points for EQUINOX AB window will appear on the
screen; this is shown in Figure 5.45.
Figure 5.45
In this case the window is the Default Fight routes and Entry points for EQUINOX AB.
To insert some Default Routes, CLICK on the Insert button, this is shown in Figure 5.45.
Comment: The Entry point is where the asset should be entering in the route to continue
its flight using this route. This information can be found on navigational maps as a
sample is shown in Figure 5.46 below where L24 is the Route and MASEV the Entry
Point.
Figure 5.46
This functionality can be used for other MOT using the same principles.
Updating Existing Default Routes
To update the Default Routes, access the Default Routes table for the required location
or terminal as before.
When the table is on the screen, CLICK into the required cell to make any changes.
After completing the required changes, click on the Save button to complete the process
and then close the Default Routes table.
Deleting Existing Default Routes
To delete a Default Route, access the Default Routes table for the required location or
terminal as before.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 5 – CREATING BASIC DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 5 - 26
When the table is on the screen, select the row or rows to be deleted and then CLICK on
the Delete button. This is shown in Figure 5.47.
Delete button.
Figure 5.47
The application will ask you to confirm the deletion. CLICK on the Yes button and the
selected Default Route(s) will be deleted.
CLICK on the diskette Icon to save the data. Once the table has been closed, the Default
Routes you have created will now be available for you to view in the FEP windows.
Note: An EVE User should not delete a Location Time Table Definition without consent of the
EVE Manager, but may update one if authorised in SOPs.
Notices Data
Notices are used to give information about a specific location or over a specified region.
The most common notice format is the Notices to Airmen (NOTAM) but the same
principles can be applied to any type of location or MOT.
A Notices Table consists of a predetermined set of columns completed by the user,
which are then linked to the selected location or terminal. The content included in the
Notices Table should be laid down in SOPs.
The EVE Manager is normally responsible for inserting Notices into the active database.
If necessary and authorised the user can edit, insert, and remove details of a Notice. The
method of importing is described at the end of this Chapter. A full explanation is given in
The EVE Manager Guide.
Note: A Notice set can be applied for any location where additional information
from external authorities may be required. As an example, it could be a notice
relating to a Border Crossing.
To illustrate the process we will edit the Notices table for EQUINOX AB (Loc Code
ZZ0228) in BLUELAND. The example shows some information concerning the taxiway at
the airport.
Remember that this information is provided only as an example.
Editing Notices
CLICK on the Basic Data menu and then SELECT the Edit Notices option, this process
is illustrated in Figure 5.48.
Figure 5.48
Once again it is necessary to select the location you require to edit the entry.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 5 – CREATING BASIC DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 5 - 27
Figure 5.49
When you access the Pick Location window there may be a list of locations on view, as
shown in Figure 5.49. These are the locations that already have a Notices Table created.
CLICK on the Location required, in this case the EQUINOX AB. The Notices for
EQUINOX AB will open as shown in Figure 5.50.
Figure 5.50
Updating Notices
To update notices, access the Notices Table for the required location or terminal as
before.
When the table is on the screen, SELECT the cell for amendment and make the required
changes.
After completing the changes CLICK on the Save button and close the Notices Table.
Note: Notice Data requires careful management, therefore SOPs should state who
is responsible for updating Notices at a particular location.
Inserting a New Notice at Location
To update notices, access the Notices table for the required location or terminal as
before.
When the location is on the screen, CLICK the Insert button and INSERT the new data.
After completing the required changes CLICK on the Save button to complete the
process and then close the Notices table.
Deleting Notices Data.
Normally, an EVE user should not delete a notice, because the notice may be linked to a
location that will need to be updated later. The EVE Manager should be consulted.
To delete Notices data, access the Notices Table for the required location or terminal as
before. Once the table is displayed, select the cells to be emptied. RIGHT CLICK to
open the dialog box, which is shown in Figure 5.51. You can click on the Cut option or
use the Ctrl+X function as shown in Figure 5.51.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 5 – CREATING BASIC DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 5 - 28
Figure 5.51
For the Tutorial we will exercise the Ctrl+X option. This is the recommended method,
because in case of an error when deleting you can restore data by using the Ctrl+V keys.
For the Tutorial we will practice this functionality.
SELECT the columns as shown in Figure 5.52. DO NOT SELECT the Serial. This must
remain, because it is the key used in the database and Type.
Figure 5.52
APPLY Ctrl+X combination from your keyboard.
Figure 5.53
You will see the Notice text remaining and note the red coloured marker in the first
column, which shows that a change has been made. The data removed can be restored
using the Ctrl+V keys, as long as you do not add new data to your clipboard.
The notices you have modified will now be available to view and use in the EVE View
windows.
Note: An EVE User should not delete a Notice without the consent of his EVE
Manager, updates are permissible if authorised in SOPs.
Mission Types Data
A Mission Types Table consists of a predetermined set of columns completed by the
user used to provide a standard Mission Types in FEPs, reducing the need for the
operator to input the same information time after time. The data can be adjusted and
applied to any type of location or MOT.
The creation and application of clear Mission Types in the FEP can also improve the
generation of accurate and detailed statistical and report data. This will be discussed in
more detail in Chapter 8.
For the Tutorial, we will examine a Mission Types table for the FEPs, which we will be
using later on.
CLICK on the Basic Data menu and SELECT the Edit Mission Types option, this process
is illustrated in Figure 5.54.
Figure 5.54
The Mission Type Editor window will appear on the screen as shown in Figure 5.55.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 5 – CREATING BASIC DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 5 - 29
Figure 5.55
All Mission types in the current database will be shown.
Mission Types should be part of your working database, prepared by your EVE Manager.
It is possible to edit, insert, and remove details of Mission Types. A full explanation is
given in The EVE Manager Guide. Mission Types can only be imported using advanced
techniques, which are beyond the scope of this Tutorial.
Note: An EVE User should not delete Mission Types without the consent of the
EVE Manager. Updates are permissible if authorised in SOPs.
ATO Days Data
Air Task (Tasking) Order (ATO) Days are allocated to specific dates in an operation.
Each ATO Day has a date assigned to it, which can then be used in communications
when it is not desirable to reveal actual dates. In EVE it is possible to switch between
the actual date and the ATO Day in the FEP views.
To illustrate the process we will examine the link between the actual date and the
assigned ATO Day. These will then be used for the FEPs in this Tutorial.
Remember that this example is to illustrate the process, which can then be applied to
meet the requirements of the operation.
CLICK on the Basic Data menu and SELECT the Edit ATO Days option, this process is
illustrated in Figure 5.56.
Figure 5.56
The Manage ATO dates window will appear on the screen. This is shown in Figure 5.57.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 5 – CREATING BASIC DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 5 - 30
The program
automatically
inserts the
selected dates.
The ATO Dates
references are
inserted.
Red or
Green
colours
indicate an
entry or a
change.
Figure 5.57
CLICK the Cancel button, this will close the Manage ATO dates window. The ATO Days
are available for you to use in the FEP windows and can also be used to create ATO
messages using the ATO template.
The Manage ATO dates content should be part of your working database, normally
prepared by the EVE Manager. When authorised, users may edit, insert, and remove
details of Manage ATO dates. A full explanation is given in The EVE Manager Guide.
ATO Date data can only be imported using advanced techniques, which are beyond the
scope of this Tutorial.
Note: An EVE User should not delete ATO Dates without the consent of the EVE
Manager. Updates are permissible if authorised in SOPs.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 5 – CREATING BASIC DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 5 - 31
You are here
General
Introduction
Basic Data Table
GeoLoc Data
Forces and Items Data
Plans Data
Plans
Creating a Plan
Updating a Plan
Statement of Requirements
Allied Disposition List Data
Assets
Asset Types Data
Asset Fleet Data
Basic Data of EVE
Slot Definitions
Location Time Table Definitions Data
Default Routes Data
Notices Data
Mission Types Data
ATO Days Data
User-Defined Columns Data
Exporting and Importing Basic Data
Exporting from EVE
Importing into EVE
Exchange of data not Exported / Imported
Printing Basic Data from EVE
Exercises
5 - 1 Import Definitions
5 - 2 Update Notice
User-Defined Columns Data
The EVE program has been designed to meet the requirements of the majority of users,
at the same time it is recognised that the needs of individual locations may vary.
Therefore, the program allows the creation of user-defined columns within certain
parameters.
Creation, Export and Import are beyond the scope of this Tutorial. EVE Managers are
trained to help users develop their own set-ups. The related documentation is available
in the EVE Manager Guide. However, we will examine an example of a User-Defined
Columns data set created for the FEPs used in the Tutorial.
CLICK on the Basic Data menu and then SELECT the User-Defined Columns option,
this process is illustrated in Figure 5.58.
Figure 5.58
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 5 – CREATING BASIC DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 5 - 32
The existing User-Defined EVE Columns window will appear on the screen; this is shown
in Figure 5.59
.
Figure 5.59
There is no limit to the number of User-Defined EVE Columns; they are inserted at the
end of Flowplan views, in the same order as in the User-Defined EVE Columns window.
CLICK the Cancel button.
Exporting and Importing Basic Data
The Basic Data falls into two categories:
 Shared Data: This is data that can be exported from and into a variety of
individual databases, and

Specific Data: This is data that is relevant only to the current database in use.
Shared data can be exported from one database and imported into another. Some of this
data will need to be exported/imported using a LOGFAS module other than EVE.
The following table lists the Basic Data Types and their characteristics:
Basic Data Type:
Shared or
Specific:
Format & File
Extension
Export/Import Module:
GeoLoc Data
Shared
XML
GeoMan
Force and Items
(including force
Profile and
Holdings files)
Shared
XML
Exported and/or imported with the
DDPs.
Plans
Shared
XML
Exported and/or imported with the
DDP / FEPs.
Asset Types
Shared
XML
LDM
Asset Fleet
Shared
XML
LDM
Slot Definitions
Specific
EVE slot
definition (*.esd)
EVE
Location Time
Specific
Table Definitions
EVE Flowplan
definition (*.efd)
EVE
Default Routes
Specific
EVE flight route
(*.efr)
EVE
Notices
Specific
TXT
* Not exported / imported
LDM
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
CHAPTER 5 – CREATING BASIC DATA
Page 5 - 33
Basic Data Type:
Shared or
Specific:
Format & File
Extension
Export/Import Module:
Mission Types
Specific
TXT
* Not exported / imported
ATO Days
Specific
TXT
* Not exported / imported
User-Defined
Specific
TXT
EVE (only EVE manager)
The instructions for exporting and/or importing data using the GeoMan and LDM are
contained in the ADAMS & LOGREP User Tutorials and partially in Chapter 2 of this
Tutorial.
Note: How to exchange data that cannot be imported / exported is explained in a
specific chapter in the LOGBASE Manager Guide and partly in the EVE Manager
Guide.
Exporting from EVE
To export data using EVE the basic process is the same for all types of Basic Data that
are listed in the table on the previous page as shared data and where the Export / Import
module is shown as EVE.
To export Basic Data from EVE follow the steps below:
 Step 1: Click on the Basic Data menu and select the appropriate Edit option. The
required table or format will appear on the screen.
 Step 2: If the data is location specific select the appropriate Location in the Pick
Locations window and then click the OK button (or DOUBLE CLICK on the Location
Name in the list view).

Step 3: Click on the File menu and then select the Export (data type) option.
 Step 4: The normal Windows Save As window will appear on the screen, here you
use normal Windows functions to give the File a name (or accept the default program
File name) and select the folder where to save.
Note: The appropriate File Extension will be added automatically.

Step 5: CLICK on the Save button, EVE will now export the selected data.

Step 6: CLOSE the Basic Data window that is on the screen.
For the Tutorial we will export the Slots Definitions that we saw at EQUINOX AB.
 Step 1: From the Basic Data menu SELECT the Slots Definitions option. The
required table will appear on the screen
 Step 2: SELECT the Location named EQUINOX AB in the Pick Locations window;
then CLICK the OK button (or DOUBLE CLICK on the Location Name in the list
view).
 Step 3: CLICK on the File menu and then SELECT the Export Slot Times option
as shown at Figure 5.60.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 5 – CREATING BASIC DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 5 - 34
Figure 5.60
 Step 4: SELECT the My Documents/ EVE Mail Out folder as the Save in location
and ACCEPT the EVE Default File name.

Step 5: CLICK on the Save button.
For the Tutorial CLOSE the Edit Terminal Flow-Plan Definitions window.
Importing into EVE
To import the data listed in the table on Page 5-34 as shared data and where the Export /
Import module is shown as EVE, follow the steps below:

Step 1: Close all Open windows (FEPs, Definitions etc).

Step 2: Click on the File menu and select the Import Definitions option.
 Step 3: The normal MS Windows Open window will appear on the screen; use
normal Windows functions to locate and select the File to be imported.

Step 4: Click the Open button. EVE will now import the data contained in the file.

Step 5: When the import is finished, EVE will display an Import complete window.
 Step 6: Click the OK button, the window will close and the data will be added to
your database.
For the tutorial we will import the routes to access to CALTROP AB.

Step 1: CLOSE all open windows (FEPs, Definitions etc).
 Step 2: From File menu SELECT the Import Definitions option as shown at Figure
5.61.
Figure 5.61
 Step 3: The normal MS Windows Open window will appear on the screen; here
you use normal Windows functions to locate and select the File to be imported.
ACCESS the EVE Mail In folder and SELECT the CALTROP AB_Routes.efr file.
 Step 4: CLICK the Open button. EVE will now import the data contained in the
file.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 5 – CREATING BASIC DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 5 - 35
 Step 5: When the import is finished, EVE will display an Import complete window.
CLICK the OK button, the window will close and the data will be added to your
database.
 Step 6: LOOK at Basic Data / Route for CALTROP AB that did not exist
previously.
From Basic Data menu, SELECT the Edit Routes option. You will see that the definitions
have been added to the database and can now be seen in the window.
CLOSE the window.
Exchange of data not exported / imported
As a general rule, all data in any field or columns or row can be copied and pasted in any
compatible module of MS Office Suite. However, the headers are not copied; this limits
the utility of the method for a simple copy.
For the Tutorial we will test this method for the ATO date we demonstrated.

Open ATO date dialog. Copy all the columns as shown in Figure 5.62.
Figure 5.62
 Paste it in Excel (97-2003) or in Notepad or use the Screenshot option seen in
Figure 5.62.

Then you can send the file to those concerned.
Note: Methods for dealing with data that cannot be imported / exported are explained in a
specific chapter of the LOGBASE Manager Guide and partly in the EVE Manager Guide.
Printing Basic Data from EVE
It is possible to print the Basic Data that is shown as Printable from EVE in the table
below:
Basic Data Type:
Printable from EVE:
GeoLoc Data
No (Use GeoMan)
Forces and Items Data
No (Use LDM)
Plans
No (Use LDM)
Asset Types
No (Use LDM)
Asset Fleet
No (Use LDM)
Slot Definitions
Yes
Terminal Flow-plan Definitions
Yes
Default Routes
Yes
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 5 – CREATING BASIC DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 5 - 36
Basic Data Type:
Printable from EVE:
Notices
Yes
Mission Types
Yes
ATO Days
No
To print the data listed follow the following steps:
 Step 1: CLICK on the Basic Data menu and SELECT the appropriate Edit option.
The required table or format will appear on the screen.
 Step 2: If the data is location specific SELECT the appropriate Location in the
Pick Locations window and then CLICK the OK button (or DOUBLE CLICK on the
Location Name in the list view).

Step 3: CLICK on the File menu and then SELECT the Print (data type) option.

Step 4: The selected data will now be sent to your default printer.
When you have the required data on your screen, it is possible to see a Print Preview of
the document and you can change the Print Set-up. Both of these options are available
under the File menu.
These options are standard MS Windows functions so we will not describe them any
further in this Tutorial.
EXERCISES
5.1 Import Definitions
To prepare for the next section of the EVE Tutorial, we will update our Basic Data with
some prepared files. This simulates the actions needed to update your database with
existing saved Basic Data.
IMPORT from your EVE Mail In folder the following Definitions files:
Figure 5.63
5.2 Update Notice
INSERT a new Notice
For Caltrop AB with the information in the following table:
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 5 – CREATING BASIC DATA
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 5 - 37
Field:
INSERT/SELECT
Serial
96CA-346/12
Type
Information
Start Date
05 Jan. 2012
End date
20 Jan. 2012
Weeks days
All days except Sunday
Start Time
10:00
End Time
19:00
Notice Text
ILS 08 SHUTDOWN FOR
MAINTENANCE
Apron
GCA available for MIL both 08/24
Publish all Notices
For CALTROP AB using the screenshot option; the result should be as shown
in Figure 5.64 configured for printing matter.
+
Figure 5.64
Insert a received notice.
For BENDEGUZ AP, using copy and paste try to insert the notices from an
Excel file that is in your EVE Mail In folder and called BENDEGUZ NOTICES.xls
This completes Chapter 5.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
CHAPTER 5 – CREATING BASIC DATA
Page 5 - 38
This Page Intentionally Blank
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 6 – USING EVE
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 6 – 1
Chapter 6 – Using EVE
You are here
General
Importing DDPS
Exercise 6 - 1
Starting EVE
Creating Flow Execution Plans (FEPS)
Exercise 6 - 2
Creating an FEP Directly In EVE
Exercise 6 - 3
Creating a Multinational FEP
Customising Your EVE View
Changing the Display Options
Updating Movements and Editing Fields
Exercise 6 - 4
Asset Movements History
Working with Mission View
Exercise 6 - 5
Gantt Tools
Exercise 6 - 7 Gantt Views
The Request & Manifest Views
Exporting and Importing EVE Data
Exercise 6 - 8
Comparing Missions and FEPS
General
This Chapter describes how to manage Flowplan data using EVE applications. This is
the main task of an EVE User working with the software installed on a workstation. The
database can either be shared or standalone. For the Tutorial we will use the standalone
mode. Any differences caused by use of a shared database, will be mentioned in the
relevant paragraph.
For the Tutorial we will work mainly with two types of plans in order to both improve
general understanding and to demonstrate the current use of EVE within Theatres and
HQs.
The first type, called the THEATRE MCC Plan, will demonstrate the activities required to
plan and manage planned flows. These are usual tasks within a theatre using assigned
assets (from Nations or civil contract);
The second, called the WEEKLY Plan is used to manage the daily movement of forces in
and out of theatre and the related internal movements. This is normally done by Nations,
requesting and assigning cargo and Pax to the missions.
We will examine the techniques required to merge both types of plan into a single
Flowplan, in order to gain a global overview and produce statistics.
The Tutorial will sometimes refer to the use of the EVE Website, which is currently under
development. It will be difficult to replicate web functionality in a Tutorial environment and
so it will not be possible to replicate some screenshots used in this document. At the
same time, the EVE Web is a valuable tool and it would be wrong not to refer to it.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 6 – USING EVE
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 6 – 2
In Chapters 4 and 5 we used a database to build our Preferences and customise our
Basic Data. In order to start from a clean, error-free database without operational data in
it, we will import a new database called LOGFAS_ EVE_USER_FOR_CHAPTER_6.
For the Tutorial ACTIVATE the LCM and IMPORT from the EVE Mail In folder the file
named LOGFAS_EVE_USER_FOR_CHAPTER_6.backup.
NAME it CHAPTER_6_[monthdate] and add a Description LOGFAS6.1; EVE Users
Chapter 6.
Once the database has been imported ACTIVATE the database. Your LCM should look
like Figure 6.1.
Figure 6.1
As discussed in Chapter 3, deployment planning is done using the ADAMS Planning
Module and RSOM planning is carried out using the CORSOM. When the deployment
plan is executed, there is a requirement to update the information to actually reflect the
updated dates and timings.
In addition, there is a need to control the movement into theatre; this particularly applies
when the level of traffic into an individual POD is restricted. The EVE Module has been
developed to meet these requirements.
The spreadsheet-based system of EVE allows changes to be made to reflect the
operating reality quickly and easily without the need to make any direct changes to the
original DDP.
An ADAMS DDP can be used as a source to create the EVE Flowplan. Alternatively, a
FEP can be generated directly in EVE and recognised by LOGFAS as a DDP. We will
show both methods in this Chapter of the Tutorial. In addition, we will show how an
updated FEP can be exported and imported.
Importing DDPs
The first method of creating an EVE Flowplan is to use an ADAMS DDP as the source
data. Therefore, the DDP has to be imported into the database and then converted into
an EVE Flowplan.
DDPs are imported into the database using the LDM and, under normal circumstances;
the control of such imports will be the responsibility of the EVE Site Manager with
detailed procedures outlined in SOPs. However, for the purposes of the Tutorial, it is
necessary to import a DDP to demonstrate the functions of EVE.
You should remember that the data created to support this Tutorial is generic in nature
and related to CRD. The real date of operation is not generally known during the
planning phase of an operation; consequently, there is a need to set the real mark date
against the DDP.
For the Tutorial the mark date will be 2 weeks prior to the date you are undertaking the
training. This is designed so that as you complete the EVE processes, the dates you see
in the windows will appear current. This means that the dates shown in some of the
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 6 – USING EVE
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 6 – 3
figures in this document will be different from those your screen. This will not affect your
progress through the Tutorial
Note: Normally in a real-world situation the mark date will be set by the
Operational Staff and inserted into LOGFAS by the ADAMS operator. The DDP will
be exported with the real planned dates for movements and missions. A structured
DDP should have all movements sourced and some of them should have assets
allocated.
Accessing the LDM
The LDM can be started from your Start / Programs menu or if you have the short cut
button folder on your desktop, by DOUBLE CLICKING on the LDM icon as illustrated in
Figure 6.2.
Using Start /
Programs menu
SELECT M&T
menu then LDM
Desktop Icon
Figure 6.2
The LDM window will open and the Menu/Tool bars as illustrated in Figure 6.3 will
appear on your screen.
Figure 6.3
Importing a DDP
Now we need to import the required DDP into the database.
For the Tutorial CLICK on the File menu and SELECT the Import option as shown in
Figure 6.4.
Figure 6.4
This will activate the Import Wizard and the window in Figure 6.5 will appear on the
screen.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 6 – USING EVE
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 6 – 4
Figure 6.5
The Import Wizard window allows you to indicate which file you want to import and the
update database options to be applied.
For the Tutorial, CLICK the Browse button and use normal Windows functions to locate
the file you want to import. In the EVE Mail In / DDP & Database_back_Up SELECT the
File named EVE_USERS_BROWNLAND.ddp .This is illustrated in Figure 6.6 below.
SELECT the
File to import.
Figure 6.6
CLICK the Open button and the path to the file will be inserted into the field in the Import
Wizard.
Now ACTIVATE the Add new rows and update (replace) existing rows option in the
update database section of the Import Wizard window. This is the default requirement
when importing DDPs, because the DDP name must be unique in the database.
At the foot of the Import window, there are two selections: LEAVE them UN-CHECKED
for the Tutorial.
Then CLICK the OK button and the data import will commence.
As the import of the data is taking place, you will be asked to select two naming options.
The first of these relate to the plan selection and the Plan Selection window as shown in
Figure 6.7 will appear on the screen.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 6 – USING EVE
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 6 – 5
Figure 6.7
This window gives you three options to choose from; these are:
Keep Original (Plan Name): If taken this option will keep the Plan name as it was
exported;
Create New (Plan Name): This option can be used to rename the Plan. For the Tutorial,
SELECT the Create New option, INSERT THEATRE MCC;
Use Existing (Plan Name): This option allows you to apply an existing Plan Name to the
data being imported.
Note: Before exercising these options the EVE Site Manager and/or SOPs should
be consulted.
CLICK the OK button. Next, the DDP Selection window shown at Figure 6.8 will appear.
Figure 6.8
The basic options for naming are repeated only this time for the DDP Name. Again, we
will SELECT the Keep Original name option.
The program will now complete the data import process. When the data has been read
into the computer, the Import status window as shown in Figure 6.9 will appear on the
screen.
Note: In the status column you should verify that there is no failed status. In the
case of a failure you are advised to take a screen shot and send it to the sender of
the DDP, Do not commit the bad data. You must CLICK on the Rollback button.
You can try to re-import when a clean file is received from the originator.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 6 – USING EVE
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 6 – 6
Figure 6.9
To complete the import process, you must Commit (save) the data to the database.
CLICK the Commit button. The Import status window will close and the import process is
complete.
Setting a Reference Date
In order to convert the data from the DDP to create the EVE Flowplan it is necessary to
have a reference date (Ref. Date) set against the planned timings of the forces in the
DDP that was set against a Zero Day.
Still working in the LDM, CLICK the Plans menu and SELECT the Plans option as shown
in Figure 6.10.
Figure 6.10
The Plans window will appear on the screen as illustrated in Figure 6.11.
VERIFY the information about
database.
Plan we created
during Import.
Figure 6.11
In the Plans window, SELECT the Plan named THEATRE MCC; this will be highlighted
as shown in Figure 6.11, now DOUBLE CLICK on the Row. Alternatively, you can
CLICK on the Record menu or RIGHT CLICK on the Row and then SELECT the Edit
option as shown in Figure 6.12.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 6 – USING EVE
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 6 – 7
Figure 6.12
The Edit Plan window will appear on the screen similar as shown in Figure 6.13. You will
see one of two results.
One is the Ref. date is not selected (this is how you should receive your Tutorial plan).
The reference date is greyed-out and the current date is shown.
Secondly is the Ref. date has already been entered and will be shown in black figures.
The tick box will have been activated. If this is the case refer to you EVE Site Manager
because this date will be used as a reference within the whole of the plan for all
movements.
SELECT
Date and
ACTIVATE
the Tick
Box.
ADD your remarks
Figure 6.13
In order to see the dates in the Flowplan and to make the instructions of the Tutorial
relevant, you should set a Ref. Date that is 14 days before the date you are following
the Tutorial.
CLICK on the Ref. Date combo box and a pop-up calendar will appear on the screen.
You can use your mouse to SELECT the required Ref. Date. This process is illustrated
in Figure 6.14.
Figure 6.14
When you have set the required date, CLICK on the OK button. The Edit Plan window
will close. Note that the Ref. Date is now set in the Plans window, as illustrated in Figure
6.15 and the date set will be used when converting the DDP into a FEP.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 6 – USING EVE
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 6 – 8
Figure 6.15
CLICK on the File menu and SELECT the Exit option. The LDM will now close.
Exercise 6 - 1
We will use this exercise to prepare the database for the next section of the Tutorial. The
files to be imported are contained in the EVE Mail In / DDP & Database_Back_Up
folder.
Part 1 – Importing DDPs
ACCESS the LDM and then CLICK on the File menu. SELECT the Import option and
IMPORT and COMMIT the following DDP File:
EVE_USERS_XM_Nations.ddp,
When you are prompted, SELECT Plan THEATRE MCC, KEEP the DDP names. We will
show how to change them in EVE.
Part 2 – Updating and modifying Plans
CLICK on the Plan menu and then ACCESS the Edit Plan window for the Plan named
EXAMPLE 2.
MODIFY the plan name as WEEKLY PLAN and INSERT date of 7 days before the date
you are following the Tutorial.
CLOSE your LDM module.
Starting EVE
Use the Start / Programs menu or if you have the short cut button folder on your desktop,
DOUBLE CLICK on the EVE icon illustrated in Figure 6.16.
Figure 6.16
When the EVE window is fully opened on your screen, you can access the various user
interfaces.
In common with all other LOGFAS modules, there are usually a number of different ways
of performing functions within the application. Most, but not all, abide by normal
Windows conventions. In general terms, there are three main interfaces with the
software, Menus, Toolbars and windows to update data.
An illustration of all of the available menus and toolbars is shown in Figure 6.17. You will
access the various options using the menus and toolbars later in the training.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 6 – USING EVE
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 6 – 9
Menu Bar
Icon Bar
Toolbar
Column.
The Movement Management View
Workstation
name
Type of
connection
Database
in use
Figure 6.17
Menus
The use of the menu bar within the application is perhaps the most straightforward way
of accessing functionality.
Each top-level menu gives access to a drop-down menu, which gives you further choices
or options. The menu items and options will be explained as we progress through the
Tutorial.
Shortcut Toolbar
Underneath the menu bar items there are shortcut toolbars. These contain a number of
icons; each of which controls a function explained by a label that can be seen by placing
the mouse cursor on it.
The icons are either displayed in colour or greyscale depending on whether or not they
are active. Icons in colour are active and available for use. If they are in greyscale, they
are inactive and therefore cannot be used with the function you are working with.
We will explain how to make use of the options provided by the toolbars as we progress
through the Tutorial.
Creating Flow Execution Plans (FEPs)
There are three ways of creating EVE FEPs, these are:

To use an existing ADAMS DDP in the database as the source.

To create a FEP directly in EVE.
Creating an FEP Using a DDP
As explained earlier, the ADAMS DDP is the Movement Planner’s data file. To create an
FEP from a DDP, you must first import the DDP file into your database using the LDM.
We did this at the start of this Chapter and during Exercise 6 - 1.
Note: Remember that the importation of DDPs may be controlled and you should
consult the EVE Site Manager or SOPs regarding this.
When EVE is opened on your screen, CLICK on the File menu and then SELECT the
Open FEP option. This process is shown in Figure 6.18.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 6 – USING EVE
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 6 – 10
Figure 6.18
The DDP Selection window will appear on your screen as illustrated in Figure 6.19.
SELECT the
DDP.
SELECT the
Plan.
Figure 6.19
In this window you can select the plan you want to work with and also the DDP you want
to access. For the Tutorial, SELECT the Plan named THEATRE MCC and the DDP
named BROWNLAND DEPLOY.
Now CLICK on the Advanced button. This will give you some additional options and your
screen should look like Figure 6.20.
Then
SELECT
the rename
DDP button.
Rename the DDP.
Figure 6.20
It is recommended that you give your FEP a new name. This will ensure that the original
DDP to be saved is not affected by any changes you make. In this case the original
BROWNLAND DEPLOY can always be imported un-changed from your EVE Mail In
folder.
For the Tutorial rename the selected DDP. TYPE the name BROWNLAND MCC in the
field and then CLICK on the Rename DDP button.
Note: Remember that you should have the original DDP file saved and stored in a
safe place or on your computer so that you can reload it at any time.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 6 – USING EVE
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 6 – 11
The application will now rename the DDP and the revised name will appear in the DDP
List view. This is illustrated in Figure 6.21.
The renamed
DDP.
Figure 6.21
SELECT the DDP named BROWNLAND MCC in the DDP List view so that it is
highlighted and then CLICK the OK button.
At this stage you can have two options:
The application will now ask you to initialise the EVE movements. The window (empty at
this stage) for this process is shown in Figure 6.22.
Figure 6.22
There is a great deal of information in this window. The most important part indicates
that if there are self-deployed or un-sourced movements in the DDP, they will receive an
artificially generated manifest request number and will then be stored in the database
and shown in the manifest request windows as DDP Generated.
Note: It may be better to refer poorly prepared plans back to the originator and ask
for planned movements, allocated assets and associated manifests to be
completed correctly.
If you are forced to continue with a partially complete DDP, ACTIVATE all the tick boxes
and CLICK the OK button. The application will create the FEP using the data from the
DDP and adding the missing asset entries.
The EVE Movement Management Window will appear on your screen. This is our case
because the BROWNLAND DEPLOY DDP was fine-tuned and filled with all required
data as illustrated in Figure 6.23.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 6 – USING EVE
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 6 – 12
Figure 6.23
The first time you open an FEP it is advisable to clear any selection criteria that may
have already been made. Then, you can set the criteria that you want for the work you
are doing.
CLICK on the Reset Criteria button. Be sure that in the Pick Locations From List combo
box the all locations option is selected or nothing may show, then CLICK on the Show
Movements button.
The Movements Management Window will now update and sort Movements by Serial
Order. If this is not the case on your display, CLICK on the Serial label to sort it in
ascending order as illustrated in Figure 6.24.
CLICK on
the label to
sort in
ascending
order.
Figure 6.24
All of the planned missions into and out of the locations in the plan are now displayed.
No dates and times are displayed because this is a new Flowplan and the system needs
to synchronise with the ADAMS mission timing.
CLICK on the File menu and SELECT the Synchronize with ADAMS Times option.
Figure 6.25
The Synchronize EVE and ADAMS times dialog will open as shown (completed) in
Figure 6.26.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 6 – USING EVE
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 6 – 13
Figure 6.26
You have three options:

The Close Window button will save the changes made and Exit the window.
 The Accept all button will allocate all the date/time data issued by the ADAMS
DDP, having set the Plan Day to the one defined in the Plan menu. Once accepted,
if you re-export the DDP all dates will be changed according to the set date.
 The Accept Selection is used when you enter data into an empty cell to indicate
that you have made a different choice from that proposed by the ADAMS
conversion.
For the Tutorial CLICK the Accept all button. The empty cells are now filled but you can
change individual cells later. CLICK the Close Window button. You can see that the date
/ time are set in your Movement Management window.
To save the changes in the Movements Management view CLICK on the Diskette button
as shown in Figure 6.27.
Figure 6.27
CLOSE the Flowplan.
Exercise 6 - 2
CREATE an EVE Flowplan using the DDP named EVE USERS XM NATIONS in
THEATRE MCC Plan. RENAME it as XM NATIONS MCC.
When you are prompted set the system so that all Self-deployed and Unsourced
movements are included in the EVE flowplan.
ACCEPT all synchronisation with EVE, if requested (this may not happen).
CHECK your results and CLOSE the Flowplan using the SAVE button.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 6 – USING EVE
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 6 – 14
You are here
General
Importing DDPS
Exercise 6 - 1
Starting EVE
Creating Flow Execution Plans (FEPS)
Exercise 6 - 2
Creating an FEP Directly In EVE
Exercise 6 - 3
Creating a Multinational FEP
Customising Your EVE View
Changing the Display Options
Updating Movements and Editing Fields
Exercise 6 - 4
Asset Movements History
Working with Mission View
Exercise 6 - 5
Gantt Tools
Exercise 6 - 7
The Request & Manifest Views
Exporting and Importing EVE Data
Exercise 6 - 8
Comparing Missions and FEPS
Creating an FEP Directly in EVE
The second method of creating an FEP is to generate one in the application. This
method is useful if you do not have a DDP or want to create an FEP for your own
planning purposes.
The FEP must be created and linked to a plan that is already in your database. In effect
you will be creating a empty DDP; at this stage it will have no movements, forces or
assets allocated within it.
We will create an FEP directly in EVE to demonstrate the process.
CLICK on the File menu and SELECT the Open FEP option. The DDP Selection
window will appear on the screen. To see all the available options CLICK on the
Advanced button.
Now we must select the Plan which we want to use to create the Empty DDP. For the
Tutorial SELECT the Plan named WEEKLY PLAN. INSERT the Name as SPECIAL MOV
in the field provided to create a new DDP as shown in Figure 6.28.
The newly created
DDP will be
inserted here.
Figure 6.28
Then CLICK on the Create new DDP button.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 6 – USING EVE
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 6 – 15
When the creation process is completed SELECT the DDP in the DDP List view and
then CLICK on the OK button.
The Movement Management Window as shown in Figure 6.29 will appear on the screen.
Figure 6.29
As you can see, there is no detail in any of the list windows except the data relating to
the Plan and the FEP names. This is because there is no data to be applied for this
FEP.
Note: You should note that when creating an empty Flowplan that Nation Filter and
Pick Locations by Nation is automatically set as per your Preferences.
We will insert some movements into this FEP later in the Tutorial.
CLOSE the FEP.
EXERCISE 6 - 3
CREATE an Empty DDP in the Plan THEATRE MCC and NAME it as COMBINE
FLOWPLANS.
SAVE it and CLOSE the FEP.
Creating a Multinational FEP
Creating a multinational FEP is done by combining two or more national FEPs into a
single one.
Note: Remember that the responsibility for the creation of multinational FEPs may
be controlled and you should consult the EVE Site Manager or SOPs regarding
this procedure.
The first step in creating a Multinational FEP is to have all of the required DDPs loaded
into your database. In addition, they must all have the same Plan name. You can create
this during the DDP Import process. It is preferable to rename the DDPs before
combining them.
The second step is to create an EVE FEP for each of the DDPs that are to be combined.
We did this earlier in the Tutorial for one of the DDPs and we did the second as an
exercise. The two Flowplans were saved in the THEATRE MCC Plan.
The third step is to add an empty FEP to the plan. The reason for adding the Empty FEP
is that if you combine an existing FEP with another, the program will delete the existing
data before adding the new data. Consequently, all you will have is the data being
added; with the original FEP data being lost.
The fourth step is to combine the required DDPs into the Empty or Dummy DDP we have
just created in exercise 6.3.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 6 – USING EVE
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 6 – 16
CLICK on the File menu and SELECT the Create Multinational FEP option.
process is shown in Figure 6.30.
This
Figure 6.30
The Combine national EVE flow-plans to Multi-national flow-plan window, as shown in
Figure 6.31 will appear on the screen.
List of
FEPs
when a
plan is
selected
Figure 6.31
In this window, first select the Plan you are working with, and then select the DDP from
the combo box to which the combined FEPs will be copied. Finally select the DDPs that
contain the FEPs which you wish to combine from the DDP List view.
For the Tutorial SELECT the Plan named THEATRE MCC, then SELECT FROM THE
COMBO BOX the FEP named COMBINE FLOWPLANS. Once this shows in the combo
box, SELECT the DDPs BROWNLAND MCC and XM NATIONS MCC in the FEPs to
combine window
When you have completed all of the selections your screen should look similar to Figure
6.32.
Figure 6.32
You can see the Note above the Multi-National FEP field; this is badly worded. This
means that, if the selected FEP already contains movements or missions, the data will
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 6 – USING EVE
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 6 – 17
be deleted, but the FEP name remains. This is the reason why we need to create an
empty dummy database for this process.
Now CLICK the OK button and the FEPs will be combined.
Because you are combining a number of FEPs there may be some conflicts of data. The
most common cause is that the same serial number has been applied in both FEP files.
EVE has some protection built in to ensure that you do not lose any data or information.
When EVE finds matching serial numbers in the FEPs being combined it will allocate a
new number to one of the Asset Missions. The program will also display an EVE dialog
explaining the deconfliction. An example of this dialog is shown in Figure 6.33.
Figure 6.33
CLICK the OK button each time this warning is displayed.
When the combining process has been completed, the program will display an Eve
dialog on your screen as shown in Figure 6.34.
Figure 6.34
The FEPs have now been combined so CLICK on the OK button.
The EVE dialog will close and you can now work with the combined FEP.
To explain what we achieved with this process of combining FEPs, we took a FEP for
BROWNLAND forces and combined them with the FEP for the movement of other Allied
Forces from their home stations to BLUELAND. If we wished, we could now open each
of the individual FEPs to look at the national movements or we could open the EVE MN
DDP and view them all in the same file.
We will look at these movements later in the Tutorial.
Customising Your EVE View
EVE is designed to be used by a number of different operators working at different
places and with a number of different requirements. Therefore, each individual may wish
to have a different set of columns on view or apply a range of colours for the various
stages of planning.
At some locations there may be a standard set of rules being applied so that all
operators are working in the same way. If this is the case, the EVE Site Manager and
SOPs should be consulted. This was explained briefly in Chapter 4 when we studied
Columns Preferences for Movements Management View.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 6 – USING EVE
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 6 – 18
Since it is impracticable to go through all the many different available combinations, we
will describe the principles in the Tutorial. You can use these principles as the basis for
creating your own customised views.
In Chapters 4, 5 and the start of chapter 6, we covered some of the features of the
Movements Management View. We will therefore not give any more explanation of these
features. We assume that the user is familiar with the basics.
First we must open an FEP.
CLICK on the File menu and SELECT the Open FEP option.
When the DDP selection window appears on the screen, SELECT the Plan named EVE
TUT 1, then SELECT the DDP named EVE PREFERENCES and then CLICK the OK
button.
The Movement Management window will appear on the screen. The window has been
split between Figures 6.35 and 6.36 for the purposes of the Tutorial document.
Display
Filters
Views
selection
Bar
Columns Preferences List
Specific
Location
Selection
Plan and FEP
open
Figure 6.35
Other
Selections
Columns
Display
Status
Display
Buttons
Options
Dates
selection
Figure 6.36
As shown previously there are a number of search selection criteria boxes available. In
addition, there are a number of Instruction buttons.
Let us look in turn at the Search Selection Criteria options available:
Search Selection Criteria:
Meaning:
Nation Filter
If you are working with a Multinational Flow-plan, you
can apply this option so that only the asset
movements of an individual nation are displayed.
Pick Locations from List
This option filters the Location view, so that only the
locations in the selected locations list are displayed.
Pick by Nation
This option filters the Location view, so that only the
locations in the selected nation are displayed.
Search Selection Criteria:
Meaning:
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 6 – USING EVE
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 6 – 19
Location
This is a list of the locations within the flow-plan.
In addition to picking from a Location List or picking
by nation, you are able to select individual or groups
of locations and only the relevant asset movements
will be displayed.
MOT
This option allows you to select individual or
combinations of MOT. The relevant asset
movements will be displayed.
Display
You can choose to display only the Arrivals, only the
Departures or both the Arrivals and Departures.
You should note that there is a specific view for
displaying the columns that apply to the arrival of
asset movements. This is named the Actual Time
Update View and will be discussed later in the
Tutorial.
You can set from and until date options to display the
asset movements for a specified time period.
You can choose to display the asset movements by
arrival status.
Operator
You can choose to display only the assets of a
particular operator as defined in the combo box list.
Mission type
You can choose to display only certain mission types
as defined in the combo box list.
To demonstrate some of the options available, we will access some of the asset
movements.
Displaying the Asset Movements
For this part of the Tutorial we will display the asset movements arriving and departing at
CALTROP AB in BLUELAND by the AIR MOT.
First CLICK the Reset Criteria button to clear any existing criteria settings.
Now, in the Location List view, SELECT the Location of CALTROP SP, then SELECT
the MOT of Sea and ACTIVATE only the Display Arrivals tick box.
Now CLICK on the Show Movements button. The program will load the asset
movements that meet the selection of these criteria and your screen will look similar to
the one in Figure 6.37.
Figure 6.37
At this stage do not worry too much about the detail in the data; it is the process that is
more important. The loading of the asset is not yet optimised and we will be able to add
Pax and cargo later in the Tutorial.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 6 – USING EVE
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 6 – 20
We could now apply one or more of the following filter criteria:

The Nation filter, to see the asset movements of an individual nation.
 A selection of different locations using normal Windows functionality to select
more than one location in the Location view.

To see more than one MOT.

To see both the arrivals and departures, or, as in this case, to show only one.

To see the asset movements between selected dates, by Status and Asset type.
 The options you select will depend on the task you are undertaking and what you
want to see.
For the Tutorial we will apply some options:
CLICK on the Dep Day (prev) header to sort by date;
HAVE a look at your window.
For the Tutorial DO NOT close the window; we will now look at the detail for other asset
movements and display options.
Changing the Display Options
There are a number of options available to the EVE operator to change how the FEP is
displayed. It is impracticable for all the options available to be explained individually in
detail in this Tutorial. However, most are self-explanatory. You can apply the processes
described here in principle, to create a customised FEP view that suits your needs. The
EVE Site Manager and SOPs should be consulted to see if there are any specific local
requirements.
We will deal with some examples of display options.
Changing the Time Zone Display
All multi-nation movements planning is carried out using Zulu Time (GMT/UMT) as the
reference, but it is possible to change the Time Zone being displayed in the FEP. This
allows you to display the local time for the POD location or theatre.
If not already accessed, OPEN the FEP named EVE PREFERENCES and SELECT the
AIR MOT. You will now see all the air movements in this FEP in the Asset Movements
window.
To select the Time Zone to be displayed CLICK on the Time Zone menu. This process is
illustrated in Figure 6.38.
Figure 6.38
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 6 – USING EVE
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 6 – 21
A black dot indicates the current or active Time Zone in the list and all of the Time Zones
of the world are listed.
You can now select the required Time Zone by clicking on it in the list. For the Tutorial
SELECT the Time Zone for GMT + 2 (Bravo) Eastern European Time.
The Time Zone menu options will close and the listed assets movements will have their
timings displayed relative to the selected time zone. If you were working in that particular
time zone, the asset movements will now be displayed in Local Time.
When exporting data from EVE, the file will identify the time zone being used and will
automatically make any adjustments required, so that the displayed times are in the
selected time zone on the receivers’ computer.
For the Tutorial SELECT Time Zone for +00:00 because Brownland and Blueland are in
the Greenwich Mean Time Zone.
Changing Colour Displays
The EVE User is able to change the colours displayed in a FEP except for those used in
the various Status Columns. The other columns can be changed in the following ways:


The background colour can be customised by:
o
Entire rows or columns,
o
Individual Cells,
The text colour can be customised by:
o
Entire Rows or Columns,
The main reason for using a customised colour system is to give a visual overview of the
FEP. For example, all completed Mission Call Signs could have their background colour
shown as green. This will give you an instant visual overview of which movements have
this process completed.
Note: The colour coding system to be used must be understood by all of the
operators at an individual location. The EVE Site Manager or SOPs should be
consulted to confirm local practice.
It is strongly recommended that individual users do not create their own colour schemes
unless agreed by all personnel concerned.
EVE allows you to change the individual elements as and when required or to use
automatic colours. However, only new asset movement entries will use the colour
scheme selected.
You should note that if you were customising the colours for existing asset movements in
an FEP, the elements (cells, rows or columns), which already exist would need to be
changed manually.
The basic process is the same, regardless of whether you are manually changing colours
or setting the automatic colours.
First you must access the required FEP and then select the element (cell, row or column)
you wish to customise. Remember, this can be the background and/or the text.
Manual Changes
For the Tutorial, we will continue to use the FEP named EVE PREFERENCES that is
accessed on the screen and use the Sea MOT.
For the Tutorial we will differentiate the chartered civil ships from those of the nation 99
Navy by changing the colour of their rows.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 6 – USING EVE
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 6 – 22
SELECT the 99 – Navy rows in the Assets column as illustrated in Figure 6.39.
CLICK the fist column
to select the row
Figure 6.39
Then CLICK on the Colour menu and SELECT the Background Colour option.
Remember that we could be applying the same process to the Text Colour option.
Figure 6.40
The Colour window will appear on the screen as shown in Figure 6.41.
SELECT the
colour Yellow
which can be a
standard or a
custom one.
Figure 6.41
If you intend to use a custom colour, it would be worthwhile adding the chosen colour to
Custom Colours palette. After selecting the chosen colour, you should CLICK on the
Add to Custom Colours button and the new colour will be stored in the Custom Colours
boxes in the window.
You can now choose the colour to be applied to the selected rows. For the Tutorial and
as illustrated in Figure 6.41, SELECT Yellow and CLICK the OK button.
SELECT any cell in the window and you will see that the selected rows now have a
yellow background. See Figure 6.42.
Figure 6.42
CLOSE the FEP and when you are prompted, SELECT No to changes option in the EVE
Dialog.
Now RE-OPEN the FEP named EVE PREFERENCES.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 6 – USING EVE
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 6 – 23
Automatic Colours Mode
Once the FEP has been re-opened, CLICK the Reset Criteria button and then SELECT
the Location of CALTROP AB and the Air MOT option. Now CLICK the Show
Movements button. The asset movements that meet the criteria will now be displayed in
the FEP.
If you want to Use Automatic Colours, which apply a colour scheme when something is
typed into the cell, select the cell where you want the scheme to be applied. You should
note that all cells in the same column will have the colour scheme applied automatically.
For the Tutorial SELECT the First Cell in the Notes column. Now CLICK on the Colour
menu and SELECT the Use Automatic Colours option as shown in Figure 6.43.
Figure 6.43
The Change Automatic colours window as shown in Figure 6.44 will appear on the
screen.
Figure 6.44
This window allows you to set the background and text individually or both at the same
time within a single window. For the Tutorial, we will only change the text colour. CLICK
the Change Text Colour button.
The Colour window shown in Figure 6.45 will appear on the screen.
SELECT the colour
Purple.
Figure 6.45
It is here that you select the colour you want to be applied to the background or text.
Remember, we are only changing the text colour at this stage.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 6 – USING EVE
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 6 – 24
Now SELECT the Colour you wish to apply, in this instance SELECT the Colour Purple.
We will add this colour to our custom colour selection.
CLICK the Add to Custom Colours, the colour will be added to the Custom colours
boxes. CLICK the OK button. An example of the colured text will be displayed in this is
the new style for updated cell display. Now CLICK on the Use this colour button.
The Colour window will close and the colour will be applied to the selected element each
time something is typed into a cell of the selected column.
Figure 6.46 shows an illustration of an FEP where Notes for B-737 assets have had a
medical note typed into them and the automatic colour has been applied.
Figure 6.46
If a red coloured marker appears in the left column, it indicates that you made changes in
your plan and that these have not yet been saved. We will not save any changes for the
moment.
To remove a background or text colour, follow the process as described and then
SELECT the white colour option for the background and the black colour option for the
text.
You should note that:
 If you want to have the colours applied to all cells concerned with Notes; select
them and apply the process for changing the text colour.

The cells with nothing typed remain blank.
 Changes apply automatically to all movements having the same Serial Number.
The information typed in the cell is repeated, whenever the serial is used.
CLOSE the FEP and when you are prompted, SELECT Yes to the changes option. This
is the reason why we did not save our previous changes. The decision to save changes
can be delayed until the user is sure that all tasks have been completed.
Now RE-OPEN the FEP named EVE PREFERENCES.
When the FEP is opened, CLICK the Reset Criteria button and then SELECT the
Location of ADELMAR AB and the Air MOT option. Now CLICK the Show Movements
button. The asset movements that meet the criteria will now be displayed in the FEP.
Displaying an Individual Selection of Columns
Note: Everything explained here applies equally to the Mission View and will be
explained later in this chapter.
The choice of column displays will depend on the location (monitoring, departure or
arrival site), the MOT, and the location function, be it a controlling or execution site.
These factors have already been discussed in Chapter 4.However, as a quick revision of
the work we will modify an existing setup and add it to our PREFERENCES.
It is possible that the PLANNED_AIR columns selections may not meet your needs, if
you are involved in the execution phase of an operation. We will modify the columns to
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 6 – USING EVE
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 6 – 25
meet the new requirement. The process can be repeated for any MOT Type, HQs,
individual or location.
Note: The column selection may be controlled by the EVE Site Manager or outlined
in SOPs. Both should be consulted before making an individual selection.
SELECT PLANNED_AIR in the Columns Tab of our Preferences Properties menu item.
If you do not have a list you should go to next action directly.
The PLANNED_AIR columns selection is now shown. We will modify it.
To select the columns to be displayed, the Pick the Columns you want to use window
has to be accessed. There are two ways to do this. Either CLICK on the View menu and
select the Pick Columns option, or, for the Tutorial, you can CLICK on the Pick Columns
button in the toolbar. This button is shown in Figure 6.47.
The Pick
Columns button
Figure 6.47
Either method will access the Please select the columns that you want to use window as
shown in Figure 6.48.
Figure 6.48
The ticks indicate the activated columns that are displayed in the Classic View using the
PLANNED_AIR set. We will introduce some changes.
Note: Please note that changes made in Figure 6.48 are for training purpose to
describe the process. You can adapt the process for your own use.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 6 – USING EVE
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 6 – 26
Figure 6.49
MODIFY the window as shown in Figure 6. 49; CLICK the Set as Preferred button.
After making the selection and as you were shown in Chapter 4, SAVE your selection to
file for future use.
CLICK on the Save To File button. The Save As window will appear on your screen. You
can now save your selection as an EVE View Settings (*.evs) file. First you must give
the file a meaningful name. For the Tutorial INSERT the File name of COLUMNS AIR
MCC, the file extension of *.evs will be added automatically. So the saved name of file is
Columns Air MCC.evs. Now select the location on your computer where you want to
save the file. For the Tutorial SELECT the EVE Mail Out folder we have been using
throughout the Tutorial and then CLICK on the Save button. When done CLICK the Set
as Preferred button.
Note: The actions set the columns to be displayed, not the display order or sort
order of columns. We will deal with these issues later in the Tutorial.
An extract of the Movement View is shown In Figure 6.50.
Figure 6.50
Changing the Order of Displayed Columns
In addition to picking the columns you want displayed in the FEP window, you can also
change the column order. We discussed the process in Chapter 4 and will not go in the
details. However, for the Tutorial we need to have a common setting.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 6 – USING EVE
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 6 – 27
The Change Column
Order button
Figure 6.51
SELECT the Change Column Order button. From the Column Order in Grid window,
CLICK the Load from File button. IMPORT the file named COLUMNS AIR MCC.eco that
is in your EVE Mail in Folder.
When done CLICK the Set as Preferred button and then CLICK the Green Tick button.
Making your columns change an automatic selection
As we did in Chapter 4, we can now implement a Column Preference for our previous
choices. This enables a quick reversion to the required format.
SELECT the first three mission rows in the Movement Management Window. CLICK the
F9 button on your keyboard. SELECT Columns tab. TYPE AIR MCC as Name for
layout. CLICK the Remember Current EVE Layout button. Now this layout is available.
Layouts which are no longer required can always be deleted.
CLICK the OK button to save and close your Preferences Properties window.
Locking the Columns
This function allows you to lock the first three columns on display in the FEP. If you have
a large number of columns that require you to scroll across the FEP window, these
columns will remain in place and provide you with a point of reference.
The locked columns will depend on the column display and order selection you have
made. If all the columns are displayed and are in the default column order, they will be
Nation, Serial and Callsign. There are two ways of accessing the Lock Column function:

You can click on the View menu and select the Lock Column option.
 Alternatively and for the Tutorial CLICK on the Toggle Column Lock On/Off
button. This button is shown in Figure 6.52
Figure 6.52
The Toggle Column Lock On/Off button can be used to activate or de-activate the Lock
Column function. When the Lock Column function has been activated, the first three
columns become greyed out in the FEP window as shown in Figure 6.53.
Figure 6.53
With the Lock Column function activated, the greyed out (locked) columns will remain in
place as you scroll along the columns in the FEP.
For the Tutorial, de-activate the Lock Column function; CLICK the Toggle Column Lock
On/Off button.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 6 – USING EVE
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 6 – 28
Sorting Columns
It is possible to sort the asset movement columns into a specific order, depending on the
task being undertaken.
Individual columns can be quickly sorted into ascending or descending order. For the
Tutorial CLICK on the column named Asset. This process is illustrated in Figure 6.54.
CLICK on the
Asset column
label.
Figure 6.54
You will see that the Assets are now shown in ascending order. When you sort a column
in this way, the remaining columns will be automatically adjusted so that the details of the
individual asset movements remain in the same row.
It is possible to carry out multiple sorting of the displayed data. You can click on the FEP
menu and select the Sort Asset Movement(s) option. Alternatively and for the Tutorial,
CLICK on the Sort Movements button in the toolbar. This button is shown in Figure 6.55.
Sort Movements
button.
Figure 6.55
When the button is activated, the empty Select the columns to order by window will
appear on the screen. This window is used to select the order you want the columns
sorted by, in ascending (the default with the tick box activated) or descending order (by
de-activating the tick box).
The column sort order that has been created can be saved by clicking the Save To File
button and can be reloaded at any time by using the Load From File button. Processes
are similar to the one used for the columns selection earlier. The file is saved as an EVE
Sort Criteria (*.esc) file.
You should note that the selected columns order could be saved within the database as
Set As Preferred by clicking on the appropriate button.
For the Tutorial we will create a selection so that the display will show Date/Time in
ascending order for the departure location.
CLICK the Sort Movements button. SELECT column and sort order as shown in Figure
6.56.
Figure 6.56
CLICK on the Set As Preferred and then OK button and the Select the columns to order
by window will close and the FEP columns will be sorted as required every time you
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 6 – USING EVE
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 6 – 29
open a new Flowplan. Sometimes it is necessary to refresh the view. To do this CLICK
the Show Movement button.
Changing the Date and/or Day Displayed
The Date and Day display options are selected in the View menu. CLICK on the View
menu and the options shown in Figure 6.57 can be seen in the drop-down box.
Figure 6.57
The current or active options are shown with a black dot against them.
The options provided are:


For Dates:
o
Show Julian Date: Displays the number of days since 1st January.
o
Show Textual Date: Displays the date in Day/Month/Year format.
For Days:
o
Show Calendar Day: Displays the days in the normal format.
o
Show ATO Day: Displays the allocated ATO days.
To change the displayed date or day, click on the required display option. The dropdown box will close and EVE will display the option selected.
For the Tutorial we will keep the default options as they were set in the Preferences
window.
Changing the Show Location Identified Displayed
The Show Location Identifier default option was set in the Preferences window in
Chapter 3. For Air movements, we set this as According to MOT and show the ICAO
code.
As these codes apply solely to airports, not everyone will know all the codes for all the
locations. You may need to change the way the location is displayed without having to
go back to the Preferences window.
With the ICAO code option selected all locations with the code will be displayed using the
ICAO code as the Location and next location. This is illustrated in Figure 6.58.
Figure 6.58
To change the way the location is identified, CLICK on the View menu and SELECT the
Show Location option you wish to apply. The options are shown in Figure 6.59.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 6 – USING EVE
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 6 – 30
Figure 6.59
The options are the same as in the Preferences window, they are:
 Show Location Identifier: This will display the LOGFAS Geographic Location
Code.

Show Location Name: This will display the name of the location.
 Show ICAO Code: This will display the four-letter ICAO code for the location,
which only applies to air installations.
 Show Location By MOT setting: This will display the locations as set in the
Preferences window, with each MOT having its own option.
For the Tutorial, we will SELECT the Show Location Name option. The arrival and
departure locations displayed in the FEP will now show the GeoLoc name of the location.
This is illustrated in Figure 6.60.
Figure 6.60
CLOSE the FEP on your screen. CLICK the Yes option when you are prompted to save
the changes you have made.
Note: Remember that customising EVE may be subject to controls. Users should
consult the EVE Site Manager or SOPs before making changes.
You are here
General
Importing DDPS
Exercise 6 - 1
Starting EVE
Creating Flow Execution Plans (FEPS)
Exercise 6 - 2
Creating an FEP Directly In EVE
Exercise 6 - 3
Creating a Multinational FEP
Customising Your EVE View
Changing the Display Options
Updating Movements and Editing Fields
Exercise 6 - 4
Asset Movements History
Working with Mission View
Exercise 6 - 5
Gantt Tools
Exercise 6 - 7
The Request & Manifest Views
Exporting and Importing EVE Data
Exercise 6 - 8
Comparing Missions and FEPS
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 6 – USING EVE
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 6 – 31
Updating Movements and Editing Fields
In the previous section of this Chapter, we have seen how some of the data can be
viewed. Now we will see how to update and create data. The topics covered in this
section are how to update a field (cell) in a Flow-plan:

By inserting the required information.

By using combo box options and short cut buttons.

Using the GANTT views.
Note: These procedures may be controlled at your location. Users should consult
the EVE Site Manager and SOPs before acting.
One of the advantages of the EVE application is the ability to update information in the
FEP easily and quickly. The updated information can be inserted into the FEP and then
viewed on a network installation or sent as a file by Internet or other transmission
medium.
The application allows the operator to change the information within the fields (or cells) of
the FEP. This is done either by typing the information into an individual cell, or selecting
the alternative data to be inserted from a list into an individual or selection of cells.
In addition, there are some predetermined views that allow the user to access a selection
of columns for updating to meet a specific purpose.
CLICK on the Open FEP option in the File menu, SELECT the Plan named EVE TUT 1
and then OPEN the FEP named FULLY SOURCED ALLIANCE DDP.
When the FEP has loaded, CLICK on the Reset Criteria button and then SELECT the
Location of FOL2 (AFB2) and the MOT of Road. SELECT the ROAD _PLANNED
Column option. Now CLICK on the Show Movements button.
Updating Cells by Inserting the Required Detail
To demonstrate these processes we will insert detail into Operator cells for the convoys
to FOL2 (AFB2) by inserting or selecting the required information.
For the Tutorial CLICK in to the first Operator cell and INSERT the name of operator that
is XNA Army;
If you are inserting the same detail into a number of cells, it is possible to use normal
Windows Copy and Paste functionalities. After selecting the information to copy, you can
click on the Edit menu and select the function required in the drop-down box. You can
also use your keyboard, hold down the Ctrl or control key and press the required function
letter or you can right-click on the information. The Edit menu options are shown in
Figure 6.61 and you can also see the keyboard codes.
6.61
Now, you can paste in the following cell or select the two cells below and apply Paste +
Fill option. You should note that the colour of the text is the same that we implemented
previously in the section Change Colour Display for the operator column.
For the Tutorial, there is a change in our Flowplan so that the convoy will go to LARADO
after leaving FOL2 (AFB2). We will implement the change.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 6 – USING EVE
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 6 – 32
CLICK in to the first NEXT LOC cell that is currently set with CALTROP SP; we are
going to insert the required location, which is LARADO. This detail can be added in one
of the following ways:

DOUBLE CLICK in the Field, this will access the Select Location window and
you can choose the location to insert.

INSERT the name or part of the name of the location, and then CLICK away
from the cell. The program will eventually warn you that it cannot find the location.

CLICK the OK button and this will access the Select Location window and you
can choose the location to insert. If the name is in database, it will be inserted.

CLICK on the Select Location (Globe) short-cut button, this will access the
Select Location window and you can choose the location to insert.
Figure 6.62
For the Tutorial INSERT the Name LARADO to overwrite CALTROP SP in column NEXT
LOC. Then Copy and Paste in the next three cells.
Remember that we are showing a process; so do not worry about the reality. Your
screen should look as Figure 6.63.
Figure 6.63
You can follow this basic principle to insert and change data as required. The method
used will depend on the type of data to be inserted in to the cell.
SAVE the input using the diskette button.
Updating Cells Using Combo Box Selection
In various columns of the EVE views there are Combo Box selection options that will give
you access to a list of alternatives. You can pick from these to make the changes
needed. The list options in these combo boxes have been agreed and use standard
terminology.
To change the detail in one of these boxes, click on the combo box button on the right
hand side of the cell and then select the option you want to apply.
For the Tutorial we will change the status of the road movements we have just modified
to show the use of Dep. Status Combo box.
CLICK on the Combo Box button in the first cell in the Dep Status column. You will now
see the options you have to choose from; some are shown in Figure 6.64.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 6 – USING EVE
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 6 – 33
Figure 6.64
Clicking on the required option in the list will change the detail in the cell as illustrated in
Figure 6.65 where we set a different option at each row, for tutorial.
Figure 6.65
For the Tutorial SELECT the Combo Box option for all cells in Dep Status (prev) column.
SAVE the input.
You can use this methodology to change the detail in any cell that has a combo box.
Note: The standard Windows Copy and Paste functions apply to these combo
boxes.
You are here
General
Importing DDPS
Exercise 6 - 1
Starting EVE
Creating Flow Execution Plans (FEPS)
Exercise 6 - 2
Creating an FEP Directly In EVE
Exercise 6 - 3
Creating a Multinational FEP
Customising Your EVE View
Changing the Display Options
Updating Movements and Editing Fields
Exercise 6 - 4
Asset Movements History
Working with Mission View
Exercise 6 - 5
Gantt Tools
Exercise 6 - 7
The Request & Manifest Views
Exporting and Importing EVE Data
Exercise 6 - 8
Comparing Missions and FEPS
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 6 – USING EVE
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 6 – 34
Exercise 6 - 4
CLICK the Reset Criteria button.
SELECT Sea as MOT and the location named CALTROP SP; LEAVE PLANNED ROAD
in Columns list; CLICK the Show Movements button.
UPDATE all cells in Dep Status (prev) column with the Departed option.
SAVE the input.
Updating Cells Using the Change Function
The Change function applies equally to assets and locations. It can also be used to
insert detail where none already exists.
You should note that there are toolbar buttons for each of these functions; they are
shown in Figure 6.66.
Change
Asset(s)
button.
Figure 6.66
Change
Location(s)
button.
Change Location
This is a preset method to change location using the Location Change function. For the
Tutorial, we will implement a change from CALTROP SP to ARUMBULO SP, which has
the capacity to load/unload ammunition and berth ships with side ramps. It will not make
global changes to our plan because ARUMBULO is only 50 km South of CALTROP SP.
CLICK the Reset Criteria button. SELECT the Sea option as MOT. CLICK the Show
Movements button. All sea movements are on your screen.
For the Tutorial CLICK on the FEP menu and SELECT the Replace Location in all
Movements option as shown in Figure 6.67.
Figure 6.67
An EVE warning dialog will appear. CLICK the OK button.
Figure 6.68
The Pick Locations window will now appear on the screen. What you have to pick is the
location to be replaced. You should note that all locations by alphanumeric order within
the Flowplan will be seen; SELECT the CALTROP SP Location as shown in Figure 6.69.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 6 – USING EVE
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 6 – 35
Figure 6.69
An EVE warning dialog will appear. CLICK the OK button.
Figure 6.70
Now you can select and/or insert the required search criteria, SELECT the Nation 096:
ZZ BLUELAND, the Location Type of Seaport and eventually the first letters ARUM.
Then CLICK on the List Locations button.
The locations that meet the search criteria will now be shown in the Locations List view.
Now SELECT the new location, in this case ARUMBULO SP. Figure 6.71 shows the
search criteria applied and location selected.
Figure 6.71
CLICK the OK button. An EVE warning dialog will appear, CLICK the OK button.
Figure 6.72
There is no need to close and re-open the Flowplan. CLICK the Reset Criteria button
and CLICK the Show Movements button with Sea MOT selected. You can see that the
location has been changed in the Flowplan for all related mission movements.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 6 – USING EVE
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 6 – 36
Figure 6.73
SAVE the input and CLOSE the current Flowplan.
Note: Unlike ADAMS, EVE does not recalculate the times of movements.
Recalculations should be done in the in the Mission Window. Such changes will be
discussed later.
These processes can also be used to change Asset Types in the appropriate cells.
Change Status of Asset Movements
We have already seen that it is possible to change the Status of an Asset by selecting
the required option in the appropriate combo box list.
For the most common Asset Status options, there are toolbar buttons that allow you to
change the status of one or more selected asset movements at the same time. When
this is used, the same status is applied to all the selected Mission Legs.
The toolbar buttons allow you to set the status columns of the selected asset movements
to:

Booked: by clicking on the Book button.

Cancelled: by clicking on the CNX button.

Delayed: by clicking on the Delay button.
These toolbar button options are shown in Figure 6.74.
Booked
button.
Cancelled button.
Delayed
button.
Figure 6.74
To change the status of the asset movements, select the rows with the asset movements
you want to apply the status to and then click on the appropriate status button. All the
selected rows will have the status of the asset movements updated.
To-day (Go to) and Actual Position Update View (ACT) buttons
The ACT and To-day buttons allow the operator to update and monitor details on an
individual or selection of Asset Movements, using the default selection of columns from
the open view.
The table at Figure 6.75 shows in which views these buttons can be used.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 6 – USING EVE
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 6 – 37
View
ACT To-day
Classic View - CV
X
X
Embedded View - EV
X
X
Mission Centric View - MV
X
Tracking View -TV
X
X
Manifest View - MAN
X
Request View - REQ
X
Figure 6.75
The To-Day (Go to) button
Notwithstanding the current view, this button works similarly in all views. To work with the
To-day button from the current view, you should CLICK on the To-Day button as shown
in Figure 6.76.
Figure 6.76
CLICK the Today button.
The screen will be updated to today’s date but will not change the columns display. We
will experiment with this function.
For the Tutorial OPEN the BROWNLAND MCC Flowplan in the THEATRE MCC Plan.
CLICK the Reset Criteria button and CLICK the Show Movements button with Road as
MOT and the ROAD_PLANNED column selected. All the road movements will appear.
CLICK the To-day button. Only the movements for today are shown; for the writing date
of this Tutorial it was 24 August 2011.
Figure 6.77
The To-Day function is an easy way to see all movements which occur on the current
day.
Working with the To-day button does not change the current view. It can be dismissed by
using the Reset Criteria and Display Movements buttons.
For the Tutorial we will return to a normal Classic View window. CLICK the Reset Criteria
and Show Movement buttons.
Actual Position Update View (ACT)
The use of this button adds Actual Date / Time columns after each of the Estimated Date
/ Time columns.
We will examine this functionality. For the Tutorial SELECT Road MOT, PLANNED
ROAD Columns, CALTROP SP as location, LEAVE dates un-ticked. CLICK the Show
Movement button. Your window should look similar to Figure 6.78.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 6 – USING EVE
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 6 – 38
Figure 6.78
CLICK on ACT Button; you will see that ATA and ATD were added after the ETA and
ETD respective columns as shown at Figure 6.79.
Figure 6.79
For the Tutorial CLICK the Reset Criteria button then the Show Movement button.
It may be more efficient to create a Columns Preference for the actual/Time and Date.
Examples (ACTUAL DATE_TIME.evs and eco) are stored in your EVE Mail In folder and
can be imported and adjusted as a Column Preference. Result is shown in figure 6.80
Figure 6.80
You can now update the cells.
CLOSE the FEP. DO NOT accept any changes if asked
Exercise 6 - 5
CLICK on the Open FEP option in the File menu, SELECT the Plan named EVE TUT 1
and then OPEN the FEP named FULLY SOURCED ALLIANCE DDP.
When the FEP has loaded, CLICK on the Reset Criteria button and then SELECT the
Location of ARUMBULO SP and the MOT of Sea. SELECT the SEA_PLANNED Column
option. Then CLICK on the Show Movements button.
To reflect the change of Seaport we implemented previously, CHANGE the Actual Time
of Arrival to new values of your own choosing. Figure 6.81 shows some examples of
changes made.
Figure 6.81
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 6 – USING EVE
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 6 – 39
SAVE your changes.
Asset Movements History
EVE maintains a record of the changes made to an asset movement from the time the
mission is first entered into the FEP. Each entry is known as a version, with the current
version being shown last.
Note: At present this function is only available if the FEP is opened in the Classic
View (View).
To show the history for an asset movement, or selection of movements, SELECT the
Movement(s) required in the Asset Movements window. Now CLICK on the View menu
and SELECT the Show History option.
Alternatively, and for the Tutorial you can CLICK on the Show History button shown in
Figure 6.82.
Show History button.
Figure 6.82
You will remember that we changed some of the data within this Flowplan such as
locations, timing and status.
SELECT the first mission and CLICK the Show History Button. You should get a history
similar to that illustrated in Figure 6.83. It may be different in terms of dates and times
depending on the actions which you took.
Figure 6.83
Rows with a green background show the detail inserted when the Mission was created or
imported in the FEP, no matter how it was inserted. The number 1, in the left column
indicates that this was the first version.
As missions are changed and updated a new row is added for each version and these
are numbered in sequence. Changes made have a red background to identify them
easily. The window also records the Log-in details of the operator who made the
changes and the date and time it was made.
You can track changes to the selected asset movement from version to version, with the
current version being shown last in the list.
CLOSE the EVE Flowplan History window by CLICKING on the File menu and SELECT
the Close Window option.
Working with Mission View
Having created or imported an FEP in the database, there may be a need to insert,
populate, update or delete an asset movement or mission.
For this purpose, we will use the WEEKLY PLAN and the SPECIAL MOVE Flowplan
created at beginning of this Chapter during the exercises. We will add a new Brownland
unit deploying to EQUINOX AB from its home base in Brownland, using the following
steps:

We will import a mission based on the request created in Chapter 4.

We will insert a new mission.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 6 – USING EVE
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 6 – 40

We will modify the schedule.

To support the unit, we will create a channel flight (2 rotations per week).

Later we will use Cargo and Pax Requests to populate the flights.
Importing a Mission from Template
OPEN the FEP named SPECIAL MOVE. There are no missions at this stage. In chapter
4, we learnt how to populate a ROAD MRF. We will use it to Import our first mission.
SELECT EVE MRF ROAD from the Template list. CLICK the IN button as shown in
Figure 6. 84.
Figure 6.84
The system will ask you to find a suitable Asset type because it does not recognize it.
Figure 6.85
The Please select the asset(s) type you want to use window will open.
Figure 6.86
CLICK the Yes button at next dialog.
Figure 6.87
There will be a new question from Eve showing that it did not recognize the GeoLoc in
the database.
Figure 6.88
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 6 – USING EVE
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 6 – 41
CLICK on the Yes button to search for the location. This will open the Pick Locations
window. Use the techniques practised previously we can find the required GeoLoc in the
database.
Figure 6.89
SELECT GEZA AP and CLICK the OK button; at next question from EVE dialog, CLICK
the Yes button.
Figure 6.90
The movement is inserted and specified as requested. Do not worry about the date
which is shown. At the time of writing it was August 2011. For you it should be the date
that you put in your request. CLICK on the diskette icon to save the entry. The Serial
Number of the mission will be created by the software as shown at figure 6.91.
Figure 6.91
Edit Mission in Mission Editor
Now we will have a quick look at the mission editor. DOUBLE CLICK in the first column
of the mission that you wish to edit as shown in figure 6.92.
Figure 6.92
The Mission Editor window will open as shown in Figure 6. 93.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 6 – USING EVE
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 6 – 42
Detail from the
header of MRF
You can update the information by typing in or using
the list selections
Leg Requested
All legs will be
deleted
You can manage
the columns in
mission view
Buttons to insert or delete legs
Figure 6.93
CLICK on the Cancel button. This will close the Mission Editor window.
Insert a new mission.
We will complete the unit movement by inserting a new Air mission to fly from GEZA AP
to EQUINOX AB, moving an Engineer Platoon (named LEZA).
There are two ways of inserting an asset movement into the current FEP.
You can click on the FEP menu and select the Insert Asset Movement(s) option.
Alternatively and for the Tutorial, CLICK on the Insert Asset Movement button on the
toolbar as illustrated in Figure 6.94.
Insert mission
button.
Figure 6.94
The Mission Editor window will appear on the screen as shown in Figure 6.95.
CLICK on the
Mission Editor
Legs Column
Selection button.
CLICK the Insert
at Top button.
Figure 6.95
We can now insert the detail required. CLICK on the Insert at Top button and a new
mission leg row will be added to the window.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 6 – USING EVE
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 6 – 43
However, it could be wise to use the column selection and column order selection tools
to create specific data requirement options so that we can work with a reduced and
adapted number of columns.
For the Tutorial CLICK on the Mission Editor Legs Column Selection button that is
shown at Figure 6.93, then CLICK on the Load from File button and access the EVE Mail
In folder and then OPEN the File named MISSION EDITOR COLUMNS.mel. After the file
has loaded CLICK on the Set as preferred and the OK buttons.
Now we can complete the detail that is required for the mission and MOT to be applied.
These will be applied to all mission legs and displayed in the FEP.
For the Tutorial INSERT the following Detail:
Field:
INSERT / SELECT:
Serial
LEAVE empty
Nation
99
Mission Type
Military Strategic AC
Operator Nation
99
Date requested
Accept the default minus 7 days
Version
1
Asset Type
C-130 TUT (You should browse the list)
Asset
C130-TUT 001 (You should browse the
list)
As you will notice there is no requirement to complete all the fields, only those that apply
to the mission, asset type and MOT. Now we will insert the movements detail:
Field:
INSERT / SELECT
Leg
Number is inserted automatically
Callsign
Leave blank
From:
SELECT GEZA AP (ZZ0013). This is in
Nation ZZ: 99 BROWNLAND.
To select the required location (at all location fields):
You can insert manually the name. If the name is known in database, EVE will accept it
and you can go to next cell. If the name is not known the Pick Locations window will
appear on the screen.
Or DOUBLE CLICK in the Location Field and the Pick Locations window will appear on
the screen.
As you can see all the locations currently used in the current FEP. If the required location
is listed you can choose it.
Alternatively, if the location is not in the list the various filters can be applied to it. We
have done this before.
For Tutorial CLICK on Reset criteria, SET Location name GEZ as Starts with, SELECT
Airports as Location Type then CLICK the List Locations buttons. You will see all of the
locations in database as shown at Figure 6.94.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 6 – USING EVE
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 6 – 44
Figure 6.94
CLICK the OK button. The selected location will then be inserted into the activated
location field. We will now continue with the remaining fields:
Field:
INSERT / SELECT
EDD (Estimated Day of Departure)
INSERT a date that is 5 days later
than the request date.
ETD (Estimated Time of Departure)
INSERT 11:00
Pax Embarked
INSERT 30
Cargo Loaded
INSERT 4 000
Dep Status
SELECT Booked
To
SELECT EQUINOX AB
(This location is in BLUELAND)
EDA (Estimated Day of Arrival)
EVE inserts the same date as the
Departure Day
ETA (Estimated Time of Arrival)
You can INSERT a different time
than the one calculated by EVE
Arr Status
SELECT Booked
Units
INSERT LEZA
Pax Disembarked
INSERT 30
Cargo Unloaded
INSERT 4 000
Fuel Amount
INSERT 8000
We will now create an empty return flight leg. CLICK the Insert at Bottom button and a
new Mission Leg row will be added in the Mission Editor window.
Add the following detail:
Field:
INSERT / SELECT
Leg
Number is inserted automatically
Callsign
Leave blank
From:
Inserted automatically, in this case
EQUINOX AB.
The program logically assumes that the asset must depart from its point of arrival in the
previous leg.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 6 – USING EVE
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 6 – 45
Field:
INSERT / SELECT
EDD (Estimated Day of Departure)
INSERT a date that is 6 days later than
the request date.
ETD (Estimated Time of Departure)
INSERT 06:00
Dep Status
SELECT Booked
To
SELECT GEZA AP (ZZ0013). This is in
Nation ZZ: 99 BROWNLAND.
EDA (Estimated Day of Arrival)
You can INSERT a different date than
the one calculated by EVE
ETA
You can INSERT a different time than
the one calculated by EVE
(Estimated Time of Arrival)
Arr Status
SELECT Booked
Pax Embarked
INSERT 0
Tons Loaded
INSERT 0
Your screen should appear as shown in Figure 6.95, only the dates will be different.
Figure 6.95
After inserting the required detail, CLICK the OK button and the Mission Editor window
will close and the data saved in the database.
The new mission will be added to the FEP, including the generated Mission Serial. An
illustration of the asset movements is shown in Figure 6.96, including the one we
imported.
Figure 6.96
It is possible that the time of the requested road movement will slip due to the aircraft
booked timing. We will do this as an exercise later.
Remember, you can apply this process to create mission legs for any type of Asset
and/or MOT.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 6 – USING EVE
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 6 – 46
The Mission Editor Windows
DOUBLE CLICK on the TUT 0002 air mission to access the Mission Editor window. We
will examine the tabs and functionality available in detail.
The Mission Editor window consists of a number of data entry fields. These are all at the
top of the window. Into these, you can insert detail that applies equally to all of the
individual movements displayed. We showed this when we entered the mission legs.
In addition the Mission Editor has a number of individual windows or Tabs. These are:
Points Of Contact: Here the contact details can be inserted for the asset owner (this
can be military or civilian) and the asset user, the person responsible for the asset. This
normally will be the details of the nation’s charter party or movement control office.
When new missions are being added using the Movement Request Form format, the
detail can be added automatically from the MS Excel Movement Request Form, if it is
correctly set. This process was described in Chapter 4.
An example of the Points of Contact window is shown in Figure 6.97.
Green Colour
indicates new
entries
Figure 6.97
For the Tutorial TYPE IN the data as shown at Figure 6.97, we will look at this in more
detail later.
Now CLICK the Passenger List tab.
Passenger List: In this window a list of the passengers can be added and linked to the
individual mission legs of the asset. An example of the Passenger List window is shown
at Figure 6.98.
You can Add Pax manually.
You can Import and/or
Export Pax Lists.
Figure 6.98
If the passenger is not in the Passenger List, CLICK on Add Pax button. Then in the new
line TYPE all information as at Figure 6.98.
Note: The 30 PAX will be added using the Request View later in this Chapter.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 6 – USING EVE
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 6 – 47
Passengers can also be added to the mission from the Request and Manifest Views, by
direct import to the mission or manually added. Export formats can be made from the
Passenger List window in the required manifest format.
Under normal circumstances, Pax should be added using the Request view; this will be
explained later in the Tutorial.
Note: The EVE Manager should normally provide all templates for Exporting /
Importing Pax. These should be integrated in the Preferences / Templates options.
For the Tutorial we will export the row of the unique passenger shown at Figure 6.98.
This passenger is planned to use the returning leg. SELECT EVE MANIFEST PAX as
shown at Figure 6.99. CLICK the Out Button.
Figure 6.99
EXPORT to your EVE Mail Out Folder and HAVE a LOOK at the exported file that will be
in your EVE Mail Out Folder with a name such as PAX Date / Time.xls. Remember that
you can customise and use this Tutorial template for your own needs.
Cargo Manifest: In this window details can be added for cargo to be carried on the
individual legs of the mission. An example of a Cargo Manifest window is at Figure
6.100.
You can Add and/or Remove Cargo
from Force Profile and Holding files.
You can Add
Cargo manually.
You can
Remove Cargo.
You can Import
and/or Export
Cargo Lists.
Figure 6.100
CLICK the Add Cargo button. A new line will be inserted which will need completion. Use
the detail in the following table to complete the required information.
Field:
INSERT / SELECT
Quantity
3
English Item Name
IED Robot
Item Name
IED Robot.
As you insert the item name EVE will check the database and if the item is not
recognised the field gives you access to the LOGFAS Item Editor so that the required
detail can be added. An EVE NIC is automatically generated.
An example of the Item Editor window is shown at Figure 6.101.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 6 – USING EVE
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 6 – 48
Figure 6.101
For the Tutorial we will insert the required details into the correct fields.

INSERT RIC of LE33ZZ

Nation of 099 ZZ: Brownland

Proper Shipping Name of ELECTRIC POWERED VEHICLE

The Item Type should be Equipment

The Unit of Supply is to be Each

The Dimensions and Weights are shown in Figure 6.102
Figure 6.102
CLICK on the OK button and the Item Editor window will close and the detail inserted will
be now shown in the Cargo Manifest window.
We will now complete the remaining fields in the Cargo Manifest window using the detail
shown in the following table:
Field:
INSERT / SELECT
Booking Status
Booked
Leg Embarked
99GZ that is GEZA AP
Leg Disembarked
96EQ that is EQUINOX AB
Other data
As proposed by EVE; it can be
modified by typing into the cells.
Figure 6.103 shows the row completed. CLICK on the Save button provided in the Cargo
Manifest window.
Figure 6.103
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 6 – USING EVE
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 6 – 49
It is also possible to Add Holdings from a Force Profile and Holding file. However, the
normal way is to use the Request View. We will not add ADL holdings as this plan does
not contain an ADL. But the method is:

CLICK on the Add Holdings button and the Select from Force Holdings window
will appear on the screen. The items contained in the ADL or in a Force Profile can be
added directly to the Cargo List. An example of the selection window with an item
selected from I Mech Infantry Bn is shown at Figure 6.104.
Figure 6.104

In the Select from Force Holdings window the items can be selected from the
Force Holdings of the Force linked to the ADL or directly from a Force Profile. In
Figure 6.103, a Truck Ambulance from 1 Mech Infantry Bn has been selected.

The drag and drop method is used to transfer Items from the Force Holdings list
view to the Selected Items view. You can also HIGHLIGHT selected items and then
use the buttons provided to Add and/or Remove them to/from the Selected Items
view. CLICK OK to update the Mission Editor, as shown in Figure 6.105.
Figure 6.105
Now, you will need to update the required cells and SAVE your work.
Using the same method shown for Pax, you can import your cargo manifest in MS Excel
format.
The import of Pax or Cargo in Mission Editor window should be the exception. It is much
better to use the Request View and associated templates. SOPs should be used to
establish the different methods of import that are to be used.
Tracking ID: As the mission is being planned and/or executed it is possible to allocate a
Tracking ID to the asset/mission. This ID will be displayed in the Tracking View and other
EVE View windows. CLICK on the Tracking ID tab and the Tracking ID window as
shown at Figure 6.106 will open.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 6 – USING EVE
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 6 – 50
SELECT tracking ID
Tracking ID is linked
to Position Reports
Figure 6.106
Tracking ID’s are added manually by using the buttons provided and inserting the
required detail. To Remove a Tracking ID, select it in the list view and click the
appropriate button. If no Tracking ID is allocated, EVE will use the Asset Mission Serial
Number as its reference.
INSERT the Tracking ID detail as shown in Figure 6.106.
CLICK on the Position Reports tab.
Position Reports: It is possible to record the position of the asset when the mission is
being executed. The Position Reports window is shown at Figure 6.107.
CLICK on Add Report button
and SELECT a Tracking ID
Figure 6.107
In this window the Tracking ID of the Asset is taken from the Tracking ID window. It can
be linked to the reported position (Latitude / Longitude) and the time of the position report
(Reported Time).
The detail can be inserted and updated manually or automatically if the tracking ID is
linked to an automated tracking system. This complementary feature is beyond the
scope of this Tutorial.
In Figures 6.108 and 109 there are examples of inserting a reporting point, the date is
automatically set to the current date/time. Latitude and Longitude are set according to
the Location selected from the database.
Figure 6.108
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 6 – USING EVE
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 6 – 51
Figure 6.109
The reported position will be used to display accurately the reported position of the asset
in the Tracking View window. Remember that if the Position Report function available in
the Mission Editor window is not applied, EVE will apply an estimate of the position of the
asset based on the assigned network, the speed of the asset and the planned timing for
the asset.
You can also remove (a tracking) Report.
CLICK on the Load Analysis tab.
Load Analysis: This functionality allows loads to be fine-tuned. It should always be
used before adding any new Pax or cargo, especially when the load is approaching the
total capacity of the asset as defined in the Asset Types windows. In Figure 6.110 there
is remaining capacity, which will be used later when we add the 30 Pax and some
remaining equipment in the Request View paragraph.
A reduced view of Cargo is
produced when CLICKING on
Summary by destination button.
Figure 6.110
CLICK the OK button to close the Mission Editor window.
Creating Recurring Missions
To support its Forces, Brownland has decided to create a shuttle service from GEZA AP
to CALTROP and EQUINOX and back. Such services are commonly called channel
missions. 50% of the capacity will be given to the Alliance on the leg CALTROPEQUINOX-CALTROP. The flights will operate each Tuesday during the first three weeks
of the deployment.
We will set up these missions in the following Exercise. CLICK on the Reset Criteria
button, SELECT the MOT of Air and CLICK the Show Movements button.
Exercise 6 - 5 Prepare Recurring Mission
CREATE a new mission starting on the first Monday after G-Day at 07:00, with a three
hour stop at CALTROP AB and night stop at EQUINOX AB. The return flight will depart
at 05:00 with 30 PAX and 1000 kg given to the Alliance. 8000 litres of JP 1 are requested
at CALTROP AB.
The result should be as in Figure 6.111, except for the dates, which are based on your
input. In this example the G day was the 08/08/2011.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 6 – USING EVE
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 6 – 52
Figure 6.111
The system calculates the ETD / ETA for you; if you change the times, you can ask the
system to recalculate them by RIGHT-CLICKING in the ETA or ETD cells and
SELECTING the Suggest Time option.
The Date of Request was one week before G-Day; the Asset was not known and the
Monday following the G-day was the 18 August 2011. Three hours were added at the
stopover location.
There are two colours in the first column to warn you that days are different.
CLICK the OK button and the new mission can be seen in the Movement Management
window.
Now we can create a recurring mission. SELECT the first row of the mission that will be
recurring (to be duplicated). In this case SELECT the Mission with the Serial TUT 0003.
The aircraft is on standby, waiting to take off. This is shown in Figure 6.112.
Figure 6.112
CLICK the Copy Recurring Mission icon shown in Figure 6.113.
Figure 6.113
The Copy Mission / Create Repeated Schedule window will open as shown in Figure
6.114.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 6 – USING EVE
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 6 – 53
Be careful here, by
default the system
inserts one year
later!!!
Figure 6.114
All options presented in the window are self-explanatory and the ones selected will
depend on the situation and requirements of the operator. For the Tutorial SELECT the
detail as shown in Figure 6.114 and CLICK the OK button.
Note: If the date until becomes active (depending on the options selected, the
default is for one year. So be careful to select the actual date required.
The requested shuttle flights will now be generated as shown in Figure 6.115 and you
can now check individual shuttles to see that the details are correct.
Figure 6.115
Shift Time for Mission
It may be necessary to change the times of a mission. However, if you change the timing
in one movement you should take in account all other legs affected by the change. EVE
provides a tool to manage this.
Changes to timings can be compared visually. This is done in a Gantt view, which will be
discussed in a later paragraph, for the moment we will look at making the changes
manually.
OPEN the Mission Editor window for mission the TUT 0004. SELECT the first leg and
RIGHT CLICK and SELECT the Shift Time option as shown in Figure 6.116.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 6 – USING EVE
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 6 – 54
Figure 6.116
The Shift times window will open as shown in Figure 6.117.
Figure 6.117
The Shift Times window allows you to enter the number of minutes of change you want
to apply. For an earlier time (Shift Time Backwards) it is possible to enter a negative
figure. The change can then be applied using the Cascade to options as follows:

All legs in the mission: This option will highlight all the legs and apply the
change equally to all timings.

Leg… and all legs before: This option will highlight the selected leg and all
previous legs and apply the change equally to the timings.

Leg… and all legs afterwards: This option will highlight the selected leg and all
the following legs and apply the change equally to the timings.

Only leg…: This option will highlight only the selected leg and apply the change
to that leg only.

The Leg Number field shows the selected reference leg, to which the selected
option will be applied.
For the Tutorial in the Cascade to options, SELECT the All legs in the mission option; all
the rows in the mission will be highlighted
You can now select from which point of time the Shift Times option selected will be
applied from; this can be the Departure or Arrival time.
For the Tutorial in the Shift from options, SELECT the Departure option.
Now in the Shift Time by option you can insert the number of minutes by which to Shift
Times. Remember, to shift the times backwards, you can insert a negative figure. The
Dates and Times in the selected legs being updated will change as you insert the
number.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 6 – USING EVE
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 6 – 55
For the Tutorial, INSERT the Number as 60 so that this amount of time will be added to
the selected leg and all other legs. As you add the number EVE will give a preview of the
outcome.
CLICK on the OK button, the Shift Times window will close and the change will be seen
in Mission Editor window as shown in Figure 6.118.
Figure 6.118
CLICK on the Save button and CLOSE the Mission Editor window.
Delete Movement
You can delete an Asset Movement that is no longer required. This is carried out in any
of the Mission View options.
SELECT the Mission(s) to be deleted and then CLICK on the Delete button shown in
Figure 6.119.
Delete button.
Figure 6.119
You should note, and you will be warned before confirming the deletion, that if you delete
a Mission in the FEP view, all the legs associated with that mission will be deleted. To
delete an individual leg you should use the Remove Selected Leg option in the Mission
Editor window.
For the Tutorial we will not delete any movements at this stage. CLOSE the current FEP
if open. If you are prompted accept any changes not yet saved to the database.
Exercise 6 - 6
OPEN the FEP named SPECIAL MOVE FEP in the WEEKLY PLAN. Now carry out the
following actions:

CHANGE the status of all the air movements we have created and inserted to
Requested. Hint, make the first change manually and then use the Copy function and
the Paste + Fill options.

SHIFT all Mission Times by +120 minutes.
SAVE the changes and CLOSE the FEP.
GANTT Tools
The EVE GANTT Chart windows provide a method of portraying a visual overview of
Mission or Asset activities at a specific location. They can also be used to facilitate
changes to the timings of the events being shown. We will show the process for
generating a GANTT window and demonstrate how it can be used to change the timings
of a selected event. You can then apply this process to the task in hand.
In addition, we need to understand the term slot, which is applied to a time period
assigned on a schedule.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 6 – USING EVE
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 6 – 56
The Air Traffic Control (ATC) slot is needed by each departing flight on the actual day of
operation, to optimise the use of controlled airspace. The slot is only valid for a specific
flight and for a specific departure time window.
The Airport slot is mandatory at coordinated airports for each movement (arrival AND
departure) and is valid for a specific time on a specific day and for a specific period of
time. The airport slot is used to manage runway capacity and/or other capacity
constraints. These include: the number of available ramp stands, environmental and
security restrictions, terminal/passenger flow capacity and a whole range of other factors.
These are designed to minimise airport congestion and potential delays.
This part of the Tutorial applies to the Embedded View, which will be discussed in the
next Chapter. Some of the explanations, such as the description of using the shift timings
will apply to all movements and missions.
Our work with the GANTT View will involve BENDEGUZ AB. Before we start, we should
verify that the basic data for the location is current. If not we will need to update the
location, using the processes described in Chapter 5. Files are stored in your EVE Mail
In folder. The contents can be copied and pasted. The content is shown in Figure 6.120.
Figure 6.120
OPEN the FEP named EVE_USERS_ALLIANCE in THEATRE MCC plan. When it is
open CLICK the Reset Criteria button.
SELECT the Location named BENDEGUZ AB, the Display Options of Arrivals and
Departures. Then CLICK the Show Movements button. Your screen will similar to Figure
6.121.
Figure 6.121
Now we can follow the processes to generate a GANTT View. This simple process and
the steps required are:
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 6 – USING EVE
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 6 – 57

OPEN the FEP.

SELECT the location(s) of interest.

SELECT either Arrivals and/or Departures.

SELECT the dates of interest.

SELECT the asset movements of interest.
When you have followed the steps you can then SELECT your GANTT view of choice,
the options are:

Show GANTT: This option will show you an overview of the planned asset
movements.

Show Parking GANTT: This option will show you the planned asset movements
and the time slots defined for the location (if they have been created).
GANTT Views
Note: The following description will apply to the next EVE release and the
implementation of the EVE on WEB 5.3. There may be differences in your display
but the logic will apply.
For the Tutorial we will look at the GANTT windows for BENDEGUZ AB for G+3. We can
use the Date Filters, as shown in Figure 6.122 to set the date of interest, based on your
default training date.
Figure 1.122
For the Tutorial ACTIVATE the From and To dates and CLICK on the Next Day button
until you have some movements displayed in the Movement Management View.
Now CLICK the Show Gantt button, the application will filter the FEP and the GANTT
window illustrated in Figure 6.123 will appear. This will relate to the date selected. Figure
6.123 is only an illustration; your screen could be different.
Figure 6.123
The colours are based on the asset types as we defined in Miscellaneous Preferences
Properties window. Green is for wide body aircraft and white for narrow body, Brown for
road assets and blue for ships.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 6 – USING EVE
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 6 – 58
There is an individual GANTT view window for each day, location and arrival/departure
selection. You can use the minimise and multiple screen buttons at the top right corner
of the screen to see other charts, if more then one day has been selected.
You can Zoom-In and Zoom-Out of the GANTT to see specific details and you can also
print individual windows if you wish.
If the relevant Activity Slots have been created for the location you can use the Show
Parking GANTT option. When activated, this option will show the Asset Missions and the
Defined Slots for the Location at the same time.
This option can be used to check the activity at the selected location or to see where a
Time Slot is available.
To close a GANTT window, CLICK on the Close button at the top right of the screen or
SELECT the Close Window option of the File menu.
For the Tutorial CLOSE all the GANTT windows that have been opened, so that only the
Movement Management window is displayed on the screen and you should maximise
the window so it is full screen.
As you will have realised there are two windows open, the Gantt View and the Movement
Management View. It is possible to arrange your windows so that you can see both at
the same time as illustrated in Figure 6.124.
Figure 6.124
CLICK on the Window menu and then SELECT the Tile option in the drop-down menu
list.
CLOSE the Gantt view and MAXIMISE the Movements Management view so it is full
screen.
There are two other views of interest using the same filter settings that we used to create
the Gantt chart. These views are selected from the FEP menu or by pressing the
appropriate F# key; which are:
Location Timetable window: Use the F10 key. For the Tutorial PRESS the F10 key on
the keyboard. This view gives an overview of the Arrivals and Departures at the selected
location(s) on the selected date(s) as illustrated in Figure 6.125 will open.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 6 – USING EVE
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 6 – 59
Number of aircraft on
airfield at end of Slot per
asset type.
These missions are
scheduled to arrive in
a slot when only two
a/c per hour are
allowed to land.
Figure 1.125
As you can see there is a lot of information about the use of the location. In the first
column there are colours:

Grey means that the slot is being used to its total capacity as defined in the
basic data. This will be shown in the Embedded View.

Red means that there is a problem with the number of aircraft arriving /
departing as defined in the basic data.

Green shows the slot available for use.
We are able to manage the slots in the Slot Allocation window. Use the F11 key to
initiate the Slot Allocation window. This view gives an overview of the arrivals and
departures at the selected location(s) on the selected date(s) and in addition shows the
Slot Allocations relating to the Missions.
For the Tutorial PRESS the F11 key and the Slot Allocation window will open as
illustrated at Figure 6.126.
Figure 6.126
As illustrated there is a coding system in place, the system is:

If there is a number in the first column associated with a mission, it indicates
that the mission has a slot allocated.

If there is a number in the first column without a mission associated, it indicates
that this slot has not been allocated.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 6 – USING EVE
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 6 – 60

If there is a letter in first column it indicates a mission that needs to be allocated
a slot.
As you can see, as well as the basic information for the missions being shown, you can
see the Slot ID and MOG for each of them. The Slot IDs, their duration and what MOG
they are set against will normally be controlled by the EVE Site Manager or stated in
SOPs.
You can use the Print function available with this screen so that the information can be
printed in a MS Excel format.
The procedure for working with or allocating slots will be explained later in the section
when we deal with the Embedded View.
CLOSE the Location Timetable Window and return to the Classic View, then CLICK on
the Show Gantt button.
Changing Timings in the GANTT View
With the GANTT windows displayed you can change the timing of an asset movement to
see the effect of the change for the slot; this process is known as Shift Times.
For the Tutorial we will Shift Timings for one of the asset movements displayed. It is the
process that is important at this point, not which asset you select. The process is similar
to that which we used when we shifted the timing of a mission earlier.
CLICK on an Asset Movement in the GANTT window. It will be activated and a Bold
Black Border will appear around the selected asset as illustrated in Figure 6.127.
Figure 6.127
You can either DOUBLE CLICK on the selected Asset or you can CLICK on the Edit
Mission button that is shown at Figure 6.128.
Figure 6.128
The Mission Editor window will open on the screen. To Shift Times you must click onto
the first timing that is to be changed.
For the Tutorial we will shift the movement by 30 minutes for duration of the stay of the
B-737 so that it will not interfere with the C-17 currently on the ground at the same time.
For the Tutorial CLICK on the second ETD time and then RIGHT CLICK with your
mouse. Then SELECT the Shift Times option as shown in Figure 6.129.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 6 – USING EVE
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 6 – 61
SELECT
the Shift
Times
option.
Figure 6.129
The Shift Times window shown at Figure 6.130 will open on the screen, you have seen
this before.
Figure 6.130
SELECT the Leg…and all legs afterwards option to ensure that other legs will not be
affected.
For the Tutorial INSERT the Number 30 so that this amount of time will be added to the
selected leg and all of the other legs depending on the option selected in the Cascade to
view.
CLICK on the OK button and the Shift Times window will close and the change will be
seen in Mission Editor window. Once the Mission Editor is closed, you will see the
change in the Gantt Window and FEP as shown at Figure 1.131.
Figure 6.131
For the Tutorial CLOSE all the GANTT view windows and then CLOSE the FEP.
Exercise 6 - 7 GANTT Views
OPEN the FEP named EVE USER ALLIANCE. When it is open, CLICK the Reset
Criteria button and then SELECT the Location named BREIVIK IAP and the MOT of Air.
DESELECT the 1 GANTT View per day option. Then CLICK the Show Movements
button.
SELECT two consecutive days and then ACCESS the different GANTT view window
options and now observe the differences.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
CHAPTER 6 – USING EVE
Page 6 – 62
In the GANTT and Slot window use the Shift Timing functions for one of the Asset
Movements. Observe the effect in the GANTT view window and then look at the updated
fields in the Mission Movements window.
CLOSE the FEP and when prompted CLICK the No button; do not save any changes to
the FEP.
You are here
General
Importing DDPS
Exercise 6 - 1
Starting EVE
Creating Flow Execution Plans (FEPS)
Exercise 6-2
Creating an FEP Directly In EVE
Exercise 6-3
Creating a Multinational FEP
Customising Your EVE View
Changing the Display Options
Updating Movements and Editing Fields
Exercise 6-4
Asset Movements History
Working with Mission View
Exercise 6-5 Prepare the Lesson Recurring Mission
Gantt Tools
Exercise 6-7 Gantt Views
The Request & Manifest Views
Exporting and Importing EVE Data
Exercise 6-8
Comparing Missions and FEPS
The Request & Manifest Views
The Request and Manifest Views look the same but the functions and application are
different. Which is used will depend on the task to be carried out. In addition, the term
Request and Manifest is applied to all types of movements be they Pax or Cargo.
Request View
The Request View has been developed to allow EVE and the database to be used to
support the management of Mission, Passenger (Pax) and Cargo Requests.
The View allows individual requests to be imported into the database and these can then
be used to carry out a number of functions. These comprise Asset Mission requirements
analysis, Request Allocation and individual Asset Movements (Missions). The EVE Site
Manager or SOPs should be consulted as to the preferred way of using this view.
The requests can be added to the database in a number of ways:

By importing pre-formatted MS Excel Request Forms into EVE. The detail will
be added to the Request View where it can be managed.
The MS Excel formats used to add the required detail into the database use the same
basic processes used by Movement Request Forms. This will be practiced in an
exercise.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 6 – USING EVE
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 6 – 63
There will be a need for a separate Request Form format to be created for each type
of movement, be it Missions, Pax, Cargo, Dangerous Cargo or Vehicles because the
detail required will need to differ to comply with international regulations.
The Request Form formats to be used and the processes to be applied will be stated
by the EVE Site Manager and/or in SOPs and you should comply with these.
Individual requests for the movement of PAX and/or Cargo can be added manually to
the Request View and then managed. We will do this in the next section.
For the Tutorial we will show the basic functions that can be applied through a complete
set of data prepared and available in your EVE Mail In folder.
OPEN the EVE module and then OPEN the FEP named SPECIAL MOV. Once the FEP
is open, CLICK the Reset Criteria button. SELECT AIR PLANNED as the Column
preference. SORT the missions in ascending order and then CLICK on the Show
Movements button.
CLICK on the REQ button to open the Request window. The Request window will open
and this will be similar to Figure 6.132.
Request
view
Mission view
Figure 6.132
As you can see the Request View gives you a series of Filters that allow you to manage
the Requests and the Asset Missions; the way that you would apply these will depend on
requirements of your work.
Below the Filters there are two views, these are:

Request view: This is where the individual Requests or Bids for Pax/Cargo
movements will be held and managed.

Mission view: This is where missions requested, planned or approved to move
the request Pax/Cargo will be displayed.
The detail displayed in both the Request and Mission views will depend on the Filter
settings.
For the Tutorial CLICK on the Reset Criteria button, then SELECT the Location named
GEZA AP and CLICK on the Show Request + Legs button.
Your screen should be similar to Figure 6.133, except for the dates / times.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 6 – USING EVE
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 6 – 64
Figure 6.133
We can find the request for the Pax we inserted previously and all missions from GEZA
AP because we selected GEZA AP as location, plus the mission that has EQUINOX AB
in its schedule because this will comply with the request.
Now we can try to assign our passenger to a convenient flight. The method for both Pax
and Cargo is to drag and drop the request onto a convenient flight as illustrated in Figure
6.134. The colour of the movement row changes to yellow when the Hand moves on to it.
This indicates the Mission to which the selected Request will be allocated.
Figure 6.134
EVE will avoid double booking with a warning dialog as shown in Figure 6.135.
Figure 6.135
CLICK the OK button; note that the status of the selected request, in this example the
Pax is changed to Booked.
Usually requests should be made in advance with a standardised format as defined in
the templates. You should use this method and allocate the request to convenient flights.
We use the same method using the Manifest view.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 6 – USING EVE
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 6 – 65
Manifest View
The Manifest View allows you to see all the manifests in the database be they from Pax
or Cargo Requests or automatically generated from the ADAMS DDP. These can then
be managed and allocated to Asset Missions as we did in the Request View.
For the Tutorial we will suppose that the LEZA unit prepared a detailed request for its
equipment to be transported using the Alliance format. You can examine it from your
EVE Mail In folder; the file is named LEZA REQUEST CARGO.xls. DO NOT CHANGE
anything and CLOSE the file.
CLICK the Man button and OPEN the Manifest View.
SELECT the EVE CARGO RF option from the Templates combo box and CLICK the In
button as shown in Figure 6.136.
CLICK the In
button
Figure 6.136
The normal Windows Look in window will appear on the screen. BROWSE to the EVE
Mail In folder and SELECT the File named LEZA REQUEST CARGO.xls.
CLICK on the Open button; the import will begin and you may be asked to confirm the
GeoLocs to be used. In this case accept the name in the usual way.
If there are error messages, CLICK on the OK button to accept the warnings. When the
Import is completed the CARGO Request will be added to the Manifest View as shown at
Figure 6.137.
Figure 6.137
The illustration at Figure 6.137 may be slightly different to what is on your screen,
remember that it is the process that is important here and not the detail.
You should note that the colours are different because the new items are a Request.
Now we can try to allocate the cargo to available flights. It may be better if you sort the
requests by date and time. You can do this manually or use the DATE_TIME.erc file
which can be loaded from the EVE Mail In folder and accessed in the Sort Movements
window as shown in Figure 6.138.
,
Figure 6.138
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 6 – USING EVE
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 6 – 66
DRAG and DROP the Item named MB Unimog on the Mission with the Serial TUT0002
as shown in Figure 6.139.
Figure 6.139
Now OPEN the Mission Editor window and SELECT the Cargo Manifest tab; you will see
that the item is added to the manifest as illustrated in Figure 6.140.
Figure 6.140
CLICK on the Load Analysis tab so you can verify that the mission leg is not overloaded,
this process is shown at Figure 6.141.
Figure 6.141
CLICK the OK button and you can see that the side colour changed to grey and status to
Booked. SELECT the row and CLICK the Show legs where selected request are moved
button as shown in Figure 6.142.
CLICK here
Figure 6.142
Now as shown in Figure 6.143, only the mission on which request is allocated is shown.
Figure 6.143
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
CHAPTER 6 – USING EVE
Page 6 – 67
For the Tutorial SET the mission to Confirmed. This is done automatically by software if
an IFF or squawk is allocated.
In the Mission Editor window and using the Cargo Manifest tab you can add and remove
cargo, adjust the quantity by typing in the Qty cell and everything related will be updated
automatically.
CLOSE the Mission View and FEP. If prompted, ACCEPT to Save changes.
You are here
General
Importing DDPS
Exercise 6 - 1
Starting EVE
Creating Flow Execution Plans (FEPS)
Exercise 6 - 2
Creating an FEP Directly In EVE
Exercise 6 - 3
Creating a Multinational FEP
Customising Your EVE View
Changing the Display Options
Updating Movements and Editing Fields
Exercise 6 - 4
Asset Movements History
Working with Mission View
Exercise 6 - 5
Gantt Tools
Exercise 6 - 7 Gantt Views
The Request & Manifest Views
Exporting and Importing EVE Data
Exercise 6 - 8
Comparing Missions and FEPS
Exporting and Importing EVE Data
The data used in EVE that is saved and stored in the database falls into two categories.
These are:

LOGFAS Core Data: This data can be created and managed in the LDM and
GeoMan and then can be shared and used by all the LOGFAS modules; any changes
to such data will impact on the other modules.

EVE Specific Data: This is data that is used only by the EVE module and in
some cases is limited to the location.
There is some data that applies to the individual database and is therefore retained and
cannot be exported. However, there are a number of data sets that are created and
managed in the EVE module that can be exported from one database and imported into
another using a structured file.
The details for the export and/or import of LOGFAS Core Data files are explained in each
of the specific specialist area tutorials and in the EVE Manager Guide and Tutorial.
A list of the files and the file extensions for the data exported/imported into EVE is shown
in the following table.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 6 – USING EVE
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 6 – 68
File Extension: Associated Data Item:
*.aco
Terminal Flow Plan Column Order
*.avs
Terminal Flow Plan View Settings
*.eao
Terminal Flow Plan Column Order
*.eco
EVE Column Order
*.efd
Flow-Plan Definition
*.efr
Routes
*.epf
Preference Settings
*.erf
Movement Request Form definition
*.erq
Generic Request Definition (Cargo/Pax/Vehicle)
*.esd
Slot Definitions
*.est
Eve Statistics Definition
*.eud
EVE User-Defined Data
*.eve
EVE Flow Execution Plan (FEP)
*.evs
EVE View Settings
*.html
Export HTML
*.pro
Map Project folder files
*.txt
Export ATO Feeder
*.xml
Export XML
*.xls
Used to create Movement Request Form, Cargo, Export
Flow Table, Gantt, PPR Request Form, PAX, and Time
Table.
For Movements the instructions for exporting and/or importing data using the GeoMan
and LDM are contained in the ADAMS Tutorial Document.
The processes for exporting and/or importing EVE Basic Data and Preferences are
basically the same for each type. The program will suggest a Save as file name and the
appropriate file extension is added automatically.
The EVE Basic Data and Templates export and import were described in Chapters 4 & 5.
Note: The EVE Site Manager or SOPs will outline the procedures and
responsibilities for controlling data export/imports.
Exporting to MS Excel
It is possible to export the Missions from any windows containing movements. This
function is useful when you want to create a quick report in MS Excel format that will be
based on the Export what you can see methodology.
For the Tutorial OPEN the FEP named SPECIAL MOVE from WEEKLY PLAN. To
demonstrate the power of this functionality we will first export it from the Classic View,
then from the Manifest View applying a filter.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 6 – USING EVE
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 6 – 69
OPEN the Classic View: CLICK the Reset Criteria button then the Show Movement
button. SELECT PLANNED AIR Column option so all of missions are shown.
Use normal windows functions to SELECT all of them and CLICK on the EXCEL icon
that is shown in Figure 6.144.
Figure 6.144
The Save as window will open and you can save in the data in your preferred format as
shown in Figure 6. 145.
Figure 6.145
For the Tutorial SAVE the file in your EVE Mail Out folder with the *.xls extension. An
EVE dialog, as shown in Figure 6.146 will appear.
Figure 6.146
CLICK the OK button and then OPEN the saved file and your movements will appear as
they are on your EVE screen and as illustrated in Figure 6.147.
Figure 6.147
CLICK on the Request View button (the MAN button will give the same result) and then
CLICK the Show available movement button.
SORT the window by date and time as illustrated in Figure 6.148.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 6 – USING EVE
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 6 – 70
Figure 6.148
CLICK the EXCEL icon; the data will be exported to the EVE Mail Out folder and you can
compare this with the previous file providing this export was saved with a different name.
The file is illustrated at Figure 6.149.
Figure 6.149
FEP Data Exchange
EVE has been designed to allow access to a shared database by a number of users.
This is obviously the best way to ensure that everyone is viewing the same data as it is
updated.
However, there may be times when complete FEPs or selected data from FEPs have to
be sent from one installation to another; therefore, the required data needs to be
exported and imported from and into the relevant databases.
Note: The export and import of FEP data may be subject to controls and the EVE
Site Manager and SOPs should be consulted.
Exporting FEPs
This process is used when the complete FEP has to be exported from the database.
The first step is to select the FEP for export.
For the Tutorial CLICK on the File menu and SELECT the Export FEP option as shown
in Figure 6.150. Alternatively press the Ctrl+E keys on the keyboard.
SELECT the
Export FEP
option.
Figure 6.150
When the Export FEP window appears on the screen, select the plan and then the DDP
to be exported. Remember that a DDP is called a FEP in EVE.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 6 – USING EVE
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 6 – 71
For the Tutorial SELECT the Plan named EVE TUT 1; SELECT the DDP named FULLY
SOURCED ALLIANCE DDP as shown in Figure 6.151.
Figure 6.151
If the FEP is exported at this stage only the Asset Mission data will be included in the
export file. You now have an additional option export the Manifests of the Missions as
well. If this is required, you should activate the Tick Box provided at the lower left part of
the Export FEP window.
For the Tutorial ACTIVATE the Export Manifest of Missions Tick Box and then CLICK on
the OK button.
The Save As window as illustrated at Figure 6.152 will appear on the screen.
Figure 6.152
In this window, you select the location where the file is to be saved. The EVE program
allocates the file a name automatically. The name is a combination of the FEP name and
the Date, Time Group (DTG) when the file is created. You can accept the default file
name or rename the file.
For the Tutorial we will SELECT the EVE Mail Out folder as the Save in location and
ACCEPT the default File name.
CLICK on the Save button and the program will export all the data in the FEP to file.
When the process is completed, the EVE dialog shown in Figure 6.153 will appear.
Figure 6.153
The EVE dialog tells you that the Flow-plan has been exported successfully. CLICK on
the OK button and the dialog will be removed from the screen.
You can now send the created file by Email or other transmission media. It should be
noticed that this file can be imported using either the LDM or EVE.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 6 – USING EVE
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 6 – 72
Note: You can also perform a partial export of the visible EVE movements if you
are within an open Flowplan. This is done using the Export FEP or Export FEP with
Pax and Cargo options. Only movements currently displayed and selected on the
screen will be exported.
CLICK on the File menu and you will see there are a number of options when exporting
a FEP, these are shown at Figure 6.154.
Figure 6.154
The options and there use is self-explanatory and we will not detail it here.
Importing FEPs
EVE provides you with the functionality to import a FEP and gives you additional options.
As you can see in Figure 6.155 there are two options, these are to:

Import FEP: This option will import the FEP directly into your database.

Preview FEP: This option allows you to review the data in the import FEP before
committing it to your database.
Import FEP
option.
Preview FEP
option.
Figure 6.155
When importing a FEP and you are sure about the source, and when the FEP is linked to
your Plan, you can import it directly into your database. If you have any doubts about the
in-coming data or you want to control each step of the data import process you can
choose the Preview FEP option.
Importing with Previewing FEPs
It is possible to preview a FEP before completing the import process. This function
allows you to review the in-coming FEP before committing the data to your database.
For the Tutorial, we will Preview the import of the file Fully Sourced Alliance DDP [date
time].eve; this is the file you have just exported and it is in the EVE Mail Out folder.
CLICK on the File menu and SELECT the Preview FEP option shown in Figure 6.154.
Alternatively, you can press the Ctrl +R keys on the keyboard.
The Import Wizard window will appear on the screen. The process for locating the file to
be imported and selecting the Update database options have been described in detail
earlier in the Tutorial and will not be repeated here.
You can now select the file to preview before importing the data; this is named Fully
Sourced Alliance DDP [date time].eve.
The program will now open the FEP on the screen with the entire Asset Missions
showing. You will note that all the Asset Missions rows have a green box on the left
hand side; this indicates the data has not yet been saved to the database.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 6 – USING EVE
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 6 – 73
When EVE opened the FEP for Preview, the program allocated the FEP a temporary
name automatically. As illustrated in Figure 6.156 this name is the word Imported
followed by a Serial Number.
The allocated
FEP Name
Figure 6.156
You can now review the data being imported and you can either:
CLICK on the Save button and all the unsaved data will be added to the database.
HIGHLIGHT individual Asset Mission Rows and the data within that row will be saved.
If either of these options is taken the data in the Temporary FEP will be added to the
active plan in your database and the Movement Management window will close.
You may take this option; however, there is an alternative that allows you to add the
import data to the active plan and opens the FEP in the Movement Management window.
For the Tutorial CLICK on the Close button for the Temporary FEP. During the process
CLICK the Yes button if the warning dialog is asking for.
The data in the Preview FEP will now be added to the database.
Now CLICK on the File menu and SELECT the Open FEP option. When the Open FEP
window appears on the screen, you can select the Preview FEP that can be identified by
its generated DDP name as illustrated in Figure 6.157.
The allocated
FEP Name.
Figure 6.157
At this point in the process you can use the Advanced functions in the Open FEP window
to rename the DDP in the DDP list view. We used this function earlier in the Tutorial so
will not repeat it here.
In the Import Wizard window, there are two additional functions provided to you at this
point for the import process.
Importing FEPs
For the Tutorial CLICK on the File menu and SELECT the Import FEP option as shown
in Figure 6.158. Alternatively, you can press the Ctrl+ I keys on the keyboard.
6.158
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 6 – USING EVE
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 6 – 74
The Import Wizard window illustrated at Figure 6.159 will appear on the screen. The
process for locating the file to be imported has been described in detail before and will
not be repeated here. You can now select the file to import Fully Sourced Alliance DDP
[date time].eve; this is in the EVE Mail Out folder.
Figure 6.159
In the Import Wizard window there are a number of options available:
 Import Colours option: This option allows you to import the colours used by the
exporting database and should only be used if the colour scheme used is the same in
both locations. If there is any doubt this option should be deactivated.
 Update database options: There options are similar to the ones you have seen on
previous Import Wizard examples; they allow you to Add new missions only or Add
new rows and update (replace) existing missions.
For the Tutorial ACTIVATE the Import Colours and Add new rows and update
(replace) existing missions options.
 Import Pax and Cargo option: This option allows you to import the Mission
Manifests if they were included in the export file. For the Tutorial ACTIVATE the Tick
Box.
CLICK on the Advanced button to display the next options.
 Change imported plan to option: This option allows you to indicate the plan in
which the Flowplan will be imported. This is important because now in LOGFAS 6.1
you can receive files coming from other HQs with a different plan name and import
into your own operational plan (which may be of a higher classification level) then
combine them in your plan.
 Change imported DDP to option: This option allows you to change the name of
the FEP being imported. If this option is not activated the FEP will be imported using
the name used when it was exported. In either case, the plan name remains the
same.
For the Tutorial ACTIVATE the Tick Box and then INSERT the Name of EVE
IMPORT DEMO into the name field.
 Select columns to import option: This option allows you to select the specific
columns that you to have imported into the database.
For the Tutorial CLICK Select columns to import button and CLICK on the Check All
button and then CLICK the OK button. Your screen should look similar to Figure
6.160.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 6 – USING EVE
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 6 – 75
Figure 6.160
On the Import Wizard window CLICK the OK button and the file will be imported.
Depending on the speed of the workstation, you may need to wait; the EVE progress bar
illustrated in Figure 6.161 shows that it is working.
Figure 6.161
When the process is completed an EVE dialog as shown in Figure 6.162 will appear on
the screen.
Figure 6.162
This EVE dialog gives some detail on the import file and tells you the import is complete;
CLICK on the OK button.
Now CLICK on the File menu and SELECT the Open FEP option.
As you can see the Imported FEP has been added to the list of DDPs of the relevant
Plan; this can now be accessed and worked with. In addition, the Temporary FEP that
was created during the Preview FEP process can also be seen in the plan where it was
imported. These are illustrated in Figure 6.163.
Figure 6.163
CLICK the Cancel button to avoid loading any Flowplan.
Exercise 6 - 8
Open the Flowplan imported and named EVE IMPORT DEMO; this is in WEEKLY PLAN.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 6 – USING EVE
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 6 – 76
REPLACE Location FOL2 (ABF2) by the new destination LARADO.
SHIFT the timing of arrival (ETA) for all ships arriving at Caltrop SP for 240 minutes later
so that only the followings legs will be affected.
SAVE the inputs and CLOSE the Flowplan.
EXPORT the Flowplan named EVE IMPORT DEMO to your EVE Mail Out folder.
IMPORT this Flowplan into the plan WEEKLY PLAN with a new name as EVE IMPORT
2.
OPEN the imported Flowplan to verify the import process
You are here
General
Importing DDPS
Exercise 6 - 1
Starting EVE
Creating Flow Execution Plans (FEPS)
Exercise 6 - 2
Creating an FEP Directly In EVE
Exercise 6 - 3
Creating a Multinational FEP
Customising Your EVE View
Changing the Display Options
Updating Movements and Editing Fields
Exercise 6 - 4
Asset Movements History
Working with Mission View
Exercise 6 - 5 Prepare the Lesson Recurring Mission
Gantt Tools
Exercise 6 - 7 Gantt Views
The Request & Manifest Views
Exporting and Importing EVE Data
Exercise 6 - 8
Comparing Missions and FEPS
Comparing Missions and FEPs
Eve provides two tools to track the changes made in Flowplan. There is the Show History
to follow changes made in missions and the other tool is Compare FEP to show the
differences in two Flowplans.
Show history of a full plan
We have seen historical data previously applied to a single mission. When working with a
plan, it may be useful to view all changes made during a shift, day or any timeframe. This
can be achieved for a complete Flowplan or by mission. You need to have a Flowplan
open, then SELECT the missions to be tracked. Then CLICK on the Show History button
as shown in Figure 6.164.
Figure 6.164
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 6 – USING EVE
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 6 – 77
For the Tutorial OPEN the FEP named EVE IMPORT DEMO; this is in WEEKLY PLAN
and CLICK the Show History button. All changes we did in the previous exercise will be
shown similar to Figure 6.165.
Figure 6.165
The first column indicates the execution ID internal to the database. When it is green this
indicates an original movement.
The second column has the same Execution ID and indicates the change number sorted
by date time of the change.
The third column refers to the user who made the changes. The word xpmuser indicates
a change made by an automatic function of EVE.
You can scroll your screen to see any changes implemented. At Figure 6.166 the shift
time for ships and the location change from FOL2 to LARADO are shown.
Figure 6.166
If changes were made to the Pax and cargo, they will also be reported.
You can take a screenshot using the Screenshot option available with the RIGHT CLICK
option, and then copy it in any MS Office compatible document. The options is shown at
Figure 6.167
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 6 – USING EVE
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 6 – 78
Figure 6.167
You can clear the FEP history if you wish, CLICK on the FEP menu and SELECT the
Clear FEP History option, as shown in Figure 6.168.
Figure 6.168
There is another method, if you want to keep on the history on file while cleaning an FEP
of old unwanted data. This method is explained in the EVE Managers Guide. The
process needs to be controlled because it can damage the data, if not used carefully.
Note: The history related to an individual mission is fixed for audit purposes and
this can not be removed.
Compare FEPs
There will be occasions when different EVE operators will not have access to a server
database and will therefore work on different elements of the FEP. Providing that the
FEPs are created within the same Plan, they can send each other the different parts of
the FEP.
Each of the FEP files may contain updated details on existing Asset Movements. There
also may be cases where additional asset movements have been added to the FEP or
some missions have been removed as the planning was refined.
EVE provides a function that allows you to compare two FEPs and we will now describe
this process.
EVE requires you to have the two FEPs to compare, the first, which should be opened in
the Movement Management window, is known as the Reference FEP and the second,
which you will select later, is known as the Comparator FEP.
The first step is to open the FEP you want to use as the Reference FEP;
For the Tutorial OPEN the FEP named COMBINE FLOWPLANS this will be the
Reference FEP. This selection is illustrated at Figure 6.169
Figure 6.169
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 6 – USING EVE
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 6 – 79
When the FEP is open in the Movement Management window; CLICK on the Reset
criteria and Show movements buttons in sequence.
Now you can select the second or Comparator FEP. CLICK on the FEP menu and
SELECT the Compare with other FEP OPTION as illustrated in Figure 6.170.
Figure 6.170
The Compare with other EVE flow-plan window as illustrated at Figure 6.171 will appear
on the screen.
Figure 6.171
You can now SELECT the FEP to compare against the Reference FEP opened on the
screen. After selecting the required FEP you CLICK on the OK button.
For the Tutorial SELECT the FEP named XM NATIONS MCC (this has no
BROWNLAND units) and CLICK the OK button. The Compare FEP screen as shown in
Figure 6.172 will open.
Figure 6.172
The EVE program will now open a new FEP window and this will show the asset
movements of both FEPs in a single window.
EVE uses a colour coding system that allows you to compare the data of the selected
FEPs. When comparing FEPs you will see asset movements displayed with the
background to the rows filled by colours.
If the background colour of the row is white, then the Asset Movements are in both FEPs.
In these rows if there are individual changes to the Asset Movements detail the cells
containing the changed information will have a red background as shown in Figure
6.173.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CHAPTER 6 – USING EVE
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 6 – 80
Figure 6.173
If the background colour of the row is Green this shows that the Asset Movements are
not in the original FEP, but are in the Comparator FEP. In other words these Asset
Movements have been added.
If the background colour of the row is red, this indicates the Asset Movements are in the
original FEP, but are not in the Comparator FEP. This indicates these Asset Movements
have been removed or deleted.
CLOSE all of the Compare FEP windows and any other open windows; so that only the
main EVE window is open on the screen.
This completes Chapter 6.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
CH 7 – OTHER EVE VIEWS AND REPORTS
Page 7 – 1
Chapter 7 – Other EVE Views and Reports
You are here
General
Introduction
Embedded View
Buttons use.
Exercise 7 - 1
Exercise 7 - 2
Slot Allocation
Exercise 7 - 3
Route Centric View (RV)
Mission Centric View (MV)
Tracking View (TV)
Mission Editor View
Movement Management View (MAN)
Request View (REQ)
Reports, Charts and Statistics
Predefined Sets of Statistics
Customised Reports
Exercise 7 - 4
Archiving Data
General
Much of the work carried out by the EVE operator is normally carried out either in the
Classic View (CV), Route Centric View (RV) or the Embedded View (EV) windows.
However, there is a total of seven views available in EVE, these can be used for
specific purposes and can assist in clarifying individual situations as they arise.
To this end we will examine the other views and options, which are available to the
EVE User.
In addition, there are a number of Report and Statistic formats that are directly
available in EVE to extract data of interest from an existing FEP.
Using the LCM, IMPORT the file named LOGFAS_EVE_USER_FOR_
CHAPTER_7.backup database from the EVE Mail In folder.
For the Tutorial the new ODBC Name for the database is EVE_CHAPTER_7_
[monthdate] and add a Description of LOGFAS6.1; for Chapter 7.
ACTIVATE the database you have just imported. Your LCM should look similar to
Figure 7.1.
Figure 7.1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
CH 7 – OTHER EVE VIEWS AND REPORTS
Page 7 – 2
Introduction
The specialist views, which we will discuss, provide the EVE User with a predetermined set of columns and filters to manage updates and can assist with the
information flow that EVE provides. We will look at each of these views in turn.
There are two main ways that the different views can be activated; from the Main menu
and the short-cut button in the View menu bar. For the Tutorial CLICK on Mode on the
main menu as shown in Figure 7.2, now you will see a third option for activating the
views, which is to use a combination of keys strokes the keyboard.
Figure 7.2
These different views can be opened from the Mode menu as shown in Figure 7.2 or
from View menu bar as shown in Figure 7.3.
Figure 7.3
OPEN the EVE Module.
EVE FEPs are always linked to an Operational Plan. You will need to SELECT an
Operational Plan. For the Tutorial, SELECT the Plan named EVE TUT 1 and then
SELECT the FEP named FULLY SOURCED ALLIANCE DDP.
Depending on which view has been set in the Preferences, will determine in which view
the Flowplan will be opened. The default View option is the Route Centric (RV) view.
For the Tutorial SELECT the Classic View in the View menu bar; when the selected
view is open on the screen, CLICK the Reset Criteria button.
Now SELECT BENDEGUZ AB as the Location option and SELECT Air as the MOT.
CLICK the Show Movement button and the Classic View, similar to Figure 7.4 will be
shown, displaying the filtered missions.
Figure 7.4
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
CH 7 – OTHER EVE VIEWS AND REPORTS
Page 7 – 3
Embedded View
The Embedded View allows the operator to have an overview of the events planned for
the locations for which they are responsible or has interest in.
Note: Despite the fact that this View was developed for airfields, you should note
that it can apply equally to any type of location that needs management.
To access the Embedded View CLICK the Embedded View (EV) button as shown in
Figure 7.5.
Embedded View button
Figure 7.5
The Embedded View window will appear on your screen as shown in Figure 7.6.
Filter view
Movements view
Location
Slots view
Figure 7.6
The Embedded View window consists of three views or areas, which are the Filter
view, the Slot (Flow table for the Location) view and the Movements view. The
information that appears in these views is dependent on what is planned and what has
been created in the other tables.
For example, the Slot view shows the Flowtable Times for the selected location that
were created in the appropriate Basic Data table. If no specific basic data is created the
default for these Slot Times is set at 5 minute intervals.
For the Tutorial CLICK on the BENDEGUZ AB tab. If you cannot see this location the
Location combo box, in to top right hand part of the screen, is not set to all locations. If
the locations do not appear, set the Location combo box to all locations. All the
locations that are used in this FEP will appear in the Embedded View.
At the top of the window, you will see the details of the selected location. An illustration
of this part of the window is shown in Figure 7.7.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
CH 7 – OTHER EVE VIEWS AND REPORTS
Page 7 – 4
Location.
Current or
Selected Date.
MOG
Location Slot
Restrictions
and Usage.
MOT List.
ATO and
Julian Dates.
.displayed.
Details of Notices that
apply for the selected
location.
Instruction
buttons.
Figure 7.7
As you can see there is a great deal of information displayed, which is directly related
to the location selected.
Locations: By default, the locations included in the Embedded View will be all those
listed in the FEP. These can be filtered using the Location List options in the
Preferences menu. If such a selection is applied, only locations in the activated
Location List will be displayed.
Dates: There are a number of different date settings shown on the window:
 Textural Date: The date is shown at the top of the window and the format will
depend on your computer’s regional settings. Normally this will be in dd/mm/yyyy
format, except for North America where it is shown in mm/dd/yyyy format.
 Julian Date: The window shows the Julian date and this relates to the textural
date.
 ATO Date: If the ATO date reference has been set the program will display
this.
You can use the Previous Day and Next Day buttons to select another date.
Alternatively, you can access the calendar to select a date of your choice. You can also
type in the required date directly into the field.
MOG: The MOG calculation is displayed and is based on two elements:
 The Mission Type allocated to the Asset Movement, providing the Mission
Types have been specified in the Basic Data menu options.
 The MOG setting for the location, as originally defined in the LOGFAS
GeoMan module. The MOG is found in the Airport tab of the GeoLoc window.
Entering MOG data in the GeoMan was described in Chapter 2.
If the defined MOG for the location has been exceeded during the displayed day, then
the wording is shown in Red. The affected asset movements will be displayed in the
Slot (Flow table) view with a Red background. The colour is designed to assist you in
identifying problem areas in the flow and to show where possible deconfliction is
required.
Missions: In common with the other EVE Views it is possible to insert an Asset
Movement into the FEP within the EV window. The process is the same in all the EVE
Views and was described in detail earlier in this Tutorial. It is also possible to UPDATE
or DELETE an Asset Movement within the EV. You can add or make changes to the
Asset Movement in the Mission Editor view or within the EV Grid display, CLICK the
Save button and the details will be added to the FEP. Any changes to the Asset
Movements or the FEP made within the EV will be visible in the other EVE Views.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
CH 7 – OTHER EVE VIEWS AND REPORTS
Page 7 – 5
Location Slot View: The Slot Allocations view will display the Location Time Slots and,
when allocated, the Missions relating to the Slots. The default in this view is 5 minute
slots unless an alternative setting has been created in the Basic Data menu options
that are, in this example, implemented for BENDEGUZ AB.
When an Asset Movement affects the Slot allocations, the affected slot will have a Red
background and you can use the displayed information to decide the best options for
allocating the available slots.
Notices View: If any notices linked to the displayed location have been created in the
Basic Data they will be displayed in the Notices view.
If Closed Notices have been created for the displayed location and relevant to the
displayed date the affected slots will show a Red background. You can use the
displayed information to decide the best options for allocating the available slots not
affected by the Notice.
Note: That in the example we are using here, the runway is closed from 23:00 until
04:00.
The EV offers you access to a number of other windows and views giving you access
to additional or complementary information and enabling you to make changes. Some
of these were discussed in Chapter 6.
We will now discuss the various buttons which allow us to manage the slots. The
restrictions, shown in Figure 7.8, will remind us of the BENDEGUZ AB constraints.
Figure 7.8
Buttons
First SELECT a date 5 days after the first flight to BENDEGUZ AB. You will get a busy
military AB as shown in Figure 7.9.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
CH 7 – OTHER EVE VIEWS AND REPORTS
Page 7 – 6
Potential
Problem.
Figure 7.9
CLICK on the GANTT button; it produces the same result as the GANTT View in the
Classic View, which we examined in Chapter 6.
Returning to the EV, we can see that they are one or two rows in red in the ID slot B1.
This happens because you have more missions (4) scheduled than the number of
arrival/departure slots available (3 arrivals / 2 departures, as shown in Figure 7.10).
First we can indicate to EVE that the first mission will stay as planned. To do this,
DOUBLE CLICK on the schedule that you want to confirm to open the Mission Editor.
CLICK the OK button having made no changes. This mission will now have priority in
the system and only the other(s) will remain coloured red in the Slot View.
Now we can move the second mission by five minutes so that it will now be in Slot B2
where we have only one mission. DOUBLE CLICK on the schedule to open the
Mission Editor and ADD 5 minutes to the ETA at BENDEGUZ AB. The change is
made immediately and you can see that now we have three movements in slot B1 and
two in slot B2 as shown in Figure 7.10
Figure 7.10
Exercise 7 - 1
SOLVE the remaining conflict of the 2 TUT-130 in slot C4. As an indication, we shifted
the time of arrival and departure by 45 minutes.
CLICK the GANTT + Slots button. The aircraft movements at the location will appear,
identified by colours depending on the settings made in the Preferences Properties /
Miscellaneous window, which were explained in Chapter 4.
The slot allocations by type of aircraft will be represented by a grey bar as shown in
Figure 7.11.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
CH 7 – OTHER EVE VIEWS AND REPORTS
Page 7 – 7
Figure 7.11
Figure 7.11 also shows the words (additional slot), alongside certain missions, which
means that the mission has not yet been allocated a parking slot and support as
defined for BENDEGUZ AB or has been accepted by the operator with the times
shown.
To remind you, the word slot is a specific time assigned on a schedule.
 The Air Traffic Control (ATC) slot is needed by each departing flight on the
actual day of operation to optimise the use of its controlled airspace. This slot is
only valid for a specific flight and for a specific departure / arrival time window.
This process was discussed in more detail in the section concerning Flowplan
Definitions earlier in the Tutorial.
Exercise 7 - 2
EXAMINE the window open on your screen.
IDENTIFY potential area of conflict (arrival of an AN-124 outside the Wide Body slot,
two C-17 and two C-130 at the same time twice in the same day). These cause the red
lines in the Slots view. Once you have finished examining the BENDEGUZ throughput,
CLOSE the window.
Slot Allocation
CLICK the Slot Allocation button. In this view we can allocate a mission to the relevant
slots as shown in Figure 7.12. We can allocate it:

To a specific slot if the timeframe matches the slot availability.

To more then one slot if the stay of asset exceed the duration of one slot.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
CH 7 – OTHER EVE VIEWS AND REPORTS
Page 7 – 8
Reference
Slots
Slots to be
allocated
(A)
Illustration
only
Figure 7.12
SELECT the mission and TYPE in the first column the slot number to assign.
For the Tutorial SELECT the row of the first C-130 and TYPE the number 1 to replace
the A letter as shown in Figure 7.13 and then CLICK anywhere within the window.
Figure 7.13
This mission will be moved to the top of the window with the number 1 in the column.
This can be done for all missions within the view. For the Tutorial we allocated all TUTC130 having a departure before 07:00 to the Slot 1 and the AN 124 to Slot 3 as shown
in Figure 7.14.
Figure 7.14
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CH 7 – OTHER EVE VIEWS AND REPORTS
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 7 – 9
You are here
General
Introduction
Embedded View
Buttons use.
Exercise 7 - 1
Exercise 7 - 2
Slot Allocation
Exercise 7 - 3
Route Centric View (RV)
Mission Centric View (MV)
Tracking View (TV)
Mission Editor View
Movement Management View (MAN)
Request View (REQ)
Reports, Charts and Statistics
Predefined Sets of Statistics
Customised Reports
Exercise 7 - 4
Archiving Data
Exercise 7 - 3
REPLICATE the content of Figure 7.14.
CLOSE the window; you should note that it is not possible to change the input without
reversing all processes.
CLOSE the view and CLICK the GANTT + Slots button and EXAMINE the changes.
Remember that if a mission exceeds the timeframe of one slot, you can assign multiple
slots.
SELECT the cell with letter A, TYPE the number of the first slot to be assigned, RIGHT
CLICK the Assign slot button.
Then SELECT the Assign to multiple slots button as shown in Figure 7.15.
Figure 7.15
The slot that follows the current one will be automatically assigned, as shown in Figure
7.16, which shows a C-17 occupying a number 1 and 3 slot with the same arrival time.
Figure 7.16
CLOSE the FEP and, if prompted, ACCEPT to Save the changes to the FEP.
Route Centric View (RV)
The Route Centric View (RV) allows the operator to monitor the movements for an
individual or selection of locations using a default set of filtering criteria. The
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
CH 7 – OTHER EVE VIEWS AND REPORTS
Page 7 – 10
information displayed can be updated and exported directly from the window in MS
Excel file format.
The RV is a modification of the CV to include the sorting by Routes (Rails or Roads)
designed in CORSOM; the Asset Missions are displayed by individual legs, in a From
(Source Location) and To (Target Location) format.
To switch from the CV to RV, CLICK on the RV button as shown in Figure 7.17.
CLICK the RV
button.
Figure 7.17
Alternatively, you can SELECT the Route Centric View option in the Mode menu or
PRESS Ctrl+Shift+R on your keyboard.
As in the CV the operator can set any number of display filters to get the required
information onto the screen.
For the Tutorial OPEN the BROWNLAND CHAPTER 6 Flowplan. CLICK the Reset
Criteria button and CLICK the Show Movements button. All of the movements are
shown and you can apply the different filters to achieve the desired display.
For the Tutorial SET the following SEARCH filters: Routes: SELECT MSR ALPHA
Now CLICK the Show Movements button and the movements that match the criteria
will be displayed on the screen similar to Figure 7.18.
Figure 7.18
This display shows the activity for the selected Route during the timeframe selected. It
can also be sorted by individual operator. This last sort can allow the different asset
operators: MIL, NGOs, and Contractors to be isolated.
Just as you saw in the previous Chapter and in the Classic View, you can check or
change the detail within the RV. We will check some detail.
DOUBLE CLICK on a location (on the National Flag), then SELECT it in the Pick
Location window and CLICK on Geo Viewer as shown in Figure 7.19.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
CH 7 – OTHER EVE VIEWS AND REPORTS
Page 7 – 11
Figure 7.19
After checking the data for the location CLICK on the Close button and then CLICK the
Cancel button. To return to the Classic View (CV) and for the Tutorial CLICK the CV
button on the toolbar.
CLOSE the current FEP and open the BROWNLAND CHAPTER 7 Flowplan.
Mission Centric View (MV)
The Mission Centric View (MV) allows the operator to monitor:
The movements of an individual asset or selection of assets by Asset Type and MOT
with a default set of filtering criteria.
The movements of an individual force or selection of forces part of the Flowplan, with a
default set of filtering criteria.
The movements of an individual force or selection of forces part of the ADL used to
create the DDP that is the basis of the Flowplan with a default set of filtering criteria.
The movements of an individual Item or selection of Items (RIC based), belonging to
the Force Profile allocated to the ADL, included in the Flowplan with a default set of
filtering criteria. To use this function to its fullest extent the Items must have the correct
RIC allocated.
This Mission Centric View provides the best complete overview of the Flowplan. To
switch from CV to MV, CLICK on the MV button as shown in Figure 7.20.
CLICK the MV button.
Figure 7.20
Alternatively, you can SELECT the Mission Centric View option in the Mode menu or
PRESS Ctrl+Shift+M on your keyboard.
A Mission Centric View as illustrated in Figure 7.21 will appear on the screen.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
CH 7 – OTHER EVE VIEWS AND REPORTS
Page 7 – 12
Filter view
Tree view
(expanded
for Ships).
Missions view
GANTT view
Figure 7.21
This window is divided into four views. These are:
 Tree view: Depending on what information is to be displayed, the Tree view
has a number of options available; the default is by Asset Types. The option
selected will depend on the question being asked.
The default view shows the Asset Types (by MOT) and individual Asset Fleet by
Nations contributing to the FEP; these can be set to display at any level. The
nation selection is made in the Filter view.
This view can be changed to an Asset List to allow you to multi-select between
Asset Types and/or MOTs. Examples of the options and the display differences
are shown in Figures 7.22 and 7.23.
Assets are selected.
Asset Tree, can
be expanded.
Tree view
selected.
Figure 7.22
List option selected.
Assets shown by
Type and Individual
Asset if allocated.
Assets List window can be
enlarged to show Description
and Nation.
These are missions
for selected Assets.
Figure 7.23
Depending on the selection the Movement and GANTT views will display the
Asset Movements.
For the Tutorial SELECT the Asset Type of Air and TUT B-737-99-01. EXPAND
the windows to show Description and Nation.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CH 7 – OTHER EVE VIEWS AND REPORTS
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 7 – 13
 Filter view: The Plan and the accessed DDP (FEP) name are inserted
automatically when the MV is activated. The nation of interest can be selected
using the combo box provided.
The displayed information can be by date. There are Previous Day and Next Day
buttons to allow the user to move from day to day. For the Tutorial, ensure that
the Date tick boxes are DE-ACTIVATED; this will allow all the Asset Movements
to be displayed.
The user is also able to control the status of the displayed information to show
only Arrivals or Departures or both. The MOT button is the same as in the CV.
It is possible to select a Mission Type, as long as it was specified in the Basic
Data options. However, the selection will be only for one type of mission. If we
want to see all missions we should leave the box empty. DO NOT SELECT any
Mission Type.
For the Tutorial, ACTIVATE both the Arrivals and Departures tick boxes and the
Air MOT; then CLICK the Show Movements button as shown in Figure 7.24.
Figure 7.24
 Missions view: This shows the Missions and Legs that relate to the filters
being selected. In this example we can see the TUT B-737-99-01 asset and the
forces being transported as shown in Figure 7.25.
Figure 7.25
 GANTT view: This view shows the selected Missions as a GANTT chart. It is
possible to adjust the window date area by using the Zoom In and Zoom Out
functions; the buttons for these are shown at Figure 7.26.
Zoom In and Zoom
Out buttons
Figure 7.26
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
CH 7 – OTHER EVE VIEWS AND REPORTS
Page 7 – 14
The GANTT Bars can be set to show either the Forces or Missions, or both. So
for example, if you need to see only the Asset planning you should DESELECT
the Forces option in the GANTT Bars section as shown at Figure 7.27.
Figure 7.27
SELECT Missions option only. You will see that a GANTT of only the missions
made by the TUT B-737-99-01 is now shown in Figure 7.28.
Figure 7.28
As we discussed at the beginning of this section, the Missions that are displayed in the
MV window can be based on a number of criteria, depending on the question being
asked. For example:
 On what Missions is a particular Force? SET the Filter Area option to Forces,
as shown in Figure 7.29, SELECT all MOT and then SELECT the force, in this
example the one named 2 Recce Battalion. CLICK the Show Movements button.
SELECT Forces.
Now,
Forces
View is
open.
Gantt View for the Force
selected and associated
assets is shown
Figure 7.29
In the Movement and GANTT views the missions that are being used to move the
force selected can be identified. To make a selection or find multiple forces switch
from the Tree to the List option in the View Style section.
Which are the Missions supporting an ADL (or SOR) Serial? SET the Filter Area
option to ADL and for the Tutorial the View Style to List so that multiple selection
of Forces in ADL can be carried out, as shown in Figure 7.30.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
CH 7 – OTHER EVE VIEWS AND REPORTS
Page 7 – 15
List in View Style Selected.
Filter Area of ADL
selected.
Tree view is ADL
based. List View is
Forces based
Figure 7.30
In the Movement and GANTT views you can now identify the missions that are
being used to move the forces selected in the Tree view. This can be by SOR
Serial in Tree View Style or by the specific ADL Forces in List View Style.
 Which Missions have certain Items loaded to them? SET the Filter Area
option to Items and View Style to Tree, as shown in Figure 7.31. For the Tutorial
SELECT 09900013 Wheeled Recce Vehicle and CLICK the Show Movement
Button. Zoom In or Zoom Out to see the movement of Items.
View Style of Items selected.
Tree view is Item /
RIC based. It can
be expanded to
any level
Figure 7.31
In the Movement and GANTT views you can now identify the missions that are
being used to move the Items selected in the Tree view. You can apply the Item
selection at all levels of RIC.
If Forces has been selected in the GANTT Bars options, all forces having selected
items will be shown as well as seen at Figure 7.31.
Remember that the Filter Area options can be set in combination with the other search
criteria options. In addition, you can use the Filter Area options one after another.
To return to the Classic View CLICK the CV button on the toolbar. When the CV is on
the screen, CLICK the Reset Criteria button to clear the filters.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
CH 7 – OTHER EVE VIEWS AND REPORTS
Page 7 – 16
You are here
General
Introduction
Embedded View
Buttons use.
Exercise 6.1
Exercise 6.2
Slot Allocation
Exercise 6.3
Route-Centric View (RV)
Mission-Centric View (MV)
Tracking View (TV)
Mission Editor View
Movement Management View (MAN)
Request View (REQ)
Reports, Charts and Statistics
Predefined Sets of Statistics
Customized Reports
Exercise 6.4
Archiving Data
Tracking View (TV)
The Tracking View (TV) allows the operator to monitor the movements for an individual
asset, or selection of assets with a default set of filtering criteria. In addition to the
normal Grid display for the Asset Missions, they are also shown in a Map view within
the TV window.
To switch from the CV to TV, CLICK on the TV button as shown in Figure 7.32.
CLICK the TV button.
Figure 7.32
Alternatively, you can SELECT the Tracking View option in the Mode menu or PRESS
Ctrl+Shift+T on your keyboard. The screen will be updated and the TV window as
illustrated in Figure 7.33 will appear on the screen.
Missions views, according to date/time.
Preset Options.
Map view:
According to the
Project and Map
Selected at top of
Figure.
Figure 7.33
Default filter and timing options are displayed when opening the TV view. The following
should be fully understood, particularly when operational transport assets are being
tracked.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
CH 7 – OTHER EVE VIEWS AND REPORTS
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
Page 7 – 17
The displayed maps can be:
 Sourced from the appropriate Map Project in GeoMan. To change Map
Projects, CLICK on the Browse button and SELECT the required *.pro file. The
individual maps within the Map Project will be displayed. You can then navigate
them in the same way as in the GeoMan. CLICK in the top left corner of the
required map or RIGHT CLICK to return to the world map. You can also use the
Map combo box to SELECT the map of interest.
Note: The creation of new maps and management of existing maps in the
Map Project can be carried out in the GeoMan.
For the Tutorial CLICK the Browse button and SELECT Atlantis.pro from your Project
folder and the map named Blue and Orangeland from the Map combo box. Missions
and Positions of your assets will appear as shown in Figure 7.35. On your computer,
the data displayed will be related to the current Date / Time. Locations are included on
the Map.
You will need to set a date when there is some movement activity. This date could be
different on your computer depending on the date of training. Find a date where there
is some activity and insert that date into the date selection box in the Tracking View.

In the Timing the operator can:
o
Emulate the planned missions and apply the required speed of display.
o
Control the speed of the refresh (update) of the display window.
o
Show the planned missions in real time (based on your computer clock).
Figure 7.34
Missions Icons
with arrows
indicating
direction of
movements.
Location part of
the DDP, if
selected in the
Show Object
dialog.
Figure 7.35
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
CH 7 – OTHER EVE VIEWS AND REPORTS
Page 7 – 18
The Show Object allows you to see the position of the Asset:
 This is normally a projected position based on a simple calculation, which
takes into account the speed of the Asset, the network and the planned timings of
the Asset.

It can also be the reported position, as recorded in the Mission Editor View or
directly linked to a set of tracks stored within CORSOM or EVE. This last method
can only be achieved if a manual or automatic tracking system is being used (as
is happening currently in ISAF).
The Tracking option is mostly self-explanatory. However, the Show Tracks not linked to
a mission option may need a little explanation. It only allows you to view tracks to which
you have been given access. If this is the case it can be useful in dealing with delays
and cancellations.
The Networks (Routes) are created and assigned in the GeoMan. You should refer to
Chapter 2 for further details. For the Tutorial, SELECT all MOT as shown in Figure
7.36. You will now see all the networks loaded from the Database in GeoMan.
Figure 7.36
The Labels dialog allows you to gain access to the data and display names. For more
detail about the Asset or the Locations you can DOUBLE CLICK on the required icon.

For Assets this will display the Mission Editor View.
 For Locations this will display the Geo Viewer window. Here you will be able
to see the data held for the location. Changes to this must be made using the
GeoMan.
Figure 7.37
The Google Earth option is only available if you subscribe to the service. If this is the
case CLICK on the Google Earth button and navigate as usual. Networks and
Locations will continue to be displayed.
The Show only selected acts as a refresh view button.
To return to the Classic View CLICK the CV button on the toolbar. When the CV is on
the screen, CLICK the Reset Criteria button to clear the filters.
Mission Editor View
The Mission Editor View is used to show and enter the detail of the movements for a
Transport Asset whether it is being planned or during execution. In addition, it can be
used to create or update the planned missions for a selected Asset and to insert or
delete individual journey legs. The Mission Editor was fully explained in Chapter 6 and
so we will just briefly show how to access the view and create a mission.
There are a number of ways to access the Mission Editor View for an existing mission;
these are:
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
CH 7 – OTHER EVE VIEWS AND REPORTS
Page 7 – 19
In all the main EVE Views, DOUBLE-CLICK on the Grey Field at the left side of the
individual mission rows as shown in Figure 7.38.
Double-click on the
Grey Row Edge
field.
Figure 7.38
In the TV DOUBLE CLICK on the individual asset icon within the Map window as
shown in Figure 7.39.
Double-click on
the Asset Icon.
Figure 7.39
To insert a new Asset Mission the options are:
 To IMPORT the mission directly from a Movement Request Form; this was
discussed in detail at Chapter 5.
From the main menu you can CLICK on the FEP menu and select the Insert
Mission option as shown in Figure 7.40.
Figure 7.40
 With any of the basic EVE views open, you can use the ALT+INS keys on the
keyboard.
 With any of the basic EVE views open, you can CLICK the Insert shortcut icon
on the toolbar as shown in Figure 7.41.
Figure 7.41
Manifest Management View (MAN)
The Manifest Management View (MAN) allows the operator to manage and monitor the
manifests, allocations of passengers and cargo movements for an individual asset or
selection of assets. There is a default set of filtering criteria. Details were explained in
Chapter 6 and will not be repeated.
Request View (REQ)
The Request View (REQ) allows the operator to manage and monitor any requests for
Pax/Cargo movements entering the database in a single window. Details were
explained at Chapter 6 and will not be repeated.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
CH 7 – OTHER EVE VIEWS AND REPORTS
Page 7 – 20
CLICK the CV button and return to the Classic View window. CLOSE the Flowplan
Reports, Charts and Statistics
There are a number of reports, charts and statistical formats that can be taken directly
from EVE. These formats supplement the various reports that can be obtained from
the LDM and GeoMan. The details for creating these are given in the ADAMS Tutorial.
The detail that is included in an individual report will depend on the detailed
requirements of the individual user or location.
Note: The EVE user should consult the reports/charts and criteria that are
required at an individual location. SOPs will normally give the frequency and
distribution of the reports.
The following section will show the principles for creating the reports and charts in
EVE.
For the Tutorial OPEN the Fully Sourced Alliance DDP Flowplan. CLICK the Reset
Criteria button then the Show Movements button.
CLICK on the Statistics menu and you will see the options illustrated in Figure 7.42.
Preset
Reports and
Charts for
locations
PAX and
cargo.
Preset
Reports
and
Charts
for
missions
data.
Customized
reports build
on demand.
OPS search
functions.
Figure 7.42
The Define Statistics Criteria options allows the user to define the statistical criteria,
that the report/chart will be based on, by SELECTING or DE-SELECTING (ACTIVATE
or DEACTIVATE the ticks) as shown in Figure 7.43.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
CH 7 – OTHER EVE VIEWS AND REPORTS
Page 7 – 21
Figure 7.43
Predefined Sets of Statistics
The second, third and fourth sections of the drop-down menu describe a series of preset report and chart formats. The options available are self-explanatory and we will not
go into detail here. Suffice it to say that experimentation with the various options and
criteria will assist you to find the report that you need.
We will examine the Port Utilization by Nation/Port option. The method used will be the
same for all the pre-set reports and charts.
CLICK the Port Utilization by Nation/Port option. Figure 7.44 or similar will open.
Figure 7.44
Use the File menu and SELECT the Export To Excel option to export the statistics.
Once exported the XLS can be viewed and printed.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
CH 7 – OTHER EVE VIEWS AND REPORTS
Page 7 – 22
You can produce a chart and refine the statistics using the options provided in the
Chart menu, see Figure 7.45. For the Tutorial SELECT the Show chart option from the
Chart dropdown menu. IGNORE any error message by clicking the Cancel button each
time an error message appears.
Figure 7.45
A chart similar to Figure 7.46 will be displayed. A tool bar at the top of window allows
saving, printing and customising. For the picture we used a selection of the wide range
of tools provided.
Figure 7.46
LOGFAS 6.1 added two more statistical options:
 Fuel requested per Port/Type. Figure 7.47 shows such a statistic for
BENDEGUZ Airport where B-737, C-130 and C17 were landing. Note that both
types of fuel used are shown on the graph.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
CH 7 – OTHER EVE VIEWS AND REPORTS
Page 7 – 23
Figure 7.47
Check for duplicate requests. An example is shown in Figure 7.48 where we can see
the booking made at chapter 6 for M. Lezard.
Figure 7.48
Customised Reports
The purpose of these reports is to create customised reports which require different
information from the normal pre-formatted reports available.
The process is quite complex and a detailed description is beyond the scope of this
Tutorial.
However, there may be locations where the EVE Manager stipulates that such reports
are to be used. We will explain the process briefly in case this occurs.
For the Tutorial we will show how to generate one report as an example. It will be a
report to show the number of Asset Movements in the FEP, broken down by Nations
and Asset types. The report can also be sorted by assets and a chart produced.
To generate a Movements Report, CLICK on the Statistics menu and then SELECT
the Movements option as shown in Figure 7.49.
The process, using the Movements option applies equally as well to ports, missions
(with POC) and Pax/cargo requests.
Figure 7.49
The report format window similar to that shown in Figure 7.50 will appear on the
screen.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
CH 7 – OTHER EVE VIEWS AND REPORTS
Page 7 – 24
Figure 7.50
You must remember the value for the field DDP ID.
This number varies with the database used and DDPs in database.
CLICK the Load From File button. SOPs should indicate the folder from which to load
such files. For the Tutorial an example is in the Eve Mail In folder and is called
Movement Statistics.MVS. Once the file has been loaded the Basic output fields should
look similar to Figure 7.51.
Figure 7.51
You window is now updated. CLICK the OK button.
If the function does not work, RE-LOAD the file, CHANGE the value of the DDP ID to
the one noted previously and CLICK the OK button again. This should not happen very
often.
Now CLICK the OK button and the report will be generated. The Movements Statistics
window will appear on the screen. An illustration of this is shown in Figure 7.52. The
report has been sorted by Asset Type.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
CH 7 – OTHER EVE VIEWS AND REPORTS
Page 7 – 25
Figure 7.52
You can use normal Windows functions to sort the information being displayed;
You can also generate a chart. The chart can be modified by picking the required data
from the X and Y Axis and Group combo boxes. See Figure 7.53.
Figure 7.53
You can preview and/or print the generated report directly from EVE. To see a print
preview, CLICK on the Print Preview button on the toolbar as shown in Figure 7.54.
Print Preview
button.
Figure 7.54
The print preview window as shown in Figure 7.55 will appear on the screen.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
CH 7 – OTHER EVE VIEWS AND REPORTS
Page 7 – 26
Figure 7.55
You can now see how the information would appear if you wanted to print it directly
from EVE. CLICK on the Close button and the preview window will be removed from
the screen. To print the displayed information, CLICK on the Print button.
The detail and displayed information can also be saved in MS Excel format.
For the Tutorial CLICK the Export to Excel button, this is shown in Figure 7.56.
Export to Excel button.
Figure 7.56
This function allows you to take data from the database and then use normal MS Excel
functions to adjust the data. You can also create charts and tables, which can then be
added to other MS Office Applications (e.g. Word Documents or PowerPoint Slides).
For the Tutorial CLICK the Export to Excel button. When prompted in the Save As
window, INSERT the File name of Stats Example 1 and the Save in location of EVE
Mail Out. You can now use the saved file as a normal MS Excel worksheet.
CLOSE the EVE module.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
CH 7 – OTHER EVE VIEWS AND REPORTS
Page 7 – 27
Exercise 6 - 4
Open the BROWNLAND CHAPTER 6 Flowplan.
How many missions are planned for this deployment?
Produce a chart showing the number of missions per location.
How many strategic leg missions (Maritime and Air) are planned for this deployment to
Blueland?
Show them on a chart by type of asset. It should be similar to the one below in Figure
7.57.
.
Figure 7.57
Archiving Data
As you will appreciate, as EVE is used there will be a build-up of data in the individual
FEP. Therefore, there is a need for a function that allows the user to remove completed
missions, which are no longer needed.
This data could be deleted from the FEP, but then the data would be removed from the
database and would be lost forever.
It may be that you may want to clean up your FEP without losing the removed data for
future reference. To achieve this, it is possible to archive unwanted data from the FEP
while keeping it in the database.
Note: The format and frequency of the archiving process should be included in
SOPs. By default, the program archives all data more than 7 days old (this can be
changed). Therefore, if the process is carried out on the 7th of each month, the
data for the previous month will be archived.
The data can be archived by arrivals, departures or both; the basic process is the
same. In essence, the process is to create an empty FEP and then to transfer the data
for archiving into it.
We will not describe the process. It is normally the responsibility of the EVE Site
Manager. SOPs should state the configuration for archiving and the periods to archive.
The full explanation is given in the EVE Manager Guide.
This ends Chapter 7.
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
CH 7 – OTHER EVE VIEWS AND REPORTS
Page 7 – 28
This Page Intentionally Blank
NATO UNCLASSIFIED Releasable to PfP
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED
GLOSSARY
Page G - 1
Glossary
Item
Meaning(s)
# Cmpts
#
Number of Components
Short key for number
A
AAA
AAM
AB
ACCIS
ACE
ACO
ACROSS
ACT
ACT
ADA
ADAMS
ADD
ADL
ADMEM
AFP
AFV
AGM
AGMEM
AINS
ALEST
AP
APC
APOD
APOE
ARR or Arr
Art 5
ATA
ATD
ATO
ATW
Anti-Air Artillery
Air to Air Missile
Air Base
ACE Information System
Allied Command Europe
Allied Command Operations (SHAPE)
Allied Commands Resource Optimisation Software System
Allied Command Transformation
Actual Time View (EVE)
Actual Day of Arrival (EVE)
Allied Deployment and Movement System
Actual Day of Departure (EVE)
Allied Disposition List
Air Defence Munitions Expenditure Model
Airfield Flow-plan (EVE)
Armoured Fighting Vehicle
Air-to-Ground Missile
Air-to-Ground Munitions Expenditure Model
Army Installation
Airlift Equivalent Short Tons
Airport
Armoured Personnel Carrier
Airport of Debarkation
Airport of Embarkation
Arrival (EVE)
Article 5 Operation (NATO)
Actual Time of Arrival (EVE)
Actual Time of Departure (EVE)
Air Task Order (used in EVE)
Anti-tank Weapon
B
BCP
Bde
BDM
BG
Bn or BTN
Bty
BXP
Border Crossing Point (See also BXP)
Brigade
Battle Decisive Munitions (ACROSS)
Battle Group
Battalion
Battery (Artillery Unit)
Border Crossing Point (See also BCP)
C
C-Day
CIS
NATO UNCLASSIFIED
The day on which movement commences or is planned to
commence
Communication and Information Systems
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED
GLOSSARY
Page G - 2
cm
CM
Cmpt
CN
CNX
CO
Combo
COP
CORSOM
Coy
CRD
CRO
Ctrl
CV
cz
CZ
Centimetre
Centimetres
Component
Component
Cancel (EVE)
Sort Key for ‘Civilian Organisation’
Combination
Contingency Operational Plan
Coalition Reception, Staging and Onward Movement Module
Company
Commanders (CINC's) Required (Delivery) Date
Crisis Response Operation (formally PSO or OSI)
Control
Classic View (EVE)
Cubic Metre
Cubic Metres
D
DAL
dB or DB
DCA
DCP
D-Day
DDM
DDP
DDP Wiz
DEM
DEP or Dep
Descript
Dest
DF
DMT
DOS
DPM
DPQ
DRR
DWT
Desired Achievement Level (ACROSS)
Database
Defensive Counter Air
Divisional Combat Potential (ACROSS)
The day on which an operation starts or is planned to start
Deployment Display Module
Detailed Deployment Plan
Detailed Deployment Plan Wizard
Data Expert Meeting
Departure (EVE)
Description
Destination
Deployable Forces
Data Migration Tool
Days of Supply
Deployment Planning Module
Defence Planning Questionnaire
Defence Requirements Review
Dead Weight Tons
E
EDA
EDD
EEF
Est
ETA
ETD
ETTW
EV
EVE
Estimated Day of Arrival (EVE)
Estimated Day of Departure (EVE)
Effectiveness Enhancement Factor
Estimated
Estimated Time of Arrival (EVE)
Estimated Time of Departure (EVE)
Enter Territorial Waters (Navy equivalent to BXP)
Embedded View (EVE)
Effective Visible Execution
F
FAP
FD or Final D
Forward Area Point
Final Destination
NATO UNCLASSIFIED
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED
GLOSSARY
Page G - 3
FDF
FEP
FIDS
FLOT
FLR
FOL
FP
FPH
FoM
Fire Distribution Factor (ACROSS)
Flow Execution Plan (EVE)
Force Identification System
Front Line of Troops
Forces Low Readiness
Forward Operating Location
Force Profile
Force Profile and Holdings
Figure of Merit
G
GBAD
GCD
G-Day
GDM
GEO or Geo
GeoLocs
GeoMan
GOP
Gp
GP
Ground Based Air Defence
Great Circle Distance
The Day on which Deployment is Authorised
General Deployment Module
GEOMAN or Geographical
Geographical Locations
Geographical Data Manager
Guidelines for Operational Planning
Group
General Purpose
H
HB
Helo
HET
HILEX
HNS or Host Nt Sp
HQ
Hr
HRF
Ht
Home Base
Helicopter
Heavy Equipment Transporter
High Level Exercise
Host Nation Support
Headquarters
Hour
High Readiness Forces
Height
I
IAP
ICAO
ID
IFF
IFOR
IMO
Inf
Info
IPF
IRF
ISO
ITAS
IWW
International Airport
International Civil Air Organisation
Identity - Identity Code
Identify Friend or Foe (EVE)
Implementation Force
International Maritime Organisation
Infantry
Information
In Place Force
Immediate Reaction Force
International Standard Organisation
Intra Theatre Airlift Service
Inland Waterway
K
Kb
Kg
Kls
Light-duty rail flatcar – 27 tonnes
Kilogram
Light-duty rail flatcar – 27 tonnes
NATO UNCLASSIFIED
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED
GLOSSARY
Page G - 4
km
Kilometre
L
LAN
Lat/Lon or LAT LONG
LAV
LC
LCM
LDD
LDM
LEF
LEMEM
LGB
LIM(S) or Lim(s)
FLR
LOA
LOC
LOE
Log
LOGBASE
LOGFAS
LOGFASMS
LOGREP
LTBF
Lth
Ltrs
LTTW
Local Area Network
Latitude/Longitude
Light Armoured Vehicle
Legal Combination (set of concurrent planning situations)
LOGFAS Connection Manager
Latest (Last) Delivery Date
LOGFAS Data Management Module
Lifetime Enhancement Factor
Land Forces Equipment Munitions Expenditure Model
Laser Guided Bomb
Lane or Linear Metres
Forces of Lower Readiness
Length Overall
Lines of Communication
Level of Effort
Logistic(s)
Logistic Database
Logistics Functional Area Services
LOGFAS Mediation Service
Logistic Reporting
Long Term Build-up Forces
Length
Litres
Leave Territorial Waters (Navy equivalent of BXP)
M
MA
MARMEM
M-Day
M or m
M2 or m2
M3 or m3
Max
MBT
Mech
MEEL (or MEE)
MEU
MEZ
MGRS
MILS
MLC
MOG
Min / min
MOT
MOVCON
MRF
MP
MS
NATO UNCLASSIFIED
Marshalling Area
Maritime Munitions Expenditure Model
The day that mobilisation commences or is planned to
commence
Metres
Square Metres
Cubic Metres
Maximum
Main Battle Tank
Mechanized
Mission Essential Equipment List
Marine Expeditionary Unit
Missile Engagement Zone
Military Grid Reference System
Military Installation/Military symbols
Military Load Class
Maximum On Ground
Minute or minimum
Mode of Transport
Movement Control
Movement Request Form (used in EVE)
Military Police
Microsoft
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED
GLOSSARY
Page G - 5
MSR
MV
Main Supply Route
Mission Centric View (EVE)
N
NATO
NB
NBC
NC3A
NCSA
NCSP
NCISS
NDL
NEQ
NFC
NFL
NIC
NIRS
NOS
NOTAM
NPS
NSE
NSN
NVG
North Atlantic Treaty Organisation
Narrow Body
Nuclear Biological and Chemical
NATO C3 Agency
NATO CIS Services Agency
National Contribution to Stockpile Plan (ACROSS)
NATO Communication and Information Systems School
National Disposition List
Net Explosive Quantity
National Force Contributions
National Force List
National Identity Code
Network Interoperable Real-Time Information System
Not Otherwise Specified
Notices to Airmen (EVE)
National Parameter Set
National Support Element
NATO Stock Number
NATO Vector Graphics
O
OAO
OOA
OPFOR
OPG
Ops
Offensive Air Operation
Out of Area
Opposition Force
Operational Planning Group
Operations
P
Pax or PAX
Pers
PGM
PIN
PM
POC
POD
POE
POL
PPR
Prev
Prio
PRO or Pro
PS
Pty
Passengers or Personnel
Personnel
Precision Guided Munitions
Personal Identity Number
Planning Module
Point Of Contact
Port of Debarkation
Port of Embarkation
Petroleum Oils and Lubricants
Prior Permission Required
Previous (EVE)
Priority
Project
Planning Situation
Party
Q
Qty
Quantity
NATO UNCLASSIFIED
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED
GLOSSARY
Page G - 6
R
RAP
RCR
RDD
Rec/Rep
Rem
Rgt
RIC
Rlmmp
RORO
Rs
RSOM
RTM
RV
Rear Area Point
Regional Controlled Route
Required Delivery Date
Recovery/Repair
Remainder
Regiment
Reportable Item Code
Heavy-duty rail flatcar – 52 tonnes
Roll on Roll Off
Heavy-duty rail flatcar – 56 tonnes
Reception, Staging and Onward Movement
Ready To Move
Route Centric View (EVE)
S
SA
SACT
SACEUR
SAM
Samms
SC
SDM
SDOS
SEAD
SEE
Ser
SHAPE
SOR
SP
SPC
SPG
SPM
SPOD
SPOE
SQE
SQL
Sqn
SRF
SRPS
Staging Area
Supreme Allied Commander Transformation
Supreme Allied Commander Europe
Surface to Air Missile
Heavy-duty rail flatcar - 65 tonnes
Strategic Command (ACO/ACT)
Supply Distribution Model
Standard Days of Supply
Suppression of Enemy Air Defences
Synthetic Exercise Environment
Serial (Number)
Supreme Headquarters Allied Powers Europe
Statement of Requirement
Sea Port
Stockpile Planning Committee
Stockpile Planning Guidance
Sustainment Planning Module
Seaport of Debarkation
Seaport of Embarkation
Squadron Equivalent (ACROSS)
Structured Query Language
Squadron
Slot Request Form (used by EVE)
SACEUR's Reinforcement Planning System
T
Tab
TCN
TCR
TEU
TFE
Tk or TK
TOPFAS
TRM
TV
TVD
Tabulate - Tabulation Key
Troop Contributing Nation
Theatre Controlled Route
Twenty Foot Equivalent Unit
Transportation Feasibility Estimator
Truck
Tools for Operations Planning Functional Area Services
Target Related Methodology
Tracking View (EVE)
Target Value Destroyed
NATO UNCLASSIFIED
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED
GLOSSARY
Page G - 7
TXT or Txt
Text
U
UIC
UMM
URL
UTM
Unit Identity Code
User Management Module
Uniform Resource Locator (use for EVE)
Universal Transverse Mercator (Grid)
V
Very Heavy
VFR
Used in relation to railcars and is normally a railcar that can
carry loads in excess of 65 tonnes.
Visual Flight Rules
W
WAN
WB
WBC
WinMAM
Wth
Wide Area Network
Wide Body
Weight Bearing Capacity
Windows Munitions Allocation Module
Width
X
xml
XX or XXX
Extended Mark-up Language (file type)
Sort Key for Training Data
Z
ZZ or ZZZ
Sort Key for Exercise Nation or Data
NATO UNCLASSIFIED
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED
GLOSSARY
Page G - 8
This Page Intentionally Blank
NATO UNCLASSIFIED
LOGFAS Version 6.1
Doc Vs 1
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
This Page Intentionally Blank
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
NATO UNCLASSIFIED releasable to PfP
Download PDF

advertising